![DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder Instruction Manual bvh2407gb [PDF]](https://pdfs.asia/img/200x200/disocont-tersus-weighfeeder-instruction-manual-bvh2407gb.jpg)
1 0 5 MB
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder Instruction Manual
BV-H2407 GB
Legal Notice
PASS - Service you can rely on Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support across the entire product life cycle. With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever – you need us. During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyze problems and failures. Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions? Then our service system PASS is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
© by Schenck Process GmbH Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany Phone: +49 6151 1531-0 ; www.schenckprocess.com All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation, regardless of method, without prior permission by Schenck Process GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited. Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: Translation of the original German Instruction
(origin: ST4, 9007199727104651 V2)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents 1
About This Manual ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................1 ................................1
2 Safety notes................................ notes................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ .......................................................................... ..........................................3 ..........3 2.1 Signal Words .........................................................................................................................................4 2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ................................................................................................4 2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes ..............................................................................................5 2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ..........................................................................................6 2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ........................................................................................6 3 General Diagram ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ .................................................................. ..................................7 ..7 3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?...........................................................................................................7 3.2 Some Definitions ...................................................................................................................................8 3.3 Measuring principle ...............................................................................................................................8 3.4 Control operating modes .................................................................................................................... 10 3.5 Control strategies ............................................................................................................................... 10 3.5.1 Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity ................................................................................. 10 3.5.2 The beltweigher with feed control .............................................................................................. 12 3.5.3 Beltweigher with a constant load ............................................................................................... 13 3.6 Belt Influence Compensation BIC....................................................................................................... 13 3.7 Measuring and Feeding at the Discharge Point (VAP) ...................................................................... 14 3.8 Batching .............................................................................................................................................. 14 3.9 Additional Bin Weighers ..................................................................................................................... 15 4 Operation................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ ............................................................................ ............................................17 4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power ................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Operating and Control Access............................................................................................................ 17 4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ........................................ 18 4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable .................................................................................................. 18 4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 18 4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485 ............................................................................................................... 19 4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 19 4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet ............................................................................................................. 19 4.2.2.2 Connection via WLAN ................................................................................................................ 20 4.2.2.3 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 20 4.2.2.4 Connection via RS-232 .............................................................................................................. 20 4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 21 4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU) .......................................................................... 21 4.3 VHM operating panel .......................................................................................................................... 23 4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields ..................................................................................................... 24 4.3.1.1 Name of the Device .................................................................................................................... 24 4.3.1.2 Event messages ......................................................................................................................... 24 4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range .................................................................................................... 25 4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation ........................................................................................................................ 25 4.3.1.5 Detail Selection .......................................................................................................................... 26 4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics ................................................................................................. 26
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -i-
Table of Contents
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys ........................................................................................................... 26 4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation ................................................................................................... 26 4.3.2 Authorization for Control Commands ......................................................................................... 26 4.3.2.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation............................................. 26 4.3.2.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .......... 27 4.3.2.3 Access to Special Functions ...................................................................................................... 27 4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions ......................................................................................................... 27 4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off ............................................................................................................... 28 4.3.3.2 Set setpoint ................................................................................................................................ 28 4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint ........................................................................................................................ 28 4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter............................................................................ 29 4.3.3.5 Acknowledging Event Messages ............................................................................................... 29 4.3.4 Special Operating Functions ...................................................................................................... 30 4.3.4.1 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation............... 30 4.3.4.2 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ........................................................................................................... 30 4.3.4.3 Trend .......................................................................................................................................... 31 4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display .............................................................................................. 33 4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ................................................................................. 34 4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings .............................................................................................. 34 4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. ....................................................................... 34 4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation .......................................................................................... 34 4.3.5 Service Functions ....................................................................................................................... 35 4.3.5.1 Display Parameter Alterations.................................................................................................... 35 4.3.5.2 Reading and Setting Parameters ............................................................................................... 35 4.3.5.3 Setting the Clock ........................................................................................................................ 36 4.3.5.4 Reset to Factory Settings ........................................................................................................... 36 4.3.5.5 Simulation Mode ........................................................................................................................ 36 4.3.5.6 Operating the calibration functions ............................................................................................ 37 4.3.6 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ....................................................................................... 37 4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration ...................................................................................................... 37 4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ............................................................................................... 38 4.3.6.3 Setting the Display ..................................................................................................................... 38 4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) ............................................................................ 39 4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config) ....................................................................................................... 39 4.3.6.6 Configuring the Communication Path (Com) ............................................................................. 39 4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen ...................................................................................................... 40 4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) .................................................................................. 40 4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) .......................................................................................... 41 4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information ........................................................................................ 41 4.4 Calibration programs .......................................................................................................................... 41 4.4.1 Determining the duration of a belt circuit ................................................................................... 41 4.4.2 Tare the beltweigher .................................................................................................................. 42 4.4.3 Checking the continuous scale with a calibration weight ........................................................... 43 4.4.4 Continuous scale zero setting .................................................................................................... 44 4.4.5 Taring the bin weigher................................................................................................................ 45 4.4.6 Bin weight control ....................................................................................................................... 46 4.4.7 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .................................................................................... 46 4.4.8 Automatic control measurement unit (KME) .............................................................................. 47 4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement .................................................................................................. 48 4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME) ............................................................................... 50
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - ii -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
5 Startup ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................53 5.1 Mechanical Prerequisites ................................................................................................................... 53 5.2 Assembling the Electrical Components .............................................................................................. 54 5.3 Electrical Connections ........................................................................................................................ 54 5.4 Entering Basic parameters ................................................................................................................. 54 5.5 Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................... 54 5.6 Scale calibration ................................................................................................................................. 55 5.7 The Setting Regulation ....................................................................................................................... 55 5.7.1 Adjusting the external flow rate controller .................................................................................. 55 5.7.2 Adjusting the feeding controller .................................................................................................. 56 5.8 Setting belt run monitoring.................................................................................................................. 56 5.9 Activating belt influence compensation (BIC) ..................................................................................... 58 5.10 Activating measurement and feeding with reference to the discharge point (VAP) ........................... 58 5.11 Setting Control .................................................................................................................................... 59 5.11.1 Function Check .......................................................................................................................... 59 5.11.2 Checking the scale with calibration weights ............................................................................... 59 5.11.3 Belt Velocity Check .................................................................................................................... 59 5.12 Check with bulk solids ........................................................................................................................ 60 5.13 Calibrating bin weighing ..................................................................................................................... 61 6
Maintenance and Recalibration ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ........................................................................... ...........................................63
7 Parameters ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ ......................................................................... .........................................65 7.1 Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................... 66 7.2 Configuring the Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 66 7.3 Configuring Event Messages.............................................................................................................. 68 7.4 Parameter List .................................................................................................................................... 69 7.4.1 Parameter Overview .................................................................................................................. 69 7.4.2 Parameter Details ...................................................................................................................... 93 7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules .................................................................................. 93 7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ..................................................................................... 96 7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ................................................................................... 101 7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources .................................................................................... 103 7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data ............................................................................................ 106 7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ....................................................................................... 109 7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring ................................................................................. 114 7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters..................................................................................................... 117 7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ........................................................................................... 118 7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................... 120 7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ....................................................................................... 121 7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................... 128 7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................... 131 7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ....................................................................................... 136 7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ........................................................................................... 139 7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval ............................................................................. 143 7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - VAP ....................................................................................................... 144 7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Belt Monitoring ...................................................................................... 144 7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................... 148 7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Communication Fieldbus....................................................................... 148 7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Fixed mode configuration ...................................................................... 153 7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Ethernet ................................................................................................. 157 7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - PLC Outputs .......................................................................................... 157 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - iii -
Table of Contents
7.4.2.24 7.4.2.25 7.4.2.26 7.4.2.27 7.4.2.28 7.4.2.29 7.4.2.30 7.4.2.31 7.4.2.32 7.4.2.33 7.4.2.34 7.4.2.35 7.4.2.36 7.4.2.37 7.4.2.38 7.4.2.39 7.4.2.40 7.4.2.41
Parameter Block 24 - Interlocking ............................................................................................ 159 Parameter Block 25 - Belt Load Controller .............................................................................. 162 Parameter Block 26 - Bin Weigher ........................................................................................... 170 Parameter Block 27 - Bin Level Controller ............................................................................... 178 Parameter Block 28 - 2nd Weighbridge ................................................................................... 182 Parameter Block 29 - Check System ....................................................................................... 187 Parameter Block 30 - Moisture................................................................................................. 200 Parameter Block 31 - Dead Time ............................................................................................. 203 Parameter Block 32 - Linearization .......................................................................................... 205 Parameter Block 33 - Flow Gate .............................................................................................. 207 Parameter Block 34 - 2-Sensor Slip ......................................................................................... 208 Parameter Block 35 - Pressure Compensation........................................................................ 210 Parameter Block 36 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................. 214 Parameter Block 37 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................ 218 Parameter Block 38 - Data Logging ......................................................................................... 221 Parameter Block 39 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................... 223 Parameter Block 40 - Local Mode (Speed) .............................................................................. 225 Parameter Block 41 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................ 234
8 Event Messages ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................... 237 8.1 Events Details ................................................................................................................................... 237 8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration .......................................................................................................... 237 8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement .......................................................................................... 239 8.1.3 Event Group: Controller ........................................................................................................... 242 8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System ............................................................................................... 244 8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock ............................................................................................................. 246 8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow...................................................................................................... 247 8.1.7 Event Group: MAX ................................................................................................................... 247 8.1.8 Event Group: Mechanic ............................................................................................................ 250 8.1.9 Event Group: MIN .................................................................................................................... 251 8.1.10 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ......................................................................................... 253 8.1.11 Event Group: System Message ............................................................................................... 254 9 Appendix ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ .......................................................................... .......................................... 257 9.1 Setpoint and switch-on sources........................................................................................................ 257 9.2 Measuring the flow rate (M) .............................................................................................................. 260 9.3 Flow rate controller ........................................................................................................................... 262 9.4 Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................... 267 9.5 Belt slip identification ........................................................................................................................ 268 9.5.1 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ............................................................................................... 268 9.5.2 2-sensor slip monitoring ........................................................................................................... 269 9.6 Local operation ................................................................................................................................. 270 9.6.1 Controlling with VLG ................................................................................................................ 270 9.6.2 Controlling with VMO ............................................................................................................... 271 9.6.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves ................................................................. 273 9.6.2.2 The logic for position-controlled feed gates ............................................................................. 275 9.7 Belt load regulation of the velocity-controlled weighfeeder .............................................................. 276 9.8 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit ......................................................................................................... 281 9.9 Continuous bin fill level control ......................................................................................................... 282 9.10 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ......................................................................... 284 9.11 Linearization ..................................................................................................................................... 285 9.12 Correction of the foreign substance portion (moisture) .................................................................... 285
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - iv -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
9.13 Correction with a known quantity...................................................................................................... 286 9.14 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ....................................................................................... 287 9.15 Weighing Platforms .......................................................................................................................... 289 9.15.1 Effective Weighing Platform Length ........................................................................................ 289 9.15.2 Calibration Weight .................................................................................................................... 291 9.15.3 Belt inclination ......................................................................................................................... 292 9.16 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ................................................................................. 293 9.17 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ............................................ 294 9.18 PLC Functionality (Optional)............................................................................................................. 295 9.18.1 Handling the Function Blocks................................................................................................... 296 9.18.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals .......................................................................................... 297 9.18.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals ......................................................................................... 298 9.19 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation ....................................................................... 300 Index ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................ 301
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -v-
About This Manual
1 About This Manual The operating manual for weighfeeders is intended both for the operating personnel for the scale and for service technicians. It describes the functionality of the VWF 20170-001 software.
The following software releases or later must be available to ensure that a DISOCONT Tersus system will operate correctly with this software version: ▪ VHM 20170-006 → VHM operating panel ▪ VPC 20150-021 → Schenck Process EasyServe
▪
▪
For the sake of simplicity, the DISOCONT Tersus system will also be called the weighing electronics, controller, scale or unit hereinafter. – The BV-H2406 system manual contains information on its electronic structure. – DISOCONT is a registered trademark of Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt. The Windows-based Schenck Process EasyServe program is a service tool for conveniently handling continuous scales based on weighing electronics such as DISOCONT Tersus. – For the sake of simplicity, this tool will also briefly be called EasyServe here. – The BV-H2185 operating manual describes EasyServe's functionality.
This manual is available in different forms: ▪ A printed version ▪ An electronic document in the platform-independent ADOBE format (file ending: *.PDF) ▪ As online help in the Microsoft Windows HTMLHelp format (file ending: *.CHM)
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -1-
Safety notes
2 Safety notes To avoid personal injury and material damage, follow the safety regulations stated below. Additionally you should also observe: ▪ Safety information given in order-specific documentation ▪ Safety information relating to mechanical components ▪ Instructions and safety instructions for parts manufactured by thrid-party suppliers or parts that are not part of Schenck's scope of delivery. When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Use The measuring system and connected mechanical components is intended solely for weighing tasks and related control applications. It is not intended for any other use.
Risks If properly installed and put into service the measuring system itself does not represent a hazard. Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Potential sources of danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported or metered in. Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators improperly handle the system. This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The operating company is fully responsible for overall plant safety.
Personnel Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by qualified personnel. All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the technical documentation relevant to their work. The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions given.
Changing parameters The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only personnel familiar with the device's mode of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Parameters incorrectly set may cause injuries or damage to the machine whenever a control system is connected. They can also adversely affect weighing operation.
Password Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating company has to ensure safe password handling.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -3-
Safety notes
Acknowledging Event Messages Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied. Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.
Service and Maintenance Maintenance ▪ ▪
▪ ▪
Observe any warning symbols on the scales. The measuring system must be shut down before work is performed on mechanical equipment or peripheral devices (control systems in particular). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring system cannot be inadvertently restarted. Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply (pull the plug!). The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.
Moisture and Humidity All of the parts of the scales, particularly electrical components, must be protected from moisture and humidity when the housing is open such as during service work. Observe housing protection standards.
Design Modifications Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which could affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this requirement is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the warranty will be void.
2.1
Signal Signal Words
2.1.1
Signal Words for Safety Warnings
Potential hazards will always exist when working with technical devices. Hazards will arise if the machine ▪ is incorrectly installed, ▪ is started up incorrectly, ▪ is operated by untrained personnel, or ▪ is repaired by unqualified personnel.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -4-
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Safety notes
In this manual the following signal words will indicate hazards that may arise when using this machine:
DANGER This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the most severe injuries up to and including death. Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
WARNING This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up to and including death. Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
CAUTION This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium injuries. Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
2.1.2
Signal Words for Application Notes
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environmental damage could occur. Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
HINT Signal word used to identify information on using the product economically and at an optimal level of efficiency.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -5-
Safety notes
2.2
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering Engineering
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems. Once the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER Electric shock from live components. There is a danger of life from an electric shock. – Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on live components. Observe, among other things, the following: 1. Disconnect the components. 2. Secure them against inadvertent restart. 3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized. 4. Above 1 KV: earth and bypass the cables. 5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
2.3
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components DANGER Live damaged or defective components There is a danger of life from an electric shock. – Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are neither damaged nor defective. 1. Qualified personnel must immediately replace or, if possible, repair damaged or defective electrical components.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -6-
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
3 General Diagram The basic functions of the DISOCONT Tersus in combination with a feeder or measuring equipment will be explained in this chapter.
3.1
What is the the DISOCONT Tersus?
DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile modular electronic system for weighing and feeding technology. Its components are: ▪ the VCU control unit ('scales controller') ▪ the VHM local operating panel ▪ Input/output expansion modules The DISOCONT Tersus has been designed for continuous measurement and control tasks or for discontinuous batching. All weighing-related functions and process functions for measuring and feeding bulk solids are performed by the DISOCONT Tersus system. The DISOCONT Tersus is customizable and very flexible in terms of its physical layout and interconnection. DISOCONT Tersus can be used in the following areas with specific software for weighing and feeding job applications: ▪ Steel ▪ Cement production ▪ Chemical industry ▪ Foodstuffs industry ▪ Power plants It supports the following plant systems in connection with the right mechanical equipment: ▪ Beltweighers ▪ Weighfeeders ▪ Loss-in-weight feeders ▪ Filling plants ▪ Feeder with weighing discharge screw (MULTIFLEX) ▪ Mass flow rate measuring devices and mass flow rate feeders that operate on the basis of the Coriolis ® ® principle (MULTICOR ) or the principle of inertia (MULTISTREAM )
DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt, Germany.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -7-
General Diagram
3.2
Some Definitions
The following table shows a list of basic definitions.
Abbreviation Meaning
Meaning
Dimension
Unit
I
Actual flow rate
Material quantity per unit of time
Weight/Time
kg/h, t/h
I0
Nominal Flow Rate Maximum gravimetric flow rate the scale is designed for. Defined in the P03.01 parameter.
Weight/Time
kg/h
P
Flow rate setpoint
Preset flow rate against which the actual value is controlled.
Weight/Time
kg/h, t/h
Z
Flow Rate
The material quantity conveyed calculated from the integral of the flow rate over the feed time.
Weight
kg, t
v
Belt velocity
The velocity of the conveyor belt
Velocity
m/s
v0
Rated velocity
The velocity of the conveyor belt at the flow rate Io and rated belt load
Q
Belt load
The quantity of bulk solids on the conveyor belt per meter of belt length
Weight/Length
kg/m
Qo
Rated belt load
The rated belt load is calculated from the nominal Weight/Length flow rate Io/ rated velocity vo and it can be shown as a service value.
kg/m
QB
Platform load
The load on the weighbridge
Weight
kg
Y
Controller actuating Conveyor element setpoint variable
Amperage
mA
Xd
Control deviation
The difference between the setpoint and actual value % with reference to the rated value
%
n
Speed
The speed of the drive motor for the conveyor belt
1/min
Rotations/unit of time
Tab. 1 : Definition for formula symbols
You can find the abbreviations for input and output channels for use in parameterization in the Abbreviations [➙ 66] chapter.
3.3
Measuring principle
A beltweigher or weighfeeder continuously weighs the quantity of material transported by a conveyor belt. This figure shows the measuring principle.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -8-
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
Fig. 1: The measuring principle for the beltweigher and weighfeeder v
Material and belt velocity
Sv
The sensor for belt velocity; designed as a measuring wheel or feeder on the belt drive
WB
Weighbridge
LC
Force transducer and load cell
MR
Measuring idler
SB
Belt run sensor
M
The drive motor of the belt or a prefeeder on the belt scale with feed regulation
BM
Mark in the belt for scanning through the belt travel sensor
Y
The controller magnitude on the belt drive (only the weighfeeder with the VWF software) or integrating a prefeeder for batching
The bulk solids are conducted over a weighbridge located beneath the belt that is limited by two nonweighed idlers. The material quantity on the weighbridge exercises a force on the load cell (LC) over one or several measuring idlers (MR). The measuring idlers are linked to a frame structure such as with a parallel leaf-spring system. The load cell output voltage is proportional to the platform load. It is amplified and sent to the microprocessor of the weighing electronics through an analog/digital converter. The force progression on a single-idler weighbridge is indicated by the triangle in the figure. Only a fraction of the force of the weight of the bulk solids is introduced into the measuring idler MR. The effect of the force of weight over the weighbridge is shown with the Effective Platform Length Leff parameter with belt scales. If the belt load Q in kg/m is even, the measuring force QB is calculated on the load cell LC by: QB = Q * Leff
(1)
For the design shown here with one measuring idler and the measured length L of the weighbridge WB, the effective bridge is calculated with: Leff = L / 2
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 -9-
General Diagram
The calculation of the effective bridge length is shown in the appendix for scales with several measuring idlers.
From equation (1), the system determines the actual belt load Q through the bulk solids on the belt from the mass QB measured through the load cell via: Q = QB / Leff The second important measured value is belt velocity v, that is recorded by the velocity sensor Sv and converted into a frequency f proportional to the velocity. The weighing electronics calculates the flow performance I in kg/h according to the formula: I = Q * v = QB / Leff * v flow performance I = actual flow rate
3.4
Control operating modes
The following modes of operation are available to the measuring device. ▪
▪
▪
Gravimetric Mode (regulated) The actual feed rate is adjusted to the setpoint. The maximum possible setpoint is the same as Nominal Flow Rate (P03.01). An event message is generated if the input value is too large. Volumetric Mode (unregulated) The conveyor element setting is proportional to the feed rate setpoint. Measurement of the actual feed rate has no effect on the conveyor element adjustment. The feed rate approximately equals the specified setpoint under nominal conditions. The setpoint is limited to three times the nominal feed rate. An event message will be generated if this limit is exceeded. Volumetric Synchronous Mode (unregulated) This mode of operation is a special form of volumetric operation. It ensures a seamless transition when switching from gravimetric to volumetric operation.
3.5
Control strategies strategies
This section describes the various control strategies supported by DISOCONT Tersus. Note: An external power unit is needed in all cases for controlling each of the drives.
3.5.1
Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity
A conveyor belt draws bulk solids from a feed bin. An option is having a prefeeder convey the bulk solids onto the belt. The system calculates a setpoint velocity suited to the load Q and setpoint flow rate P from the measured load while the controller controls the velocity of the feed belt.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 10 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
Fig. 2: Weighfeeder control principle v
Belt velocity
Xd
Control deviation
Q
Belt load
R
Velocity controllers
P
Flow rate setpoint
M
The drive motor of the feed belt including an external drive controller
I
Actual flow rate
Y
Controller magnitude on the external drive controller
The actual flow rate I can be calculated as follows: I=Q*v The control deviation Xd can be calculated from: Xd [%] = (I – P) / I0 * 100 % With I0 = nominal flow rate (P03.01) If the bulk solids are fed to the feed belt with a controlled prefeeder, the belt load can be additionally controlled through the prefeeder.
Fig. 3: Weighfeeder with feed control as the control principle
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 11 -
General Diagram
R1 Flow rate controller R2 Belt load controller Xd Control deviation v Belt velocity Qs The setpoint for the belt load
P Flow rate setpoint I Actual flow rate Y Controller magnitude on the external drive controller M The drive motor of the feed belt including an external drive controller Q Belt load
The weighfeeder guarantees feeding accuracy, i.e., the belt velocity evens out irregularities in the belt load from fluctuations in feeding performance.
3.5.2
The beltweigher with feed control
The conveyor belt runs at a constant velocity. The bulk solids are brought onto the belt with a prefeeder that has a controlled flow rate, where the belt load varies with the flow rate. The flow performance is ascertained precisely through the belt scale and controlled by changing the prefeeder velocity.
Fig. 4: The belt scale with feed control as the control principle
I
Actual flow rate
v
Belt velocity
P
Flow rate setpoint
Q
Belt load
Xd
Control deviation
R
Load controller
Y
Controller magnitude
M
Prefeeder drive
If the prefeeder is designed as a position-controlled feed gate, the continuous controller is designed with a three-point controller with the outputs of Open and Close. Then it will give feedback on its current position to the controller. Another weighbridge can be built into the mechanism with slow-moving or long belts for capturing the load closer to the feeding point. The feed control can be linked with the function of a velocity-controlled weighfeeder for bulk solids that are inclined to flooding.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 12 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
3.5.3
Beltweigher with with a constant load
This idea behind this control strategy is to keep the belt load as constant possible in the area of the rated load with a flow of bulk solids dictated from outside. This is necessary, for instance, with bulk solids at a low level of bulk density to capture the flow of bulk solids at a high level of accuracy. To reach this goal, the belt velocity is automatically set to match the specified and measured flow of bulk solids.
Fig. 5: Constant belt load control principle I
Actual mass flow
I[kg/h] The measured actual mass flow
v
Belt velocity
Q
Belt load
Xd
Control deviation
M
Belt drive
R
Load controller
Y
Belt velocity controller magnitude
3.6
Belt Influence Compensation BIC
(BIC = Belt Influence Compensation) Even high-quality conveyor belts are never completely uniform. For instance, they become heavier and stiffer especially at the joints. This is the reason why it is normally only possible to guarantee a high level of measuring accuracy over entire belt circuits. Short-time accuracy can be boosted by determining the tare dependent upon the conveyor belt for each belt section of a complete circuit individually and subtracting it from the load's measured value. The belt's influence can be best observed on an empty belt.
Fig. 6: Load curve over belt circuits Q
The measured load
n
The number of total belt circuits
V
The joint in the belt
These recurring patterns can be observed even when the belt is loaded. The belt is given a mark to identify its position that is captured using a stationary sensor. The system learns the recurring load progression through the belt influence over several belt circuits even with a loaded belt
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 13 -
General Diagram
and automatically corrects its influence. Since the belt influence changes over the transit time (in particular over idle times), it has to be captured on a regular basis. This is why correction is adaptive.
3.7
Measuring and Feeding at the Discharge Point (VAP)
The weighbridge is not located directly at the material discharge point to boost accuracy. This is why the measurement for the flow rate of a simple beltweigher does not correspond to the momentary flow rate at discharge with fluctuating belt loads. The control system captures and controls the total precisely at the discharge point by delaying the load's measuring signal by the time the bulk solids need from the measuring point to discharge (VAP) and then multiplying it with the velocity. This can boost the control quality even more. This figure uses the example of the weighfeeder to show the contact from BIC and VAP .
Fig. 7: The weighfeeder control principle with BIC and VAP I Actual flow rate P Flow rate setpoint Xd Control deviation Y Belt velocity controller magnitude BIC Belt influence compensation (belt influence compensation)
3.8
v Belt velocity Q Belt load M Belt drive R Velocity controllers VAP Delay to the discharge point
Batching
In batch mode a preset quantity of material is discharged and the feeding is subsequently switched off. Once the batch setpoint has been reached the batch operation is complete. A subsequent start command to the feeder will begin a new charge. Batch filling can be carried out in all modes and variants of operation. The general procedure for batch operation is shown in the following figure:
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 14 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
Fig. 8: Feeding
The segments shown in the figure mean the following: 0: Start the batch with a preset batch setpoint in units of weight. 1: Interrupt batch operation by switching off the discharge element. 2: Resume the interrupted batch by switching on the feeder. 3: Automatic reduction of the flow rate towards the end of the batch. 4: End automatically once the predetermined batch quantity has been reached.
3.9
Additional Bin Weighers Weighers
DISOCONT Tersus can also capture the weight of a bin (called additional containers for the sake of simplification). This bin can also be used for controlling and correcting continuous measurement. This additional bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales. It is used to display the hopper weight, register and monitor threshold levels and regulate the fill level. It is often used to record the weight of the bin that is upstream of the continuous measuring or feeding unit in the route. The bin weigher is switched on by parameter P26.01 Bin Weigher Active = YES.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 15 -
Operation
4 Operation The DISOCONT Tersus and an attached weighfeeder can be operated in one of several ways: ▪ Operation under normal circumstances using one or more local VHM operating panels. The features of the different panel versions can be found in system manual BV-H2406. The sides with the operating dialogs are also available via web interface for a browser . ▪ Operation using a higher-order plant control system where the control commands are either exchanged conventionally by means of binary and analog signals or by means of a fieldbus such as PROFIBUS. ▪ Operation for service work by means of a wireless VHM operating panel. ▪ Operation for service work by EasyServe on a PC/notebook with a cable or wireless access. ▪ Local operation by means of an optional service operating level and the VLG or VMO operating units specifically for work performed on the mechanism. The special characteristics of this operating panels can be found in the system manual BV-H2406.
4.1
Behavior after Connecting the Power
Once power is switched on, the DISOCONT Tersus control unit VCU starts up with a self-test. The system states are indicated by LEDs on the unit. The significance of the indicators can be found in system manual BV-H2406. An optional connected VHM operating panel will start up with a self-test of the display once power has been connected. Subsequently, it establishes communication to the VCU it was connected to last before power was switched off. The version number of the device will then appear for a few seconds before being replaced by the normal display. Notes: ▪ The following are retained during a power failure: – Parameter settings – Setpoints – The status of all internal counters – Counting pulses not yet output to external counters – Date and time – All important process values ▪ A specific start command is always required to begin feeding.
4.2
Operating and Control Access
DISOCONT Tersus can be operated using the following approaches:
Operating source
Operation under normal circumstances
Service work
X
X
VHM touch
VHM operating panel (mobile per cable or wireless)
X
VHM touch
Service operating panel for the VMO drive
X
Foil keyboard and display
VHM operating panel (permanently installed)
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
User Interface Type
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 17 -
Operation
Operating source
Operation under normal circumstances
Service work
X
(X)
Plant main computer via Fieldbus
User Interface Type Plant main computer
Web browser via PC
X
VHM with PC keyboard
Service tool
X
EasyServe
Tab. 2 : Operating access
DANGER Feeding can be started using the operating panel. This switches the drives on, allowing bulk material to flow. Before turning it on, the operator has to make sure that turning it on cannot cause any damage. Interrupting communications when operating on a non-permanent line (pluggable cable or radio) may cause dangerous situations. Therefore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved for service work only.
4.2.1
Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)
After a loss of power at the operating panel, it automatically attempts to reconnect with the scale it was connected to before the power loss (after an adjustable waiting period). During this waiting period, the Feeder operating page can be selected again to select a different scale. If a connection has already been established, although you want to activate communication to a different scale, you have to end the existing connection. You can do so after registering yourself as a privileged user by pressing the Sel. Scale button. An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be reestablished even after several attempts, the operating panel jumps into the configuration dialog. The procedure for selecting a scales is dependent on the form of communication and is described in the following chapters.
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable Preconditions: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the VCU control unit is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual. You have to select the Ethernet channel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the operating panel configuration. Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches in the network for VCU control units and shows its findings on the Feeder operating page. A button belonging a scale that is displayed is used to select the scale and establish the data connection.
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth Conditions: A Bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The scales must be within transmission range. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 18 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
The Bluetooth channel has to be selected (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the configuration of the operator panel. Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for Bluetooth adapters within range. Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controllers (VCUs). The outcome is shown on the Feeder [➙ 39] operating page. Note:
A complete search for Bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is displayed during the search. There will also be Bluetooth adapters shown to which no connection can be established, either because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or they are already otherwise connected.
You can select the scale and establish a data connection by pressing the key belonging to the scale displayed. It may take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown in the header of the operating panel while a connection is being established. Note:
It can only establish a connection to one scale (assuming the scale is not simultaneously connected to another Bluetooth adapter). It might be necessary to close the other connection first. The operating panel will continue to attempt to establish a connection if another connection already exists.
If Bluetooth is used, the scales to whose Bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only scales with which communication can be made. The Ethernet destination address may not be changed in the VHM.
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485 Conditions: The operator panel and controller have to be in the same RS485 network. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual. The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)). Once the communication path has been selected, the operator panel will switch to the Feeder [➙ 39] page. This is where the address of VCU is set. The load digits of the Ethernet address (P21.07) of the scales controller will be used again for addressing at the RS485 bus. The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communication can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking beside the address number. Otherwise this marking will be red. You can establish the connection to the scale with the Con.Scale button. Note:
4.2.2
The operating panel is the master on the bus. This is why only one operating panel may be connected on the bus at any one time.
Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using Ethernet. Conditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an Ethernet cable to the scales network.
Note:
Either use a non-coded socket of the VCU for this connection or a special (yellow) cable when using the red-coded socket.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 19 -
Operation
The EasyServe address must be in the same Ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. It might be possible to adapt the address in the scanner dialog of EasyServe. A scales can also be addressed using a router if the network has already been configured. The scale address is input manually and not via scanner dialog. The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork. The easiest way to select is with the EasyServe Connection | Ethernet (Scanner) item on the menu. This shows all of the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be adjusted here and a connection to the scales can be established. If the scales are connected to a different subnet, they are selected manually using Connection|Ethernet (Manual)' and entering the scale's IP address.
4.2.2.2 Connection via WLAN We recommend using WLAN to make a wireless connection to a scales. Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a WLAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem has been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales. The PC also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP address. In general the WLAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in the modem's user manual. The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet connection were made by cable.
4.2.2.3 Connection via Bluetooth A connection is more complicated to establish via Bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be accessed is the one to whose Bluetooth adapter the connection was established. Conditions: Scales and PC are equipped with Bluetooth adapters. Establishing a connection: 1
Start the Bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.
2
Select the desired scales from the list of adapters displayed. Note: If the name of the scales was changed it will be necessary to restart the PC in order to display the changed name.
3
Begin establishing a connection with the Bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353
4
The PC user must enter a Personal Area Network (PAN) once the connection to the Bluetooth adapter has been established.
5
The address of the Bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
6
The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other scales in the network cannot be addressed.
4.2.2.4 Connection via RSRS-232 RS232 is used to make a connection in special cases only, e.g. when no connection can be made via Ethernet. It may be necessary to establish a connection via RS232 if there is a power failure to a device while a software program is being loaded into it in order to re-load the software. Conditions: The PC's serial interface (COM) must be connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details see system manual BV-H2406. Connect using the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...'.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 20 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
38400 baud, 8-O-1 is the only permissible communication format. Select the Com port available at the PC and the scales' address. The address is stored in parameter P19.01 Own Address in the scales. Note:
4.2.3
A software update via RS232 interface can take as much as 20 minutes. Other functions run slower than would be usual if the connection was made using Ethernet.
Connecting the web browser with the scales controller controller (VCU)
Conditions: ▪ The PC is connected to the VCU via Ethernet. ▪ Java is installed on the PC and can be started. ▪ Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages to occur. Establishing a connection: The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser address line. This URL is composed of the following: http:///hmi/.html
Item:
Meaning:
Possible values:
VCU IP address
e.g. 192.168.240.1
Display size on the screen
start start_2x start_3x start_4x
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html NOTES: ▪ The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel. ▪ The field used to select a different scales and the configuration dialogs for the VHM operating panel itself are not available. ▪ Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry keyboard is not shown on the screen.
4.2.4
The web server in the scales controller (VCU)
The scales controller is equipped with a web server that provides the scale with a homepage. This is only available in English. Conditions: The PC can establish an Ethernet connection to the VCU. Establishing the connection: The IP address of the VCU must be entered into the browser address line.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 21 -
Operation
Various data from the scales controller can be called up on the left-hand navigation bar. Navigation entry
Function
HMI HMI_2x HMI_3x HMI_4x
Opens at a different size the same controller interface as is in the operating panel. Also refer to: Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) [➙ 21]
Events
Memory of the most recent events (such as alarms or warnings, etc.)
Parameter changes
Memory of the most recent changes in parameters
Command log
Logs a list of certain commands, e.g. start / stop
Totalizer hourly
Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values are also available on the VHM operating panel. The minute of saving the data is set after the full hour in P38.01.
Totalizer daily
Table of daily-saved totalizing integrators / counters The time of saving from 00:00 h is set in P38.02.
Totalizer
Table of totalizing integrators / counters saved on the command
DataLogger 1 DataLogger 2
Table of the measured values recorded. The sampling interval can be set using P38.03. The up to 10 process variables that can be recorded are selected using P38.04 P38.13. It begins recording when activating in the Mode operating range.
Tab. 3 : Function calls on the scales controller homepage
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are keyed in stating the entry time. The entries in the tables are only up-dated when they are called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with standard programs using select-copy-paste.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 22 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
4.3
VHM operating panel
The DISOCONT Tersus system can be equipped with an optional VHM operating panel. The operating panel is equipped with a touch-sensitive display (i.e., touch screen). The buttons shown change dynamically depending on the state of the system. The keys are activated by touching the screen. A touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used. The following figure shows the structure of the user interface (front view) if it is in communication with a VCU control unit.
Fig. 9: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display 1
Name of device being controlled
5
Select details and operating keys
2
Field for event messages
6
Field for measured values and graphics
3
Select work field
7
Command and edit keys
4
On and off keys
8
Symbol indicating running operation
The [HOME] button is used to select the basic view.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 23 -
Operation
Notes: VHM
VCU
▪
▪
4.3.1
The operating panel works in the Configuration Mode as long as it is NOT in communication with a scale. Then the [Feeder] buttons are offered in the ‘Select the Workspace’ (3) range for selecting a scale and [Con. Scale] for establishing the connection to the scale selected. Also refer to the Operating and Control Access Chapter. The communication to a scale has to be interrupted for adjustments to the display such as brightness and adjusting the touch-sensitive screen. You can call up the adjustment dialogs for the operating panel with the [Sel. Scale] button.
Display and Operation Fields
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device The name of the scales to which the operating panel currently has a data connection is shown in the header. The name is set as a parameter (P02.03) in the device.
4.3.1.2 Event messages The system performs various tests. An event will be identified if there are any deviations from normal operating conditions. The way in which the device reacts to such an event can be set by parameter. The event appears in the field for event messages. For example: IL06 (W1) Event: Not Ready for Start The variables have the following significance:
IL06
Explicit, language-independent identifier for the event
W1
Event class
Event: Not Ready for Start
Explanatory text
The following event classes can occur:
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 24 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
Class
System status
Display
A
ALARM: Serious error. Drives had to be shut down. This message must be acknowledged before it can be cleared and the drives restarted.
Text against a red background. Blinking: not acknowledged Static: acknowledged
W1
WARNING 1: Irregular operation. This could indicate a serious error. The event did not stop material conveying. Acknowledge the message to clear it.
Text against a yellow background. Blinking: not acknowledged Static: acknowledged
W2
WARNING 2: Irregular operation. This could indicate a serious error. The event did not stop material conveying. The message will be cleared automatically once the event is no longer pending.
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range The selection on the right offers the following operating fields: Field
Function
User
HOME
Operation and display for normal operation
System operating personnel
Trend
Illustration of the transient behavior of process signals
System operating personnel Service personnel
Values
Process and measured values
System operating personnel Service personnel
Setup
Special display and operation for setup, diagnostics and service
Service personnel
Login
Login for privileged access
Service personnel
Help
Indication of program versions; Cleaning of monitor display
System operating personnel Service personnel
Sel. Scale
Connect to a different scales
Service personnel
Some functions are not available to non-privileged users. Beyond this, access to some functions can be switched off per parameter.
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation The feeder drive can be switched on and off with the keys in this field if the mode of operation and the parameterization permit it.
WARNING A start signal will actuate the motors! There is a risk of injury to people standing within range of the motors. Bulk material can be transported and may overwhelm downstream components. The stop signal is not an emergency stop, but rather will stop the facility normally.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 25 -
Operation
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection Different screens in a work field can be selected by using the keys in the lower area. The key used often to acknowledge event messages is available in most displays. Further pages can be called up with the arrow keys. Key allocation varies between the fields. An overview of the function tree can be seen in section Operating Fields and Function Calls. Access to individual functions can be limited when setting up the system to privileged user groups.
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics Depending on the page selected, current measured values and graphical representations of the mechanical system and signals are displayed here. Input boxes, e.g. for a setpoint or parameter value, are shown 'recessed'.
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys Other buttons can be overlaid for special functions in area (7) above the lower detail selection (5). The keys shown vary with the detail selection in the respective work field. The function of these keys is described in the relative function sections.
4.3.1.8 4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation The symbol for a running feed in the upper-left corner indicates the state of the main drive. A rotating rectangle will be displayed when device is switched on. This symbol appears on all display pages.
4.3.2
Authorization for Control Commands
There are many ways to restrict the entry of control commands to certain users only. The system supports setting special conditions using a range of methods.
4.3.2.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation The scales are usually operated in normal operation during production. The entry points (sources) for operation under normal conditions are determined by parameter. The scales can be turned on and setpoints altered from these sources only.
Parameters
Name and signal
P04.01
Feeder Start
P04.02
Feedrate Setpoint
P15.02
Batch Setpoint Source
Tab. 4 : Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation
Sources for operation under normal conditions can be set for entry at the scales operating panel during service work. This mode is called keyboard mode. The VHM operating panel and the analog operating software that can be started via a web browser from the scales control homepage are considered to be operating panels. In keyboard mode the service software tool 'EasyServe' can also be used to control the scales.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 26 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
4.3.2.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection MoniMonitoring The system can be configured so that normal operation is accessible only to devices with IP addresses that have been specified by parameters. The corresponding parameters can be found in the parameter group 'Dialog Behaviour' (P02.04 … P02.10). Operation via 'EasyServe' is not affected by the parameter setting. The connection to the operating devices with specified addresses can be monitored so that the scales can be returned to a safe state in case of a malfunction.
4.3.2.3 Access to Special Functions Access to special functions can be restricted by parameters. The following options can be selected by these parameters grouped according to control command: 'active'
Command not restricted. The command may always be called up at the scales operating panel.
'not active'
Command is never allowed. The relevant key is not shown at the operating panel making it impossible to execute the command.
'Password'
The command is accessible only after logging on with password 1. Password 1 is variable and can be changed using P02.12. This password is principally intended for service access. The basic system settings are always made using this password.
'2nd Password'
The command is accessible only after logging on with password 2. Password 2 is variable and can be changed using P02.13.
The parameters for defining access authorizations are in the group of Dialog Behaviour (P02.14 ... P02.21) parameters. If the user has not registered with sufficient privileges for the desired function, the operating button appears as non-active (grey) with a star in the lower right-hand corner. The operating company is responsible for assuring that the passwords are known to those personnel only who are to receive authorization for the respective control command. The control functions are released once the user has logged on with the Login key and has entered the password. The Logout key should be used to log off the privileged user from the system once the work has been completed. The unit falls back by itself into the non-privileged operating mode after the time set on the operating panel (refer to Setting the Display [➙ 38]) . However, the control commands can always be executed via EasyServe regardless of the parameter setting.
4.3.3
Basic Operating Functions
This section will describe operation under normal conditions. Access to certain operating functions can be restricted when setting up the system. They will then be no longer accessible or accessible with a keyword only. This chapter will describe the complete and unrestricted functional range.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 27 -
Operation
4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off Condition ▪ No alarm may be pending. ▪ The all-clear must be given by discharging elements, in as far as any are connected. Event IL-01 Event: Run Disabled will be sent if no all-clear is given. ▪ The on switch at the operating panel must be activated. This is the case in keyboard or in normal mode if the source of the on pulse in P04.01 has been set to 'OP'. Turning on feeding ▪ Press the ON key. Display during running feed ▪ Running arrow in the graphical display. ▪ ON appears in the graphical display. ▪ A moving symbol appears in the upper left border. Turning off feeding ▪ Press the OFF key. Scales will be switched off. Feed rate measurement will cease after the time set in parameter P06.01 has elapsed. Display during stopped feed OFF appears in the graphical display. Moving displays are turned off.
4.3.3.2 Set setpoint Condition ▪ Keyboard mode selected, or ▪ Normal mode selected and P04.02 = 'OP' The setpoint will be displayed in a data-entry frame if it can be altered. How to Enter the Setpoint 1. Call up the HOME operating page. 2. Press the entry frame, the entry field will open. 3. Clear the old value with the [C] button and key in the value. 4. Complete entry by pressing OK or exit by pressing EXIT.
HINT Limiting the entry The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.01 in gravimetric operation and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric operation.
4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint With the relative setpoint Pr, an externally set setpoint Pe can be expressed as a percent. This function is used to enter a portion of additives, with the command variable being measured. Conditions The P04.05 parameter = AI or OP The effective setpoint for the control is calculated using the following formula:
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 28 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
P = Pe × Pr / 100 % P = effective setpoint Pe = External setpoint Pr = Relative setpoint It is entered the same way as an absolute setpoint (Set setpoint [➙ 28]).
HINT Limiting the entry The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.01 in gravimetric operation and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric operation.
4.3.3.4 4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter The DISOCONT Tersus has three totalizing counters that sum up the measured bulk material quantity. Counters 1 and 2 can be reset. Counter 3 cannot be reset. The counters do not have any independent overflow. How to reset a totalizing counter Press the Totals button, then press the button for zero setting the desired counter and confirm the command.
HINT Other ways to reset the counters The system can be configured to allow the counters to be reset by means of an electrical signal. All counters will still be able to be reset via the fieldbus interface by the main computer. All reset commands work independently of one another.
4.3.3.5 Acknowledging Acknowledging Event Messages All of the important functions are monitored. An event message is generated if a malfunction occurs. This will be displayed in the message field. The event with the highest priority will be displayed if several events should occur. The order of priorities is: Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2).
HINT Displaying earlier events To display older events, open the 'Values' screen and select 'Event Log'. Earlier events can be called up using the navigation keys in the event field. The list of events can also be viewed via web server and can be exported for an external evaluation.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 29 -
Operation
How to Acknowledge an Error Message
DANGER Event messages indicate unusual and/or dangerous states. For reasons of safety, the causes of any malfunctions must be corrected before an event message is acknowledged. To acknowledge an event message press the 'Ack Event' key, available on many screens e.g. in 'HOME'. Once acknowledged, any blinking messages will be displayed continuously. When the cause of the malfunction has been corrected the event will be cleared from the message line but can be displayed again using 'EreignisLog'. A troubleshooting list can be found in section Event Messages.
4.3.4
Special Operating Operating Functions
This section will describe the functions used for normal operation in special cases. If not stated otherwise, the text will assume that the work field HOME has been selected (Selecting the operating range [➙ 25]).
4.3.4.1 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator OperaOperation The feed rate regulator can be operated in different modes of operation. Gravimetric operation: The actual feed rate value in units of weight per time is adjusted to the preset setpoint. The maximum possible setpoint is the same as the nominal feed rate (P03.01). The message SC1 'Event: Setpoint Limited' is generated if greater entries are made. Volumetric operation: Material discharge is adjusted proportional to the setpoint; the weight of the hopper has no effect on the regulator output. This mode of operation can be required if the weight measurement is subjected to a lot of disturbance and if the loss in weight per unit of time is not a reliable measure of the discharge capacity. Under nominal conditions the feed rate approximately corresponds to the preset setpoint. The setpoint is limited to the threefold nominal feed rate (P03.01). The message SC1 'Event: Setpoint Limited' is generated if greater entries are made. The actual feed rate value in units of weight per time is measured, but has no effect on the control. Volumetric synchronous operation: This mode of operation is the same as volumetric operation but ensures a smooth transition from gravimetric operation by taking into consideration the mean regulator output value calculated during gravimetric operation. Setting regulator mode Press the 'Mode' key followed by 'Rate Control'. Press the key with the desired selection. Display The mode of operation is indicated in the overview page graphical representation by the identifiers 'GRAV', 'VOL' and 'VOL S'.
4.3.4.2 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF You can use the Keyboard mode function place the preselected operating sources for switching on/off, for specifying the setpoint and the source for the batch setpoint onto the keyboard of the VHM operating panel. The previous sources will take effect if keyboard mode is deactivated. Since operating via Easy-
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 30 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
Serve corresponds to operating with the keyboard on the operating unit, this switch also has an impact on operating via EasyServe. Note: When switching to keyboard from an external source (e.g. serial fieldbus), the ON/OFF status of the scales, the setpoint and the batch setpoint are maintained. The external signals are effective when switching in the opposite direction. How to set up keyboard mode Pressing the Mode buttons, changing to the second display page via arrow key and Keyboard mode there. Display The ON, OFF' buttons and the setpoint input space are visible in the keyboard mode. These fields are only visible in normal mode if the operating sources have been set to the operating panel (OP).
4.3.4.3 Trend The trend is a graphical depiction on the VHM operating panel of the course of process values over time.
HINT It is easier with EasyServe EasyServe allows you to adjust trend depictions much more comfortably and to export measured data. The trend in the VHM is intended to offer permanent and simple trend depiction. The trend depiction, stored values from previous weighings and the configuration of the trend will be deleted if the operating panel suffers a power failure or if it connects to a different scales.
Button
Function
Open more recent values into the display window, small increments
>>
Open more recent values into the display window, large increments
Settings
Enter the configuration dialog (see below)
Z-
Increase time period shown
Z+
Decrease time period shown
Tab. 5 : Control keys
Setting the Trend Display The configuration window appears after 'Settings' is pressed.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 31 -
Operation
Fig. 10: Lines configuration
The process values selected for display are shown in the left table (1). The first time it is called up the list will be empty. In order to configure the display of a value, click on the value in table 1 to select it. This will show the value's reference number (ID), its thresholds and the color of the line. Touching fields (3) to (5) will open the corresponding adjustment dialog box.
Button
Function
Remove
Delete the values selected in (1) and (2).
Back
Close the configuration window and return to the trend display. Altered settings will not be activated.
Update
Activate the configuration shown for the trend depiction.
Add
Open the dialog to select the value to be displayed.
Tab. 6 : Keys in the lines configuration
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 32 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
Fig. 11: Selection dialog for process values
Click on a value in list (5) to select it. The properties of the trend line are transferred to the right-hand column, the reference number (ID) shown in field (4). The value is transferred with the keys 'Add' or 'New' into list 1 of the values to be displayed.
Process value ID
Process variable
Dimension
1872
Measured actual flow rate
kg/h
1884
Belt velocity
m/s
1880
Belt load
kg/m
1890
Hopper fill level
kg
1894
Effective setpoint
kg/h
1904
Control deviation
% of rated capacity
Tab. 7 : Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5)
The characteristic value (ID) of any given process value can be entered in ID field (4). Possible values can be found in the fieldbus data description. The 'Back' key closes the window in which values are selected and returns to the value configuration menu.
4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display The touchscreen is deactivated for a set period of time to allow the display to be cleaned. No acidic or strongly abrasive cleaning agents may be used. During cleaning, a clock will count down from 20 seconds to zero. The screen will remain white during this time with the exception of the progress indicator. This allows defective pixels to be spotted. The touchscreen will be automatically reactivated once the time has elapsed. How to initiate cleaning mode Press the 'Help' key followed by 'Clean:'.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 33 -
Operation
4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') The event with the highest priority will permanently be displayed in the corresponding display line. Press the 'Values' key followed by 'Event Log' to display older events or events of lower priority. Other events can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys. Note: The list of events is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comfortably displayed or downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings The readings of the totalizing counters can be stored cyclically. The stored values are available as a at the operating panel and in list form in the web browser. Press the Values button and then Total Log button display them on the operating panel. Individual entries can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys. Note: The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. Press the Values button and then the Param Log button to show changes in parameters. Previous alterations can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys. Note: The list of parameter alterations is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comfortably displayed or downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation The measured values of the additional bin weigher are displayed in a separate screen. It is only possible to display this when the bin weigher is activated via P26.01 Bin Weigher Active. To open the display: Press the Surge Bin button. You can not only see the current bin weight, but also the limits set per parameter. The parameters can be adapted right on the screen if you register with sufficient privileges. Parameters
No.
Meaning
Bin Level MAX
P26.18
Upper threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if exceeded.
Control Level MAX
P26.13
Fill level at which the filling will be stopped.
Control Level MIN
P26.12
Filling is started if the fill level falls below this threshold.
Bin Level MIN
P26.15
Lower threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if level falls below this level.
Tab. 8 : Bin weigher parameters
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 34 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
Button
Effect
Auto
The filling is regulated automatically by means of the threshold values 'Control Level MIN' and 'Control Level MAX' set.
Manual
The filling of the hopper is controlled by the operator using the keys 'Start' and 'Stop'. For reasons of safety filling is automatically stopped if the limit 'Control Level MAX' is exceeded.
Start
Begin filling the hopper.
Stop
End filling the hopper.
Tab. 9 : Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level
Refer to Adjustment Functions for information on adjusting the bin weigher.
4.3.5
Service Functions
The functions described here are as a rule used only for system setup, troubleshooting or to alter the control properties. Some functions are accessible only to privileged users who have logged onto the controller (also refer to: Operating Fields and Function Calls).
4.3.5.1 Display Parameter Alterations Changes made to parameters are archived in the system. Press the 'Values' key followed by 'Param Log' to display the stored values. Previous values can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
4.3.5.2 Reading and Setting Parameters The control program was structured such that no programing knowledge is necessary to adapt the system to local conditions. Parameters define the properties. The meaning of the parameters can be found in the detailed parameter description in section 'Parameters'. Call up: Setup button and then Parameter button Parameters that require frequent changes due to bulk material changes are summarized in Selection. You can access all parameters via All. The parameters are structured in blocks to give a better overview. parameters are composed as follows: Pxx.yy , where: xx: Block number yy: Number of the parameter in the block Explanatory name of the parameter (language-dependent)
Depending on the situation, individual parameters or groups of parameters may be faded out to highlight the parameters important to an application. Hidden parameters can only be shown via EasyServe and activated there for the display on the VHM operating panel wherever necessary. The fading out may result in breaks in the numbering. Some parameters can be write protected. The write protection can also be configured using EasyServe.
NOTE: The following description applies to a visible and write unprotected parameter accessed by a user with sufficient user privileges. The parameter group is displayed and selected in the upper part of display area 6 (see VHM operating panel [➙ 23]). Use the arrow keys to scroll through the groups. Individual parameters in a group can be selected in the lower half of display area 6. A parameter can be selected directly with the keyboard symbol.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 35 -
Operation
The value of the parameter is shown in display area 7 (see VHM operating panel [➙ 23]) of the command and edit keys. The Edit button calls up the dialog for changing the selected parameters. The parameter's identifier will appear in the focus of the upper part of display area 6 and its current value in the lower part. Depending on the type of parameter the arrow keys can be used either to assign a new value to the parameter or a value can be entered for it. A changed value is written into the parameter via Store resident. An alternative is discarding the change with the Exit or Back button. In the latter case the parameter value will remain unchanged.
4.3.5.3 Setting the Clock DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues running for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The clock buffer is maintenance-free. The time is recorded in the process value logs. How to set the clock: Press the Setup button and then Set Time. The current values for date and time appear in display space 6 (refer to VHM operating panel [➙ 23]). Touch the entry field to open an entry dialog. Either touch the screen or use the arrow keys to move the cursor in the entry field. Finish the procedure and change the time with [OK]. The dialog is exited via Cancel without changing the clock.
4.3.5.4 Reset to Factory Settings DISOCONT Tersus has three independent sets of parameters: Parameter set
Usage
Load procedure at the operating panel.
Active parameter set
Set controller behaviour
Individual parameter values can be altered (see Reading and Setting Parameters [➙ 35]).
Backup set
Pre-prepared parameter set for certain applications or settings after commissioning
By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Custom' you can begin a complete rewrite of the active parameter set.
Factory settings
Unalterable set of parameters for the basic configuration
By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Factory' you can begin a complete rewrite of the active parameter set.
Tab. 10 : Parameter sets: Usage and activation
WARNING Irretrievable loss of adjusted parameters Loading the backup parameter set or the factory settings will overwrite all of the parameters in the active parameter set. The overwrite cannot be reversed. We recommend you to use EasyServe to save a copy of the current parameter set to the PC drive before overwriting.
4.3.5.5 Simulation Mode For commissioning, the DISOCONT Tersus can simulate important process values for training and test purposes without starting aggregates and without requiring all sensors to be connected. Load and speed values are simulated internally.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 36 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
WARNING Output signals are set in simulation mode. This allows externally connected motors to start. The system will show that material is flowing. The starting motors may represent a hazard. The on signal can activate systems upstream of the feeder whether the feeder is prepared to receive the bulk material or not.
Selecting simulation mode: Press the keys 'Setup, right arrow and then 'Simulation'.
4.3.5.6 Operating the calibration functions DISOCONT Tersus offers a range of calibration functions to facilitate commissioning and changing bulk material. All functions are operated according to the same principles. The Adjustment Functions Chapter summarizes the individual functions, what is required for them and their results. To call up: Press the 'Setup' key followed by 'Calibration' and 'Programs “ Use the arrow keys to select and display the name of the program in the upper part of display area 6 (see VHM operating panel [➙ 23]). Operating information will also appear here. Further information and program results are shown in the lower part of the display area. The keys in area 7 of the display are used for operation (see VHM operating panel [➙ 23]). Button
Function
Start
Run the selected program
Apply
Transfer the results to the parameter and end the program
Cancel
Discard the results and abort the program. Programs can be aborted at any time.
Tab. 11 : Keys for the calibration programs
4.3.6
Configuring the VHM Operating Panel
The operating panel configuration is autonomous of the scales configuration. The operating panel has a proprietary set of parameters stored in the operating panel itself only. These parameters can be accessed by means of a special dialog. User prompts in the configuration dialog are always in English, regardless of the language set for the scales.
4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration Once power to the system has been switched on, the operating panel will show 'VHM-SPG' in the headline of the display. Open the operating panel configuration dialog by pressing any key other than [Con.Scales]. ▪ Alternatively: If the operating panel is already displaying a scales' operating pages, the configuration dialog can be opened with the 'Sel. Scale' key without requiring the supply voltage to be switched off and on (Operating Fields and Function Calls). The adjustment ranges are called up with the keys in area 3 [➙ 24] of the display. Some functions are accessible only to privileged users.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 37 -
Operation
Button
Function
Password protected
VHM addr.
Set the VHM IP address
Yes
Display
Set the display parameters
Yes
Feeder
Select the scales to which a connection is to be established
Config
Detailed adjustment of the scales' web server homepage
Yes
Com
Set the path for communication with the scales
Yes
Calibration
Adjust touchscreen entry
Login
Login for privileged users
Con.Scales
Connect to a scales
Help
Display software version Disable touchscreen to clean display
Tab. 12 : Keys in the VHM configuration dialog
4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) Every device in the communication network must have a unique address. The VHM address is set in the configuration dialog with the key 'VHM addr.'. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 40]. Field
Meaning
Factory settings
IP
Unique IP address in the scales controller subnetwork 192.168.240.21 (VCU). The last group of digits in the IP address is also the unit's address when communicating through the local bus.
Subnet
Subnetwork template
255.255.255.0
Gateway
IP address of the gateway to other networks
0.0.0.0
Tab. 13 : Fields for setting the address
4.3.6.3 Setting the Display The 'Display' key opens the dialog for adjusting the display settings. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 40]. Button
Parameter
Function
Factory settings
Inactivity timeout
Inactivity timeout
Length of time from the most recent activity until the brightness of the screen is automatically reduced. The screen will return to normal brightness once the screen is touched. This contact will not be interpreted as communication with the scales.
20 min
Logout timeout Length of time from the most recent entry before a privileged user is automatically logged out of the system security reasons.
600 min
Working brightness
Display brightness during operation. At full brightness the display has a life expectancy of approximately 5 years. This expectancy can be increased to over 10 years by dimming the brightness a little.
Sleeping brightness
Brightness after a longer period with no activity. Note: If the display touchscreen is not to be used and the display is intended to be permanently fully legible, the sleeping brightness can be set to the same level as the operating brightness.
Save
Save the changes made. Changes are discarded without prompting if they were not saved beforehand.
Tab. 14 : Parameters for the display
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 38 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) (Feeder) The display shows the scales available in the network. Scales are selected by means of its corresponding key. Button
Function
Buttons beside an entry
Select the scales
Configure
Configure the scales by entering: Scales name IP address Subnetwork mask Gateway Note: This functions allows the IP address of a VCU to be set without using EasyServe. The addresses of the VHM and the VCU are generally in the same subnetwork. The 'Back' key will discard the changes. The 'Save' key will save the changes.
Tab. 15 : Keys in the list of scales
4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config) As with a web browser, the homepage of the scales' user interface must also be specified. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 40]. Parameter / Key
Function
Factory settings
URL of homepage
Address of the scales' web server homepage. A web http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html browser on a PC can open the scales' user interface at this address. Under normal circumstances the scales are selected on the 'Feeder' page. The start address is entered automatically. Communication will be automatically established to the last address entered here once power resumes after a power failure.
Start timeout
Length of time between command to connect to a scales and the start of connection. This period can be used to access the operating panel configuration [➙ 37].
Save
Save the settings. The entries are discarded if they are not saved before the page is left.
7s
Tab. 16 : Setting startup routine
4.3.6.6 Configuring Configuring the Communication Path (Com) Select the medium of communication here. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 40].
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 39 -
Operation
Selection
Function
Remarks
Ethernet
Communication via Ethernet interface and the RJ45 plug.
The complete IP address of the scales will be used when selected.
Bluetooth
Communication via Bluetooth will be automatically activated if a Bluetooth adapter is connected (wireless interface for portable devices).
All Bluetooth adapters within range are listed in the 'Feeder' selection. Each scales must be equipped with its own adapter. Scales connected to each other via Ethernet can communicate via Bluetooth only to the scales to whose adapter the operating panel has been connected. A subordinate IP connection is established in a separate subnetwork. Therefore the IP subnetwork address displayed in the VHM differs from the scales' subnetwork address stored in the parameter.
RS485
Communication via serial interface
The last part of the scales' IP address (1 ... 254) will be used when selected. The IP address must therefore also be set when using an interface of this kind.
Factory settings x
Tab. 17 : Alternatives
The select scales page will automatically open if the communication path is changed. The scales stores its addresses in a parameter. Details on possible alternative cablings of operating panel and scales are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen The touch sensitive screen is calibrated in relation to the display using this function. Calibration is required if a key is unintentionally depressed when a neighboring key is touched or if a function can only be activated by pressing the area next to the key on the screen. Once the 'Start' button has been pressed, you will be prompted to touch points on the screen marked with a cross. The calibration will be automatically stored once this has been successfully performed. The procedure is automatically repeated if faults are identified during the adjustment. The adjustment is always called up during the start procedure once the software is loaded into the VHM. Note: A touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used. The adjustment should be made with an object that is as similar as possible to the one that will be used in subsequent normal operation.
4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) Some of the operating panel settings are protected against unauthorized access. Access is available only to users with access privileges. The keyword is: 7353 The keyword cannot be changed and is independent of the scales' keyword settings.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 40 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) The operating panel will begin working normally once communication has been established to a scales. The operating panel will wait [➙ 39] for a period after the 'Con.Scale' key is pressed and then try via the configured path [➙ 39] to connect to the scales that was selected on the 'Feeder' [➙ 39] page. The attempt will be repeated several times. If the scales cannot be reached at that address the program will branch to the 'Feeder' scales selection. The connection attempt can be interrupted by pressing another key and the configuration dialog for the operating panel can be called up again. The routine is also called up if the system is restarted after a power failure.
4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information The key 'Help' opens a window with information on the software version and with basic scales controller settings 'Feeder' (VCU) and operating panel settings 'VHM'. These data and if possible the EasyServe parameter file should be kept at hand if making an inquiry to Schenck Process. The serial number of the controller VCU also appears in the EasyServe scanner. It can be used to identify the VCU in the network if erroneous, non-unique IP addresses have been assigned. 'FCB Variant:' is the designation for the loaded variant of the function block links [➙ 295]. 'FCB Variant:' 'Empty' refers to the state with no expanded functions, which is the state described in this manual. The 'Clean:' key switches the operating panel into cleaning mode for a short time. A counter will appear on the display and count down the time remaining until the panel returns to normal. Touch entry is deactivated, allowing the screen to be touched for cleaning without inadvertently giving a command.
4.4
Calibration programs
DISOCONT Tersus simplifies start-up with the aid of calibration functions. They store their findings in parameters, thus adapting the control to the application. All parameters that arise from the design of the scales and the electrical connections must be set before the calibration functions are called up. As a rule the calibration functions are accessible only to privileged users. They first have to register in the system (Operating Fields and Function Calls). The calibration functions can be called up both on the VHM operating panel (Operating the calibration functions [➙ 37]) and via EasyServe. They can also be operated via the fieldbus connection, in as far as one has been activated (P20.01).
4.4.1
Determining the duration of a belt circuit
The LB: Pulses/Belt calibration program serves the purpose of ascertaining the number of impulses of the speed sensor on the belt's drive motor for the duration of one belt circuit. The duration ascertained determines the transit time of the following calibration programs: >0< Zero Set TW: Tare CW: Span Calibration This is why LB: Pulses/Belt has to be called up as the first program at initial calibration. Furthermore, it should be called up in the following cases: ▪ A new belt was installed. ▪ The belt tension was substantially changed. ▪ The P05.01 Pulses per length or P03.02 Nominal Speed parameters were modified. When a belt sensor is installed (refer to the P18.01 Belt Sensor Active parameters), the duration is automatically determined after the belt mark runs past the sensor twice. If a belt sensor is not used or if the belt is designed without a mark , the transit time should be measured and entered in P10.03 Belt Circuit Time.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 41 -
Operation
NOTE:
Even if there is a belt sensor, the time for one belt circuit should be keyed in to ensure that the display of mean belt velocity supplies a correct value at the end of the calibration program.
The details and course of the calibration program: Condition
No bulk solids on the belt Belt drive with constant velocity switched on
To call up
select and start the LB: Pulses/Belt calibration program
Program runtime
Two belt marks running through or their duration in P10.03 Belt Circuit Time
Display while running
The remaining period in the program if no belt sensor is installed The number of impulses run in
Display when finished
The number of impulses Mean belt velocity
Parameters changed when results are accepted
P10.07 Belt Circuit No.
Potential events and messages Tab. 18 : The details and course
4.4.2
Tare the beltweigher
The TW: Tare calibration program ascertains the tare weight on the load cell over one belt circuit and stores the results in a parameter. After taring, the mean of the belt load over one belt circuit is equal to zero. Any corrections put into P10.06 Tare Correction are not taken into account during taring. The results are indicated in percent of the Qo rated belt load: Qo = P03.01/ P03.02 The details and course of the calibration program: Condition
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Volumetric operation is preselected No bulk solids on the belt Any prefeeder involved has to be shut off (the prefeeder OFF function) The scale is turned on Batching operation may not be active
To call up
select and start the TW: Tare calibration program
Program runtime
One or several total belt circuits The program is finished when the number of impulses from the impulse transmitter given in P10.07 Belt Circuit No. has arrived.
Display while running
The program's remaining period in percent of P10.07 Belt Circuit No. Tare in percent of Qo rated belt load
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 42 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
Display when finished
Deviation in tare of the value set in P10.05 Tare in percent of Qo rated belt load
P10.05 Basic Tare Parameters changed when results are accepted P10.06 is set to zero If there is a second weighbridge: P28.15 Tare (2nd Bridge) Potential events and messages
Start !: Scales are off. The belt has to be running for taring. Aborted !: The program was canceled without any changes in parameters. Volumetric !: The scale is in gravimetric mode, while the program can only run in volumetric mode. Batch Active !: The program cannot run in batching operation. Batching operation is finished.
Tab. 19 : The details and course
NOTE:
4.4.3
Taring by belt sections (BIC) is set to zero. If a second weighbridge is installed, it also calculates and sets the tare for this bridge wherever necessary.
Checking the continuous continuous scale with a calibration weight
The CW: Span Calibration calibration program ascertains the measured quantity of bulk solids corresponding to the belt load caused by the calibration weight and the belt progress. The program is only used for control purposes, not for calibrating. The calibration weight should be 30 % ... 100 % of the Qo rated load on the weighbridge. Qo = P05.04 * P03.01 / P03.02 The calibration weight should be placed right on the axis of the effect the bulk solids have, i.e. in the middle of the weighing station. NOTE:
The effective calibration weight is equal to the value to be ascertained on a separate static scale on weighing modules with parallel leaf-spring guides. In other cases, you can find the effective calibration weight in the data sheet. The inclination of the conveyor belt has no effect on the effective calibration weight.
The details and course of the calibration program: Condition
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Volumetric operation is preselected No bulk solids on the belt Any prefeeder involved has to be shut off (the prefeeder OFF function) The scale is turned on Batching operation may not be active The effective calibration weight has to be placed as per the P10.04 Taring [➙ 42] or zero setting [➙ 44] was carried out
To call up
select and start the CW: Span Calibration calibration program
Program runtime
One or several total belt circuits The program is finished when the number of impulses from the impulse transmitter given in P10.07 Belt Circuit No. has arrived.
Display while running
The program's remaining period in percent of P10.07 Belt Circuit No. The ratio of the targeted weight and measured weight value (on an ideal scale = 1.0000)
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 43 -
Operation
Display when finished
The display of the simulated quantity of bulk solids The ratio of E from the targeted weight and measured weight value (on an ideal scale = 1.0000).
Parameters changed None when results are accepted Potential events and messages
Aborted !: The program was canceled without any changes in parameters. Volumetric !: The scale is in gravimetric mode, while the program can only run in volumetric mode. Batch Active !: The program cannot run in batching operation. Batching operation is finished.
Tab. 20 : The details and course
It can be manually corrected depending upon the results and boundary conditions: Results (ratio) E
Error
Task
E = 0.99 ... 1.01
5%
Deviations of several percent indicate that technical data was incorrectly entered (for instance, a belt inclination or lever arms are not precisely known) or indicate mechanical faults (such as alignment or tension).
Tab. 21 : Handling the results of control
NOTE:
P10.02 is not taken into account in the control or it is set to 1. This is why the control program displays the same error quotient E after the correction.
Potential reasons for the measured value deviating greatly from the actual value ▪ Mechanical tension in the weighbridge ▪ Shunt forces due to bulk solid particles between the weighed and solid component ▪ Imprecise alignment ▪ Disturbances to the load cell cable NOTE:
4.4.4
We recommend further tests with different weights if you suspect one of these causes to be the fault. Non-linear deviations indicate the aforementioned reasons while linear deviations indicate incorrect data.
Continuous scale zero setting
The >0< Zero Set calibration program ascertains the remaining load with an empty belt after subtracting the tare in P10.05. This is why it shows the deviation from earlier taring. Most faults of a scale reveal themselves in a deviation to tare after an operating period. The results are indicated in percent of the Qo rated belt load: Qo = P03.01/ P03.02 The details and course of the calibration program:
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 44 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
▪
Condition
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Volumetric operation is preselected No bulk solids on the belt Any prefeeder involved has to be shut off (the prefeeder OFF function) The scale is turned on Batching operation may not be active
To call up
select and start the >0< Zero Set calibration program
Program runtime
One or several total belt circuits The program is finished when the number of impulses from the impulse transmitter given in P10.07 Belt Circuit No. has arrived.
Display while running
The remaining period of the programs in percent of P10.07 Belt Circuit No. Deviation in tare in percent of the rated belt load Qo
Display when finished
Deviation taking the tare correction already included in P10.06 in percent of Qo Deviation in tare from the value in P10.05 in percent of the rated belt load Qo
Parameters changed P10.06 when results are accepted Potential events and messages
Aborted !: The program was canceled without any changes in parameters. Volumetric !: The scale is in gravimetric mode, while the program can only run in volumetric mode. Batch Active !: The program cannot run in batching operation. Batching operation is finished. Value too big: The deviation ascertained is too large. which means that the software cannot correct it. The mechanical and electrical system of the scale should be checked.
Tab. 22 : The details and course
NOTE:
The zero setting function can also be started via digital input (refer to P13.23). It is started with a positive flank on the signal and it automatically carries over the results when it is within the allowed boundary (5 % of the rated belt load Qo). Otherwise, the results are automatically rejected.
The successful completion of the zero setting program can be monitored with the digital output (P14.16). The digital output is made inactive when starting the zero setting program. After completing the control, the contact is set active again if the results are within the allowed boundaries.
4.4.5
Taring the bin weigher
The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P26.01. The TB: Tare calibration program records the load on the weighing equipment for the empty bin. In operation with bulk solids, this value is subtracted from the measured bin weight. When the bin is empty, the display of the weight value fluctuates around zero after taring. The details and course of the calibration program: Condition
The bin should be empty. The bin filling may not be activated.
To call up
select and start the TB: Tare calibration program
Program runtime
10 s
display when running
'TB: active': the program's remaining time The current tare load in percent of P26.04
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 45 -
Operation
Display when finished
Deviation in percent of the rated load cell load as per P26.04 Tare in percent of the rated load cell load as per P26.04
Parameters changed New value of tare in P26.25 when results are accepted Potential events and messages
'Aborted ! : The program was terminated. The parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 23 : The details and course
4.4.6
Bin weight control
The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P26.01. The CB: Weight Check calibration program is used for checking and adjusting the weighing equipment with the aid of a known calibration weight. The mass of the calibration weight used should be keyed into P26.25 before program start. This program can identify shunt forces, i.e. links between the weighed and static components that absorb forces that cannot be captured with the load cell. The details and course of the calibration program: Condition
The bin may not be filled or emptied. The mass of the calibration weight was entered into P26.25.
To call up
select and start the CB: Weight Check calibration program
Program runtime display when running
The first thing is calculating the bin's current weight. The display of the remaining period and current weight. Then the Checkweight Up/Down prompt and value of the calibration weight appear. Now apply or remove the calibration weight and press the button. The display of the remaining period and the difference to the first weight value. The value shown is negative if the calibration weight has been removed. The second weight value is now taken and checked for plausibility.
Display when finished
Set/Act shows the quotient from the change in mass entered in P26.25 and the measured change in mass.
Parameters changed Enter in P26.24 when results are accepted P26.24new = P26.24old * 'Set/Act' Potential events and messages
Aborted !: The program was finished. although the parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 24 : The details and course
4.4.7
Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation
This function is only available when weight calculation has been activated for the bin via P26.01 and the level regulator has been activated in P27.01. The BIN: Controller Optimization bin regulator optimization program automatically calculates the KP and TN control parameters (P27.08 and P27.09) of the bin level regulator from the conveying element constant of the filling or emptying element in P27.06 and the dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the bin in P27.07. The details and course of the calibration program:
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 46 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
Condition
The conveying element constant of the filling or emptying element entered into P27.06. The dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the bin into P27.07
To call up
select and start the BIN: Controller Optimization calibration program
Program runtime
10 s
display when running
CO: P-Component = recently calculated parameters P27.08 I-Component TN = recently calculated parameters P27.09
Parameters changed Recently calculated values are entered into P27.08 and P27.09. The parameters are auwhen results are accepted tomatically accepted without taking further action. Potential events and messages
Aborted !: The program was finished. although the parameters remain unchanged. Feeder Constant: The P27.06 parameter has an incorrect value (P27.06 = 0.0 (kg/h)/mA). The program is canceled.
Tab. 25 : The details and course
NOTE:
4.4.8
The calculated values of the parameters in P27.08 and P27.09 can be further adapted manually. The optimization program does not have any impact on the rest of the parameters of the bin level controller (such as D portion, bypass and lift, etc.).
Automatic control measurement unit (KME)
Measuring units for mass flows are always subject to fault impacts that change over time. To correct them, the quantity Mk calculated by continuous measurement over the testing period T0 is compared with the quantity Mr actually conveyed during this period. Calculating the actual quantity with a remote static scale makes the procedure very time-consuming. In addition, the flow of bulk solids needed for continuous production is interrupted in the process for control. However, this test can be carried out automatically with the control measurement unit so that continuous measurement can be automatically corrected. The requirement for the functioning of this process is that measuring the actual quantity is encumbered with a substantially smaller fault than continuous measurement. The errors in determining the actual quantity consist of error E1 (when determining an initial weight value) and error E2 (when determining the second weight value). In the worst-case scenario, the total error ET (when determining the actual quantity) may be calculated as: |ET| = |E1| + |E2| The relative error er (when determining the actual test mass Mr) can be estimated at: er = |ET| / Mr This error er should not be any more than 1/5 of the admissible error of continuous measurement. This means that a minimum control quantity can be calculated if error ET is known. The random share of errors E1 and E2 can be eliminated by carrying out the control several times while only partially correcting the fault. The error of the continuous scale may contain constant shares, i.e. the tare error and errors dependant upon the flow rate (the range errors). When correcting the continuous scale, the user has to decide what type of error it is. It is necessary to distinguish the individual types of errors when operating at different flow rates. Correct classification is less important if continuous measurement is carried out at approximately equal flow rates. After all, it is not possible to give a general recommendation for classifying errors due to the different bulk solids and local conditions. DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to the technical design in a plant via P29.01 Type of Check System (selecting the control strategy).
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 47 -
Operation
You can find the parameters for adjusting the control measurement unit in the Check System block of parameters. There are further explanations on the process of control in the appendix.
4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement 4.4.8.1.1 Single Unit Control Type The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids is short between the bin and feeder.
Fig. 12: Single Unit KME Model
Depending upon the design, the bin weight also takes in the weight of the mass flow meter and the mass within the unit.
4.4.8.1.2 Separated Units Control Type The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids between the bin and feeder is long because additional transport lines are interposed.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 48 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
Fig. 13: Separated Units Control Type
Normally, the bin weight no longer takes in the bulk solids on the transport distance.
4.4.8.1.3 Filling System Control Type The continually measured flow of bulk solids might be redirected through a shunt from the process into the control bin where it is collected. The time for transporting the bulk solids between the continuous measuring unit and bin can be long.
Fig. 14: Filling System KME Type
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 49 -
Operation
4.4.8.1.4 External Control Type The control measurement is carried out through a separate unit if the bulk solids are withdrawn from one bin by various different ways and collected by means of several continuous measuring units. We urgently recommend using the DISOCONT Master for this since the process of correction calls for a tight exchange of data with the continuous scale. The separate unit measures the bin weight and distributes the errors calculated over the continuous measurements. The correction parameters of the continuous scales are correspondingly adjusted.
Fig. 15: External KME Type
4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME) The control measurement (KME) is a test that is carried out to calculate the error of the continuous scale based upon the change in the weight of the bulk solids in a bin and automatically correct it wherever desired.
Preconditions: ▪ ▪
The P29.01 Type of Check System parameter have to be unequal to NO. The P29.08 Check Start Tare parameter has to be on OP to be able to start from the operating panel or EasyServe.
Proceed to start tare correction from the VHM operating panel: Call up the KME page starting from the main page (HOME). Testing and additive correction of the zero point are called up with the Check Start Tare button and testing and multiplicative correction of the measuring unit can be called up by Check Start Span. After start, control goes through the phases shown in Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) [➙ 284]. These phases are shown in the operating panel. The following process quantities are displayed during the measurement until starting the next measurement:
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 50 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Operation
The quantity shown
Unit
Description
Contin. Result Z
kg
Check Result F/Z
-
The quotient of the change of bin weight and the quantity ascertained by the continuous scale
Relative Tare Correction
%
The correction ascertained in tare with reference to rated load
Relative Span Correction
%
The correction ascertained in calibration of span = the deviation in both measurements with reference to the measured value (even after completing the control)
Check Belt Length
m
Only with belt-supported systems: the progress in the conveyor belt during control
Check Meas. Time
s
Only with non-belt-supported systems: the duration of the measurement
Check Quantity
kg
Preselected quantity of bulk solids for the control (P29.13). The parameter can be changed here directly with the privilege of changing parameters .
Check Circuits
-
Only with belt-supported systems: preselected belt progress for the control (parameters)
BIN: Fill Weight
kg or t
The quantity of bulk solids ascertained by the continuous scale
Current bin weight
Note: If P29.02 Auto Correction = YES, the continuous scale is automatically corrected if the results of control are within the boundaries defined via P29.32 to P29.35. If automatic correction was not selected or if the results of control are outside of the specified boundaries, the Apply function can be used to correct the continuous scale. The Cancel function ends control without changing continuous scale adjustment. The result is maintained to the next control. If tare is corrected, the correction is carried out through P10.06 Tare Correction and the results of a zone correction is calculated into P10.02 Range Correction. The correction is documented in the log files. You can find more detailed information in the Types of control measurement [➙ 48] section and a flow chart in the appendix.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 51 -
Startup
5 Startup 5.1
Mechanical Prerequisites
The mechanical equipment is mounted according the instructions in the installation manual. All of the measuring idlers and three idlers in front of and behind the weighing station are part of the scale's range of influence. The scale's range of influence is shown in the following figure:
Fig. 16: Weighbridge F Measuring force
R Entire range of influence
WS The width of the weighing station
During assembly, make especially sure that the alignment and impact tolerance of the measuring idlers and carrying idlers agree in the scale's range of influence. Imprecise alignment would cause a zero point error depending upon the belt tension. This is why precise alignment is necessary for a precision scale. Nonspheric idler running can cause errors. Alignment The following figure shows the points with a triangle where the weigh idler and the relevant carrying idlers have to be aligned.
Fig. 17: Belt scale alignment points: A for troughed belts, B for flat belts
The idlers in the scale's range of influence have to be lifted 3 ... 5 mm in relation to the other idlers. They have to be aligned among one another to a height difference of less than 0.4 mm. They should be aligned at several points depending upon the idler station equipment as per the figure. Impact tolerance The out-of-round error for the idlers (impact tolerance) may be as much as 0.4 mm in the scale's range of influence. In addition, the idler stations have to be secured against displacement once aligned. Higherquality idlers are used especially on weighfeeders in the scale's range of influence.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 53 -
Startup
Maintenance All idlers have to be easy to operate. It might be good to replace defective idlers with original quality idlers. If idlers are remounted or overhauled they should be positioned at their previous locations. This is why the idlers and idler stations should be marked before maintenance. After maintenance, alignment has to be checked and the scale retared.
5.2
Assembling the Electrical Components
The subassemblies of a DISOCONT Tersus system come pre-assembled on delivery, e.g. attached to the scales or installed in a control cabinet. NOTE:
5.3
If you have purchased components, please read the DISOCONT Tersus BV-H2406 system manual where you will find information on the installation dimensions and architecture of the DISOCONT Tersus system.
Electrical Connections
The electrical connection for the DISOCONT Tersus is shown - depending on the scope of supply - in the model circuit diagram or in the system-specific circuit diagrams. Further information on the electrical properties and interfaces of the subassemblies can be found in the DISOCONT Tersus system manual BV-H2406.
5.4
Entering Basic parameters
A data sheet is a part of the scale's scope of supply containing the most important data and parameters belonging to it. Other parameters (for instance, the belt inclination against the horizon) have to be determined locally and keyed into the appropriate parameters. Most parameters have default settings and only have to be changed for operation in special cases. Machine data
Parameters
Name
The total of the rated load cell loads
P05.03
LC Rated Capacity
The transmission parameter for the load cells
P05.02
LC Characteristic Value
The lever ratio of force application into load cells wherever available
P05.05
Lever Ratio
Nominal flow rate Io
P03.01
Nominal Flow Rate
The characteristic value of the velocity sensor
P05.01
Pulses per length
Effective Weighing Platform Length
P05.04
Effective Platform Length
The conveyor belt inclination provided it is inclined against the horizon
P05.06
Angle
Belt circuit time
P10.03
Belt Circuit Time
Rated Velocity
P03.02
Nominal Speed
Tab. 26 : Basic parameters
Refer to the Parameters [➙ 65] Chapter for the setting parameters.
5.5
Test that the Control is Functioning
Control of the mechanical components, the drives and the interconnection with the system controller can best be checked with no bulk material in simulation [➙ 36] mode.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 54 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Startup
5.6
Scale calibration
Before starting calibration, it should be checked to see whether all transit restraints have been removed or released in the area of the weighbridge. For calibration, call up at least the two programs Determining the duration of a belt circuit [➙ 41] and Tare the beltweigher [➙ 42] in precisely this order. Generally, the scale is sufficiently well adjusted after accepting the findings of calibration. Many of the potential faults make themselves apparent in major deviations from the results of consecutive taring. If so, calibration should be checked in the following fashion: Checking the scale with calibration weights [➙ 59] Belt Velocity Check [➙ 59]
5.7
The Setting Regulation
The external flow rate controller (generally a frequency converter) and the internal conveyor flow rate controller have to be set to start up regulation.
5.7.1
Adjusting the external flow rate controller You can find out how to connect and adjust the external controller (frequency converter) in the separate controller manual. Settings may vary depending upon the model.
The controller parameters should be entered in accordance with the motor's rated data. The motor is generally operated on the 50 Hz supply network at an approximate rated speed of 1,450/min and at a frequency of as much as 110 Hz, meaning a speed of as much as 3,000/min. The maximum permissible speed may be lower for motors used for applications in the explosive zone. You can find precise data in the motor manual. Wherever provided for in this application, the temperature sensor in the motor has to be connected to the measurement processing system. Since the motors are operated in feed units in a wide adjustment range, it is especially important to focus on its behaviour at low speeds. The setting suggested by the controller is often not optimum due to the motor's reduced internal cooling. This is why the motor's temperature should be observed at a lower speed of approximately 20/min over a longer operating period. It might be necessary to reduce the voltage given by the controller for low speeds. On the other hand, it is not advisable to reduce it too much since there might otherwise be start-up problems when operating with bulk solids. Slip compensation is generally not necessary in frequency converters since the feed controller provides sufficient superset speed regulation. However, if it is activated, settings at a level of compensation lower than provided for in the converter's standard produce a more stable run. The ramp to the drive run up is set to the fastest run-up while the ramp for motor run-down is set to approximately 2 s. The feeder is engineered to ensure that the belt's rated velocity is set clearly below the motor's maximum speed to maintain sufficient reserve for correcting deviations in rated conditions, especially in case of a low belt load. This is why the motor speed will be approximately 70 % of maximum speed at rated velocity. Logically, the controller magnitude on the controller will also be approximately 70 % of its maximum value in this working point. This setting is generally made by keying in the maximum frequency on the controller. We recommend not applying any rise in the controller magnitude. Therefore, a setting of 0 ... 20 mA (instead of 4 ... 20 mA) should be preferred with current input.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 55 -
Startup
NOTE:
5.7.2
The behaviour of the external controller can generally be checked in a controller operating mode with a fixed speed specification without the involvement of the electronic feeding mechanism.
Adjusting the feeding controller
When the external controller (frequency converter) is set and checked, the internal feed controller is compared with the external wiring. Adjusting the rise in controller magnitude The minimum controller magnitude in the DISOCONT Tersus is adjusted to the external controller via P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset. This is why the feeder is turned on at zero controller magnitude in volumetric operation and without bulk solids. Coming from high values, P11.13 is set just so that the drive does not rotate any more. P11.11 Lower Limit is set slightly below this value. Now the setting is already sufficient in most feeders when using the default setting of the other controller parameters. Wherever necessary, it can be streamlined with the parameters in the Rate controller group. Setting the controller magnitude for rated conditions When the universal controller is used (P11.01 = UNIVERS), it is also necessary to set other parameters in accordance with the application. The appendix contains details on adjusting in this special case. It is first of all necessary to calibrate the scale for these settings. Refer to Scale calibration [➙ 55]. In particular, the bypass for the controller magnitude is set via P11.21 Bypass in volumetric operation so that the set flow rate is approximately adjusted. We recommend operating the feeder at a flow rate setpoint ranging between 50 % and 100 % of the nominal flow rate.
5.8
Setting belt run monitoring
DISOCONT Tersus allows monitoring belt run to the left and right as well as monitoring belt slip. These functions are only available if a belt is used with an integrated mark. A sensor has to be integrated in the belt for scanning this mark in the mechanism that should be connected according to the circuit diagrams. The parameters affecting monitoring are in the group of Belt Monitoring parameters. The following figure shows its principle.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 56 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Startup
Fig. 18: Belt run measurement and belt slip measurement N Normal operation L The belt skew to the left
R The belt skew to the right
x The belt length covered
T The belt mark and the duration of the belt mark at a medium belt position
V The sensor for capturing the mark in the belt W The width of the belt mark at right angles to the direction of belt travel T_rev The duration of a belt circuit T+t2 Extended duration from belt run to the left
Sig The course of the signal on the sensor Le The length of the belt mark in the direction of belt travel T-t1 Reduced duration from belt run to the left T_rev+t3 Extended duration of a belt circuit due to belt slip
SLP Belt slip between the velocity measurement and belt
The procedure for activating monitoring NOTE: The belt should be aligned for manual adjustment in the centre of the pulleys.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 57 -
Startup
Activity
Relevant parameters
Setting the sensor width as per the data sheet
P18.05
Setting the sensor length as per the data sheet
P18.04
Checking the input channel for the sensor signal as per the circuit diagram
P18.02
Activating the measurement
P18.01
Setting offset to zero
P18.06
Turning on the belt drive Tab. 27 : Activating belt run monitoring
DISOCONT Tersus calculates the belt position from at least two full belt circuits and shows them on the operating panel and in EasyServe as a Belt Drift service value. The measured drift is given in cm from the mid-position of the belt mark relative to the sensor. It can be roughly calibrated mechanically by displacing the sensor. Then, it can be precisely calibrated via P18.06. Afterwards, the event classes should be adjusted or checked for the events of belt drift and belt skew in the P18.08 and P18.10 parameters. CAUTION: Belt skew can cause permanent damage to the belt.
5.9
Activating belt influence compensation (BIC)
Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) monitors and corrects the belt influence by taring per belt sections. Compensation uses the mark in the belt and belt travel sensor. Therefore, before activating BIC, belt run monitoring [➙ 56] should be set and activated, which is why compensation can only be used on belts with a built-in mark. Belt influence compensation calculates the influence the conveyor belt has on recording the weight of the bulk solids over several belt circuits and it compensates for this influence. This learning process requires approximately 10 complete belt circuits with an empty belt or regular feeding. Compensation can be activated via P18.03 after adjusting travel monitoring in the Belt Monitoring group of parameters.
5.10
Activating measurement and feeding with reference to the discharge
point (VAP) Since the weight of the bulk solids is determined before the discharge point, the product of loading and the current velocity does not equal the flow rate at the discharge of the feeder scale. This is why DISOCONT Tersus has a memory that delays the measuring signal until the measured bulk solids arrive at the discharge. The delayed value is used for regulating the belt velocity and calculating the flow rate and total. In order to activate, the ratio of the route from the center of the weighbridge to the bulk solids discharge should be entered into P17.02 in percent at the ratio of the entire belt length. Then, this function can be activated via P17.01.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 58 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Startup
5.11
Setting Control
5.11.1 Function Check Step
Activity 1
Turning on the feeder
2
Analyze any event messages that may appear and rectify the fault.
3
Call up the service values on the VHM or EasyServe operating panel: Tachometer 1
The output frequency of the impulse transmitter has to be less than 2,900 Hz. The value should approximately correspond to the data given in the data sheet in the rated operating point (rated performance and rated load). The sensor in the velocity sensor should be checked (Belt Velocity Check [➙ 59]) if the frequency fluctuates substantially at a constant belt velocity (controller magnitude).
Loadcell
This value is a measure of the load on the load cell. The non-standardized output value of the load cell amplifier may not be greater than 3.5 mV/V even if the weighbridge has a rated belt load. However, it has to change if the weighbridge is loaded (for instance, with the calibration weight). If the value is too large, the load cell is overloaded. If the value is negative, the load cell is incorrectly connected.
Utilization LC
Loading the load cell in percent with reference to the total rated load cell loads. However, the value has to change if the weighbridge is loaded (for instance, with the calibration weight). If the value is too large, the load cell is overloaded. If the value is negative, the load cell is incorrectly connected. The value should not be greater than 100 % at rated bridge loads.
Tab. 28 : The control procedure
NOTE:
If Loadcell or Utilization LC is unusual, the load cell input can be checked [➙ 300] with a test plug.
5.11.2 Checking the scale with calibration weights It might make sense to check it with calibration weights to make out the following faults: ▪ A fault in the cabling or mechanical equipment ▪ Unreliable data for the mechanical equipment such as the lever ratio or belt inclination Preconditions: ▪ Precisely identified and available calibration weight ▪ The calibration weight ranges between 30 % and 100 % of the rated load Refer to Checking the continuous scale with a calibration weight [➙ 43] for carrying out controlling.
5.11.3 Belt Velocity Check The velocity sensor's frequency generator can be driven in a number of different ways: ▪ with a frictional wheel on the lower carrying run of the conveyor belt, in particular with belt scales ▪ with the shaft of the drive motor, in particular with weighfeeders
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 59 -
Startup
In the former case, the value of the P05.01 Pulses per length parameter entered is dependant upon the precise diameter of the frictional wheel; in the second case, the value is dependant upon the gear and looping factor of the conveyor belt on the drive pulley. So the velocity measurement accuracy should be checked. The procedure when checking belt velocity 1. Operate the belt at constant velocity and with weighfeeders in volumetric operation with a solid setpoint. 2. Use the stopwatch and tape measure to establish the velocity Vg of the conveyor belt. To increase accuracy, it is advisable to make several measurements and calculate the mean. 3. Read the velocity Va on DISOCONT Tersus (wherever feasible over the same period of time). 4. Calculate and enter a new characteristic value if there are deviations |Vg/Va| > 0.001: P05.01 (new) = P05.01 (old) * Va/Vg
NOTE:
It is also possible to apply this process if the characteristic value is not known from the data sheet. In this case, it is advisable to start off by obtaining a rough setting based upon the default setting and then do fine adjustment following the principle described above.
Major deviations between Vg and Va indicate a faulty velocity measurement. In that case, check the velocity sensor. NOTE:
5.12
The feeder's function can be checked with the display in EasyServe or the LED in the VCU 20100. In addition, you can use an ammeter to check the current i in the circuit of the sensor. This should produce the following measured values: Zahn recorded the sensor: i = 0.1 ... 1.65 mA Zahn did not record the sensor: i = 1.65 ... 8 mA The mechanism should be slowly rotated by hand.
Check with bulk solids
Each test or calibration with calibration weights can only approximate the actual operating conditions. A highly accurate continuous measurement can only be achieved by making several measurements with bulk material and a subsequent correction. It is corrected with Range Correction P10.02. The following figure shows an example of the arrangement for checking belt-based continuous throughput metering.
Fig. 19: Arrangement for verification with bulk material
The following items must be observed: 1. The route from the continuous measuring point to the collecting point for the material has to be clean. 2. If there are any diverters they may not convey any material. 3. If there are any feed screws or air slides between the continuous measuring point and the collecting point, material should be conveyed for approximately ½ hour before making a check. This will allow the usual material build-ups to form on the conveying elements. 4. Dedusting should be set to a minimum.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 60 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Startup
5. The bins or vehicles in which the material is transported onto a (legal-for-trade) commercial scale must be cleaned and re-weighed (tared) before each filling. The commercial scales must be sufficiently accurate to measure the MW quantity. The new value P10.02new is calculated as follows from the prior value P10.02old from the MA counter progression of continuous measurement and the MW mass ascertained on the control scale: P10.02new = P10.02old * MW / MA For example: Old value of P10.02 = 1 A material quantity of MW = 4.9 t is conveyed over a period of 15 minutes. The MA counter progression read off the device is 5.0 t. P10.02new = 1 * 4.9/5.0 = 0.98 The calculated value should be entered into P10.02.
5.13
Calibrating bin weighing weighing
The prerequisite for precision measurement of the quantity of bulk solids in a bin is installing the bin free of shunt forces. The weight of the bin may only be supported on the load cells. The connections should be led to the bin horizontally and with supple compensators. Compression forces can cause substantial measuring errors when determining the mass of bulk solids if the compressive forces attack vertically on the bin. In particular, this danger exists on the input and output of the bin. The compression forces should be compensated for if it is not possible to avoid variable pressures at these points. It can be compensated for mechanically or electronically when recording pressure. The parameters for the bin's load cells should be keyed into P26.02, P26.03 and P26.04. The data apply correspondingly if a second weighed bin is supposed to be adjusted. The tare program [➙ 45] should be called up if the bin is empty. The fill level's display should vary by zero after taking on the findings. As a check, it is advisable to get the bin vibrating for a brief period of time and then check the measured weight value. The deviation from zero is a measure of the likely measuring error. The bin weigher is now calibrated when using calibrated load cells.
NOTES :
▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪
If checking zero point stability has given rise to major errors, there are generally also errors between the actual and displayed weight for bulk solids. The proportionality between the actual and displayed weight can be checked with the adjustment program CB: Weight Check and corrected [➙ 46]. The rated value for the bin fill level should be set into P26.09 for theoretical considerations, the data sheet or an optic check with a full bin. If the bin fill level is regulated by turning a prefeeder on and off, the P26.12 and P26.13 parameters should be adjusted for filling control. Regulation should be streamlined [➙ 46] after keying in the parameters if the fill level is created with a prefeeder continually controlled in its flow performance.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 61 -
Maintenance and Recalibration
6 Maintenance and Recalibration The electronic equipment of the DISOCONT Tersus system is maintenance free. It does not contain any wear parts under the specified ambient conditions (refer to the BV-H2406 system manual). The MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) is longer than 10 years. This section describes possible measures that can be taken to guarantee accuracy of the measuring system, including for the mechanical components.
Cause
Action
Periodically, e.g. every 3 months
Turn off bulk solids conveying Most errors in the measuring unit can be identified in and tare the measuring unit. changes in tare. A substantial change in the tare indicates friction in the measuring unit. It might make sense to check the unit for unacceptable foreign particles and material build-up of bulk solids on the belt and idlers in the area of the weighbridge.
Change of bulk material
Remarks
Inspecting the belt
The conveyor belt should be checked for damage and center run. Check the belt tension and correct it wherever necessary (refer to the operating instructions for the mechanical equipment).
If available: check the bin weight acquisition.
The bin should be set vibrating for a brief period of time. The weight values shown before and after these vibrations provide a measure of shunt forces. This can also be checked with an empty bin. The results of taring provide a measure of the bulk solids remaining in the bin when emptying.
With weighfeeders: Adjust the external output controller
You may need to adjust the rated output and possibly the fill limits for a bin.
Periodically as per the operating Do the maintenance work instructions of the mechanical listed in the manual. measuring equipment and other mechanical parts of the unit
The interval may depend on the bulk solids.
Tab. 29 : Suggested measures
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 63 -
Parameters
7 Parameters The DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to each application via parameters. No special programing knowledge is therefore necessary.
Fig. 20: Parameter sets
Parameter set
Purpose
Activation
Preparation and Alteration
Active parameter set
Complete parameter set Regulation of measuring and control functions
Always active
Using EasyServe, the software the VHM operating console or a web server
default settings
Complete parameter set Non-alterable basic setting
Copy into the active parameter set using EasyServe, the software the VHM operating console [➙ 36] or a web server
Cannot be changed
Backup set
Complete parameter set Pre-setting for a group of applications or a setting stored during commissioning
Copy into the active parameter set using EasyServe, the software the VHM operating console [➙ 36] or a web server
Only using EasyServe in expert mode
Tab. 30 : Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus
Note: parameters not required for an application can be faded out or declared 'read only' using EasyServe in expert mode. EasyServe compiles a list of visible parameters that form an integral part of the system documentation. They, together with this manual, make up the relevant documentation of the control system for an application. The parameter list in the operating manual contains all of the parameters, regardless of their actual use in an application. In addition to the parameter set stored in the scales, we recommend that after commissioning you keep a copy of the parameter set in a mass storage medium using EasyServe. The parameters are arranged into blocks to for clarity. A parameter is uniquely identified by its block and number within that block in the respective scales software version: P01.03: block of parameters 1 → Parameter 3
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 65 -
Parameters
Note: Each parameter also has a unique number (ID) with which it can be addressed over the serial interface. This number can be seen as a tooltip in EasyServe when passing over the parameter and can be output in the parameter printout. Gaps can appear between block numbers and parameters within the blocks. In rare cases, the number of a parameter may change.
7.1
Abbreviations
Source
Description
FB
Fieldbus
OP
Operating panel
DI
Digital Input
DO
Digital Output
AI
Analog Inputs
AO
Analog Outputs
LS
Logical signal for using internally available signals
Event
Event. The reaction to an event can be configured.
W1
Warning 1 (requires acknowledgement)
W2
Warning 2 (does not require acknowledgement)
ALARM
Alarm (requires acknowledgement)
IGNORE
Ignore: do not show any event message but switch the corresponding contact outputs
LC
Load cell
I
Flow rate
v
Belt velocity
VCU
VCU 20100 system unit of DISOCONT Tersus. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VHM
DISOCONT Tersus operating panel. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VMO
Machine operating console for service work. Refer to the BV-H2488 manual for details.
Tab. 31 : Abbreviations frequently used in parameters
7.2
Configuring the Interfaces
The internal software signals and signals sent externally through the interfaces are linked by means of parameters. The parameters governing the link are assigned to the logic signals and describe the origin or the target of a signal. The linking takes place in steps across several sections.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 66 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
Step
Task
1.
Select the source, such as DI, DO, ..., ... n/a means not assigned; i.e., the function does not have any direct interaction with its surroundings.
2.
Selection of the control unit, such as VCUx or VMOx, ... It only shows the control units preselected in the Hardware Modules block of parameters. As many 3 VCU and 2 VMO can be assigned to one scale. Address switches are used to differentiate between the units. Details on setting the address can be found in the system manual BVH2406.
3.
Select the channel number on the control unit, e.g. DI 1 ...
4.
Select for the active signal the external signal level LOW or HIGH.
Tab. 32 : Step-by-step specification of signal links
The source parameter defines whether a more precise signal path setting is also necessary. The linking parameters only offer technically meaningful interfaces. Source
Unit
Channel
Level
Purpose
DI
VCU1-VCU3 VMO1-VMO2 FB
DI1-DI7
High, Low
Binary input signals
DO
VCU1-VCU3 VMO1-VMO2
DO1-DO8 DO1-DO5
High, Low
Binary output signals
AI
VCU1-VCU3 VMO1-VMO2
AI1-AI2 AI1-AI3
Analog interface
AO
VCU1-VCU3 VMO1-VMO2
AO1-AO4 AO1-AO3
Analog interface
LC
VCU1-VCU3
LC1-LC2
Load cell interface
LS
VCU1-VCU3 VMO1-VMO2
DO1-DO8 DO1-DO5
n/a
The internal signal is not assigned to any interface.
Input signals adopt automatically a state that does not interfere with the program flow.
FB
Fieldbus, no additional details required
Controlled by signals or fieldbus
OP
VHM operating panel, no additional details required
Controlled by operating panel entries
Speed, no additional details required
Link with an internal signal
v
High, Low
Internal by-pass of an output for local operation
Tab. 33 : Signal sources and their descriptions
Source
Type of internal signal
Unit
Interface assembly for external signal exchange
Channel
Designation of the channel in the unit
Level
Identifier of the value of the external signal if the internal logical signal accepts the True value. You can switch here between active high and active low signal levels, i.e. the value of the external signal can be inverted.
Tab. 34 : Meaning of the columns
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 67 -
Parameters
Setting
Binary input
NAMUR input
Binary output
Low
Voltage = 0 V across the input terminals
Current at the input > 3 mA (sensor not covered)
High resistance, relay contact open
High
Voltage > 18 VDC across the input terminals
Current at the input < 1 mA (sensor covered)
Low resistance, relay contact closed
Tab. 35 : The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal
Name
Unit
DI: External Event 1
Source DI
Channel
VCU1
Level
DI1
Low
Tab. 36 : Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel
The DI: External Event 1 signal is connected at input DI1 of VCU1. If the input is open (low), this is interpreted as logically True (or 1).
7.3
Configuring Event Messages
The system monitors a range of both of its own operation and the peripherals. The reaction to a recognized deviation, that is to say an event, is set by parameter. The parameters are used to assign to each event a class that will determine this reaction.
Event class
Description Impact on Feeding
Acknowledgement required
Color on the VHM
Alarm
ALARM
Stopping feed operation, The scale will be turned off, Cannot be switched on
Yes
Red
Warning 1
W1
Feeder will continue to run
Yes
Orange
Warning 2
W2
Feeder will continue to run
No Yellow Only display as long as the event is active
Ignore
IG
Feeder will continue to run
-
-
Tab. 37 : Event classes
NOTE:
An external binary output channel is set that may have been assigned to the event regardless of the event class.
A recently pending alarm- or warning 1-class event will be shown on the operating panel blinking and in color. The blinking stops when acknowledged. Acknowledged event messages are cleared from the display for currently pending events when the event is no longer pending. Each event is stored with a time-stamp in the internal memory [➙ 34] for later analysis.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 68 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
7.4
Parameter List
7.4.1
Parameter Overview
VWF20170-001 1322 01 - Hardware Modules Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P01.01 [➙ 93]
Analog Channel A10
NO
5746
P01.02 [➙ 93]
Analog Channel A11
NO
5747
P01.03 [➙ 93]
VCU20100-Unit 2
NO
4211
P01.04 [➙ 93]
VCU2: Analog Channel A10
NO
5771
P01.05 [➙ 93]
VCU2: Analog Channel A11
NO
5772
P01.06 [➙ 93]
Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2
A
4216
P01.07 [➙ 93]
VCU20100-Unit 3
NO
4212
P01.08 [➙ 93]
VCU3: Analog Channel A10
NO
5773
P01.09 [➙ 93]
VCU3: Analog Channel A11
NO
5774
P01.10 [➙ 93]
Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3
A
4217
P01.11 [➙ 93]
VHM RS485 Address
1
4221
P01.12 [➙ 93]
VMO20100-Unit 1
NO
4222
P01.13 [➙ 93]
Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1
A
4223
P01.14 [➙ 93]
VMO20100-Unit 2
NO
5834
P01.15 [➙ 93]
Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2
A
5835
02 - Dialog Behaviour Number:
Name
Default
P02.01 [➙ 96]
Language *
DEUTSCH
4224
P02.02 [➙ 96]
Units *
Metric
4225
P02.03 [➙ 96]
Scale Name *
DISOCONT Tersus VWF
6238
P02.04 [➙ 96]
Access Rights Limitation HMI *
NO
4801
P02.05 [➙ 96]
Remote IP Address HMI 1 *
192.168.240.21
4798
P02.06 [➙ 96]
Event: Communication HMI 1 *
IG
4218
P02.07 [➙ 96]
Remote IP Address HMI 2 *
192.168.240.21
4799
P02.08 [➙ 96]
Event: Communication HMI 2 *
IG
4802
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 69 -
Parameters
P02.09 [➙ 96]
Remote IP Address HMI 3 *
127.0.0.1
4800
P02.10 [➙ 96]
Event: Communication HMI 3 *
IG
4803
P02.11 [➙ 96]
Event: Communication VHM serial *
IG
4804
P02.12 [➙ 96]
Password *
10000
4292
P02.13 [➙ 96]
2. Password *
14389
4321
P02.14 [➙ 96]
Reset Counter 1 *
active
4286
P02.15 [➙ 96]
Reset Counter 2 *
active
4287
P02.16 [➙ 96]
Batch control *
active
4283
P02.17 [➙ 96]
Switch Grav./Vol. command *
active
4595
P02.18 [➙ 96]
Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode *
active
4282
P02.19 [➙ 96]
Filling control bin weigher *
active
4598
P02.20 [➙ 96]
Data Log ON/OFF *
Password
4309
P02.21 [➙ 96]
Exit Scale *
active
4600
03 - Feeder Definition Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P03.01 [➙ 101]
Nominal Flow Rate *
10000 kg/h
4226
P03.02 [➙ 101]
Nominal Speed *
0.1 m/s
4227
P03.03 [➙ 101]
Flow Rate Units *
------ kg/h
4229
P03.04 [➙ 101]
Counter 1 Unit *
------- kg
4230
P03.05 [➙ 101]
Pulse Length Total *
0.05 s
4231
P03.06 [➙ 101]
Counter 2 Unit *
----.-- t
4232
P03.07 [➙ 101]
Counter 3 Unit *
-----.- t
4233
P03.08 [➙ 101]
DO: Pulse Counter *
n/a
4239
P03.09 [➙ 101]
Totalizer Increment *
0 kg
4254
04 - Control Sources Number:
Name
Default
P04.01 [➙ 103]
Feeder Start *
FB
4241
P04.02 [➙ 103]
Feedrate Setpoint *
FB
4242
P04.03 [➙ 103]
Source Run Enable *
n/a
4245
P04.04 [➙ 103]
Event: Run Disabled *
W2
4246
P04.05 [➙ 103]
Source Relative Setpoint *
n/a
6233
P04.06 [➙ 103]
Relativer Setpoint Range *
20 mA
6240
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 70 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P04.07 [➙ 103]
Relative Setpoint Offset *
4 mA
6241
P04.08 [➙ 103]
Difference Flow Rate *
n/a
4248
P04.09 [➙ 103]
Difference Flow Rate Range *
20 mA
4249
P04.10 [➙ 103]
Difference Flow Rate Offset *
4 mA
4250
P04.11 [➙ 103]
Difference Function *
NO
4251
Number:
Name
Default
P05.01 [➙ 106]
Pulses per length *
10000 I/m
4256
P05.02 [➙ 106]
LC Characteristic Value *
2 mV/V
4257
P05.03 [➙ 106]
LC Rated Capacity *
60 kg
4258
P05.04 [➙ 106]
Effective Platform Length *
0.5 m
4259
P05.05 [➙ 106]
Lever Ratio *
1
4260
P05.06 [➙ 106]
Angle *
0 Grad
4261
P05.07 [➙ 106]
Speed Measurement *
DI
4262
P05.08 [➙ 106]
Source Load Cell *
LC
4263
P05.09 [➙ 106]
Source Load Cell 2 *
n/a
4269
P05.10 [➙ 106]
Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset *
4 mA
5837
P05.11 [➙ 106]
Load Cell 1 analog Input Range *
20 mA
5838
P05.12 [➙ 106]
Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset *
4 mA
5839
P05.13 [➙ 106]
Load Cell 2 analog Input Range *
20 mA
5840
Number:
Name
Default
P06.01 [➙ 109]
Afterflow Totalizer
3s
4274
P06.02 [➙ 109]
Zero Drop-Out Active
NO
4679
P06.03 [➙ 109]
Zero Drop-Out Limit
1%Q
4680
P06.04 [➙ 109]
Start-Up Mode
Circuits
4276
P06.05 [➙ 109]
DO: CleanOut Timer
n/a
4277
P06.06 [➙ 109]
CleanOut ON Time
0.25 h
4278
P06.07 [➙ 109]
CleanOut OFF Time
6h
4279
P06.08 [➙ 109]
DI: Chain Motion Monitor
n/a
4404
P06.09 [➙ 109]
Chain Motion Delay
20 s
4405
P06.10 [➙ 109]
Event: Chain Motion Monitor
A
4406
05 - Rated Data Customer
Sys ID
06 - Feeder control
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 71 -
Parameters
P06.11 [➙ 109]
Auto Zero Active
NO
4675
P06.12 [➙ 109]
Zeroing Limit
5%Q
4677
P06.13 [➙ 109]
Event: Tare Correction
W1
4678
P06.14 [➙ 109]
Limit Value Difference
0.5 % Q
4729
P06.15 [➙ 109]
Mean Limit Value
1%Q
4676
P06.16 [➙ 109]
Volum on LC failure
NO
4270
P06.17 [➙ 109]
Event: Volum. caused by LC-error IG
4271
07 - Feeder Monitoring Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P07.01 [➙ 114]
Event: Stand-By
W2
4289
P07.02 [➙ 114]
Stand-By Limit Value
2 % Io
4290
P07.03 [➙ 114]
Event: Tachometer Input
A
4291
P07.04 [➙ 114]
Event: Error LC Input
A
4293
P07.05 [➙ 114]
Event: LC Input < MIN
A
4294
P07.06 [➙ 114]
Event: LC Input > MAX
A
4295
P07.07 [➙ 114]
Event: Setpoint Limited
W1
4296
P07.08 [➙ 114]
Event: Power Failure
A
4297
P07.09 [➙ 114]
Event: Memory
A
4302
P07.10 [➙ 114]
Source Emergency Setpoint
n/a
4930
P07.11 [➙ 114]
Emergency Setpoint
0 kg/h
4931
P07.12 [➙ 114]
Event: Analog Input < Offset
A
5418
Number:
Name
Default
P08.01 [➙ 117]
Filter: Actual Flow Rate
3s
4328
P08.02 [➙ 117]
Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
3s
4329
P08.03 [➙ 117]
Filter: Belt Load
3s
4331
P08.04 [➙ 117]
Filter: Belt Speed
3s
4332
Number:
Name
Default
P09.01 [➙ 118]
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
5 % Io
4337
P09.02 [➙ 118]
Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN
W1
4338
P09.03 [➙ 118]
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
120 % Io
4339
08 - Filters Customer
Sys ID
09 - Limit Values
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 72 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P09.04 [➙ 118]
Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX
W1
4340
P09.05 [➙ 118]
Limit: Load MIN
60 % Q
4341
P09.06 [➙ 118]
Event: Load MIN
W1
4342
P09.07 [➙ 118]
Limit: Load MAX
120 % Q
4343
P09.08 [➙ 118]
Event: Load MAX
W1
4344
P09.09 [➙ 118]
Limit: Speed MIN
5%V
4345
P09.10 [➙ 118]
Event: Speed MIN
W1
4346
P09.11 [➙ 118]
Limit: Speed MAX
120 % V
4347
P09.12 [➙ 118]
Event: Speed MAX
W1
4348
10 - Calibration Data Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P10.01 [➙ 120]
LC Filter
0.25 s
4334
P10.02 [➙ 120]
Range Correction
1
4352
P10.03 [➙ 120]
Belt Circuit Time
30 s
4353
P10.04 [➙ 120]
Calibration Weight
10 kg
4354
P10.05 [➙ 120]
Basic Tare
0 kg/m
4355
P10.06 [➙ 120]
Tare Correction
0 kg/m
4356
P10.07 [➙ 120]
Belt Circuit No.
1000000 I/B
4357
Number:
Name
Default
P11.01 [➙ 121]
Optimize Controller
STANDARD
4368
P11.02 [➙ 121]
P-Component KP
0.04 mA/%
4369
P11.03 [➙ 121]
I-Component TN
1s
4370
P11.04 [➙ 121]
Filter: Deviation
3s
4333
P11.05 [➙ 121]
Time Deviation
20 s
4298
P11.06 [➙ 121]
Threshold Deviation
5%
4299
P11.07 [➙ 121]
Factor Deviation
1
4320
P11.08 [➙ 121]
Deviation abs. max.
100 %
6255
P11.09 [➙ 121]
Event: Deviation
W1
4300
P11.10 [➙ 121]
Event: Controller Limited
W1
4301
P11.11 [➙ 121]
Lower Limit
0 mA
4371
P11.12 [➙ 121]
Upper Limit
20 mA
4372
11 - Rate controller
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 73 -
Parameters
P11.13 [➙ 121]
Controller Magnitude Offset
0 mA
4373
P11.14 [➙ 121]
Position at STOP
0
4374
P11.15 [➙ 121]
Volumetric Start-Up
0 Circuits
4272
P11.16 [➙ 121]
Volumetric Clearance
0 Circuits
4273
P11.17 [➙ 121]
Setpoint Offset
4 mA
4244
P11.18 [➙ 121]
Setpoint Range
20 mA
4243
P11.19 [➙ 121]
Store
NO
4376
P11.20 [➙ 121]
Volumetric Mode
Qconst
4377
P11.21 [➙ 121]
Bypass
0 mA
4375
P11.22 [➙ 121]
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord
0s
4378
P11.23 [➙ 121]
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord
0s
4379
P11.24 [➙ 121]
Set/Act Sources
I
4381
P11.25 [➙ 121]
Adaptation 1
NO
4382
12 - Analog Outputs Number:
Name
Default
P12.01 [➙ 128]
AO: Setpoint
n/a
4385
P12.02 [➙ 128]
Setpoint Offset
4 mA
4386
P12.03 [➙ 128]
Setpoint Range
20 mA
4387
P12.04 [➙ 128]
AO: Actual Flow Rate
n/a
4388
P12.05 [➙ 128]
Flow Rate Offset
4 mA
4389
P12.06 [➙ 128]
Flow Rate Range
20 mA
4390
P12.07 [➙ 128]
AO: Belt Load
n/a
4391
P12.08 [➙ 128]
Belt Load Offset
4 mA
4392
P12.09 [➙ 128]
Belt Load Range
20 mA
4393
P12.10 [➙ 128]
AO: Speed
n/a
4394
P12.11 [➙ 128]
Speed Offset
4 mA
4395
P12.12 [➙ 128]
Speed Range
20 mA
4396
P12.13 [➙ 128]
AO: Deviation
n/a
4397
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 74 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P12.14 [➙ 128]
Deviation Offset
4 mA
4398
P12.15 [➙ 128]
Deviation Range
20 mA
4399
P12.16 [➙ 128]
AO: Motor Speed Control
AO
4400
Number:
Name
Default
P13.01 [➙ 131]
Event: External Event 1
A
4417
P13.02 [➙ 131]
DI: External Event 1
DI
4418
P13.03 [➙ 131]
Event: External Event 2
A
4430
P13.04 [➙ 131]
DI: External Event 2
n/a
4431
P13.05 [➙ 131]
Event: External Event 3
IG
4730
P13.06 [➙ 131]
DI: External Event 3
n/a
4731
P13.07 [➙ 131]
Event: External Event 4
IG
4732
P13.08 [➙ 131]
DI: External Event 4
n/a
4733
P13.09 [➙ 131]
DI: Acknowledge Events
n/a
4419
P13.10 [➙ 131]
DI: Local Mode
n/a
4420
P13.11 [➙ 131]
DI: Volumetric Mode
n/a
4421
P13.12 [➙ 131]
DI: Volumetric synchron
n/a
4941
P13.13 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6
A
4409
P13.14 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7
A
4410
P13.15 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6
IG
4411
P13.16 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI7
IG
4412
P13.17 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VCU3-DI6
IG
4413
P13.18 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VCU3-DI7
IG
4414
P13.19 [➙ 131]
DI: Reset Totalizer 1
n/a
5414
P13.20 [➙ 131]
DI: Reset Totalizer 2
n/a
5415
P13.21 [➙ 131]
Belt Limit Switch
n/a
4422
P13.22 [➙ 131]
Event: Limit Switch
IG
4423
13 - Digital Inputs
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 75 -
Parameters
P13.23 [➙ 131]
DI: Zero Set
n/a
4407
P13.24 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7
IG
5895
P13.25 [➙ 131]
Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7
IG
5896
14 - Digital Outputs Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P14.01 [➙ 136]
DO: Scale Start
DO
4433
P14.02 [➙ 136]
DO: Feeder Started
n/a
4434
P14.03 [➙ 136]
DO: Start Prefeeder
DO
4435
P14.04 [➙ 136]
DO: ALARM
n/a
4436
P14.05 [➙ 136]
DO: Deviation
n/a
4437
P14.06 [➙ 136]
DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN
n/a
4438
P14.07 [➙ 136]
DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX
n/a
4439
P14.08 [➙ 136]
DO: Load MIN
n/a
4440
P14.09 [➙ 136]
DO: Load MAX
n/a
4441
P14.10 [➙ 136]
DO: Speed MIN
n/a
4442
P14.11 [➙ 136]
DO: Speed MAX
n/a
4443
P14.12 [➙ 136]
DO: Volumetric Mode
n/a
4444
P14.13 [➙ 136]
DO: Local Mode
n/a
4445
P14.14 [➙ 136]
DO: WARNING
n/a
4759
P14.15 [➙ 136]
DO: Keyboard Mode
n/a
4462
P14.16 [➙ 136]
DO: Zero Set OK
n/a
4463
Number:
Name
Default
P15.01 [➙ 139]
Batch Mode
NO
4448
P15.02 [➙ 139]
Batch Setpoint Source
OP
4449
P15.03 [➙ 139]
Adaptation Time
3s
4450
P15.04 [➙ 139]
Correction Amount
0 kg
4451
P15.05 [➙ 139]
Adaptation Factor
0.5
4452
P15.06 [➙ 139]
Batch Automatic Record
NO
4453
P15.07 [➙ 139]
DI: Batch Terminate
n/a
4454
P15.08 [➙ 139]
DO: Batch Running
n/a
4455
P15.09 [➙ 139]
DO: Dribble Feed
n/a
4456
15 - Batch Mode
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 76 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P15.10 [➙ 139]
DO: Full Feed
n/a
4457
P15.11 [➙ 139]
Analog Setpoint Relat.
1000 kg
4936
P15.12 [➙ 139]
Batch Setpoint Range
20 mA
4937
P15.13 [➙ 139]
Batch Setpoint Offset
4 mA
4938
P15.14 [➙ 139]
Batch Tolerance
100000 kg
4458
P15.15 [➙ 139]
Event: Out of Tolerance
W2
4459
P15.16 [➙ 139]
Pre-cut-off Amount
0 kg
4408
P15.17 [➙ 139]
DO: Pre-cut-off
n/a
4461
P15.18 [➙ 139]
Batch Setpoint Limit
1000000 kg
4781
P15.19 [➙ 139]
Event: Batch setpoint Limit
W1
4782
P15.20 [➙ 139]
Batch behaviour after power down Cancel
4601
16 - Maintenance interval Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P16.01 [➙ 143]
Maintenance Electric
3000 h
4465
P16.02 [➙ 143]
Event: Maint. Electric
IG
4466
P16.03 [➙ 143]
Maintenance Feeder Run
3000 h
4467
P16.04 [➙ 143]
Event: Maint.Feeder Run
IG
4468
Number:
Name
Default
P17.01 [➙ 144]
VAP Active
NO
4480
P17.02 [➙ 144]
Platform Dis.Length
0 % LB
4482
17 - VAP Customer
Sys ID
18 - Belt Monitoring Number:
Name
Default
P18.01 [➙ 144]
Belt Sensor Active
NO
4496
P18.02 [➙ 144]
DI: Source Belt Sensor
DI
4497
P18.03 [➙ 144]
BIC Active
NO
4498
P18.04 [➙ 144]
Sensor Length
8.2 cm
4500
P18.05 [➙ 144]
Sensor Width
12 cm
4501
P18.06 [➙ 144]
Sensor Offset
0 cm
4502
P18.07 [➙ 144]
Belt Drift
3 cm
4503
P18.08 [➙ 144]
Event: Belt Drift
W1
4504
P18.09 [➙ 144]
Belt Skew
4 cm
4505
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 77 -
Parameters
P18.10 [➙ 144]
Event: Belt Skew
A
4506
P18.11 [➙ 144]
Slip Value
2 % LB
4507
P18.12 [➙ 144]
Event: Slip
W1
4508
P18.13 [➙ 144]
DO: Belt Drift
n/a
4509
P18.14 [➙ 144]
DO: Belt Skew
n/a
4510
P18.15 [➙ 144]
DO: Belt Slip
n/a
4511
P18.16 [➙ 144]
DI: BIC freeze
n/a
4499
19 - Communication EasyServe Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P19.01 [➙ 148]
Own Address
1
4520
P19.02 [➙ 148]
Baud Rate
38400
4521
P19.03 [➙ 148]
Format Data
8-N-1
6189
20 - Communication Fieldbus Number:
Name
Default
P20.01 [➙ 148]
Protocol Type
NO
4528
P20.02 [➙ 148]
Timeout Host
5s
4529
P20.03 [➙ 148]
Event: Cyclic Communication
A
4530
P20.04 [➙ 148]
Event: Acyclic Communication
A
5680
P20.05 [➙ 148]
Check in Keyboard Mode
YES
6234
P20.06 [➙ 148]
Compatibility DISOCONT Master
NO
6287
P20.07 [➙ 148]
Word Sequence
I:std/L:std
6246
P20.08 [➙ 148]
Byte Sequence
High - Low
6245
P20.09 [➙ 148]
Configuration
FIXED_8_16
4661
P20.10 [➙ 148]
Address
1
4531
P20.11 [➙ 148]
Resolution
4096
4533
P20.12 [➙ 148]
Baud rate
19200
4535
P20.13 [➙ 148]
Data Format
8-O-1
4656
P20.14 [➙ 148]
Physics
RS232
6186
P20.15 [➙ 148]
Address
16
4539
P20.16 [➙ 148]
FLOAT-Format
IEEE
4540
P20.17 [➙ 148]
Address
63
4541
P20.18 [➙ 148]
Baud rate
125K
4542
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 78 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P20.19 [➙ 148]
Parameter
NO
4658
P20.20 [➙ 148]
Preset Count
2
4734
P20.21 [➙ 148]
READ_ID Count
6
4659
P20.22 [➙ 148]
Access Rights Limitation FB
NO
4786
P20.23 [➙ 148]
Remote IP Address FB
192.168.240.250
4787
21 - Fixed mode configuration Number:
Name
Default
P21.01 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 1
320
6247
P21.02 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 2
352
6248
P21.03 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 3
384
6249
P21.04 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 4
592
6250
P21.05 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 5
594
6251
P21.06 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 6
610
6252
P21.07 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 7
0
6253
P21.08 [➙ 153]
ID Preset Value 8
0
6254
P21.09 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 1
752
6256
P21.10 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 2
784
6257
P21.11 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 3
1552
6258
P21.12 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 4
1872
6259
P21.13 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 5
1874
6260
P21.14 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 6
1880
6261
P21.15 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 7
1890
6262
P21.16 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 8
1894
6263
P21.17 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 9
816
6264
P21.18 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 10
1876
6265
P21.19 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 11
1884
6266
P21.20 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 12
1960
6267
P21.21 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 13
1896
6268
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 79 -
Parameters
P21.22 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 14
1898
6269
P21.23 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 15
1902
6270
P21.24 [➙ 153]
ID Read Value 16
1904
6271
Number:
Name
Default
P22.01 [➙ 157]
IP Address
192.168.240.1
6235
P22.02 [➙ 157]
Net Mask
255.255.255.0
6236
P22.03 [➙ 157]
Gateway
0.0.0.0
6237
Number:
Name
Default
P23.01 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 1
n/a
4662
P23.02 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 2
n/a
4663
P23.03 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 3
n/a
4664
P23.04 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 4
n/a
4665
P23.05 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 5
n/a
4666
P23.06 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 6
n/a
4667
P23.07 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 7
n/a
4668
P23.08 [➙ 157]
DO: PLC 8
n/a
4669
P23.09 [➙ 157]
AO: PLC 1
n/a
4670
P23.10 [➙ 157]
AO: PLC 2
n/a
4671
Number:
Name
Default
P24.01 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Mechanics 1
n/a
4760
P24.02 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Mechanics 2
n/a
4761
P24.03 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Mechanics 3
n/a
4762
P24.04 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Mechanics 4
n/a
4763
P24.05 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Mechanics 5
n/a
4764
P24.06 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Electricity 1
n/a
4765
P24.07 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Electricity 2
n/a
4766
P24.08 [➙ 159]
DI: Event Electricity 3
n/a
4767
P24.09 [➙ 159]
DO: Event Mechanics
n/a
4768
P24.10 [➙ 159]
Event: Mechanics
W1
4769
22 - Ethernet Customer
Sys ID
23 - PLC Outputs Customer
Sys ID
24 - Interlocking
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 80 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P24.11 [➙ 159]
DO: Event Electricity
n/a
4770
P24.12 [➙ 159]
Event: Electricity
W1
4771
P24.13 [➙ 159]
DO: Event Mechatronics 1
n/a
4772
P24.14 [➙ 159]
DO: Event Mechatronics 2
n/a
4773
P24.15 [➙ 159]
Event: Mechatronics
W1
4774
P24.16 [➙ 159]
DO: Ready
n/a
4775
P24.17 [➙ 159]
Event: Not Ready
W1
4776
P24.18 [➙ 159]
DO: Ready for Start
n/a
4777
P24.19 [➙ 159]
Event: Not Ready for Start
W1
4778
25 - Belt Load Controller Number:
Name
Default
P25.01 [➙ 162]
Belt Load Controller
NO
4544
P25.02 [➙ 162]
Controller Magnitude Adaption
10 mA
4545
P25.03 [➙ 162]
Blind Distance
5m
4546
P25.04 [➙ 162]
Offset
0 mA
4547
P25.05 [➙ 162]
Lower Limit
0 mA
4548
P25.06 [➙ 162]
Upper Limit
20 mA
4549
P25.07 [➙ 162]
Position at STOP
0
4550
P25.08 [➙ 162]
Store
NO
4551
P25.09 [➙ 162]
Controller Magnitude Prefeeder
n/a
4552
P25.10 [➙ 162]
Pulse Length
1s
4553
P25.11 [➙ 162]
S: P-Component
0.5 s/mA
4687
P25.12 [➙ 162]
S: I-Component
3s
4688
P25.13 [➙ 162]
S: Threshold Response
0%
4689
P25.14 [➙ 162]
S: DO Open Flow Gate
n/a
4702
P25.15 [➙ 162]
S: DO Close Flow Gate
n/a
4703
P25.16 [➙ 162]
QA Setpoint Source
n/a
5509
P25.17 [➙ 162]
QA Setpoint Range
20 mA
5510
P25.18 [➙ 162]
QA Setpoint Offset
0 mA
5511
P25.19 [➙ 162]
QA-Vmin
0%
4554
P25.20 [➙ 162]
QA-Qmin
0%
4555
P25.21 [➙ 162]
QA-Ypuls
0 mA
4556
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 81 -
Parameters
P25.22 [➙ 162]
QA-Ymin
0 mA
4557
P25.23 [➙ 162]
QA Coeffizient Calculation
NO
5503
P25.24 [➙ 162]
Yz Dead Time
0.5 s
5504
P25.25 [➙ 162]
QA Filter Coefficient
5m
5505
P25.26 [➙ 162]
QA v-Adaption
80 %
5507
P25.27 [➙ 162]
QA Upper Limit relative
1000 % Y
4559
P25.28 [➙ 162]
Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge
2m
4558
P25.29 [➙ 162]
QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge
5m
5508
Number:
Name
Default
P26.01 [➙ 170]
Bin Weigher Active
NO
4704
P26.02 [➙ 170]
LC: Load Measurement
n/a
4705
P26.03 [➙ 170]
LC Characteristic Value
2 mV/V
4706
P26.04 [➙ 170]
LC Rated Capacity
1000 kg
4707
P26.05 [➙ 170]
LC Filter
0.25 s
4708
P26.06 [➙ 170]
Bipolar Measurement
NO
4712
P26.07 [➙ 170]
Event: Error LC Input (Bin)
W1
4709
P26.08 [➙ 170]
Event: LC Input > MAX
W1
4710
P26.09 [➙ 170]
Nominal Bin Load
100 % LC
4711
P26.10 [➙ 170]
Display Format
---.--- t
4672
P26.11 [➙ 170]
Display Filter
3s
4713
P26.12 [➙ 170]
Control Level MIN
60 %
4714
P26.13 [➙ 170]
Control Level MAX
70 %
4715
P26.14 [➙ 170]
DO: Bin Filling
n/a
4716
P26.15 [➙ 170]
Bin Level MIN
5%
4717
P26.16 [➙ 170]
Event: Bin Level MIN
W1
4718
P26.17 [➙ 170]
DO: Bin Level MIN
n/a
4719
P26.18 [➙ 170]
Bin Level MAX
120 %
4720
P26.19 [➙ 170]
Event: Bin Level MAX
W1
4721
P26.20 [➙ 170]
DO: Bin Level MAX
n/a
4722
P26.21 [➙ 170]
AO: Bin Load
n/a
4723
P26.22 [➙ 170]
AO: Offset
4 mA
4724
26 - Bin Weigher
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 82 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P26.23 [➙ 170]
AO: Range
20 mA
4725
P26.24 [➙ 170]
Range Correction
1
4726
P26.25 [➙ 170]
Tare (Bin)
0 kg
4727
P26.26 [➙ 170]
Calibration Weight
10 kg
4728
P26.27 [➙ 170]
Controller in OFF-Mode
YES
4755
P26.28 [➙ 170]
DI: Bin Load Sensor
n/a
5401
P26.29 [➙ 170]
Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor
W1
5402
P26.30 [➙ 170]
Bin Level analog Input Offset
4 mA
4825
P26.31 [➙ 170]
Bin Level analog Input Range
20 mA
4826
27 - Bin Level Controller Number:
Name
Default
P27.01 [➙ 178]
Bin Controller ON
NO
4735
P27.02 [➙ 178]
Filling Type
YES
4736
P27.03 [➙ 178]
AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level
n/a
4738
P27.04 [➙ 178]
DO: Feeder ON
n/a
4758
P27.05 [➙ 178]
Setpoint Bin Level
0 kg
4757
P27.06 [➙ 178]
Feeder Constant
0 (kg/h)/mA
4741
P27.07 [➙ 178]
Dead Time TT
3s
4742
P27.08 [➙ 178]
P-Component KP
0 mA/kg
4739
P27.09 [➙ 178]
I-Component TN
0s
4740
P27.10 [➙ 178]
D Portion TV
0s
4747
P27.11 [➙ 178]
D Filter TD
0s
4748
P27.12 [➙ 178]
Bypass
10 mA
4743
P27.13 [➙ 178]
Bypass D Portion
0s
4749
P27.14 [➙ 178]
Controller Magnitude Offset
0 mA
4744
P27.15 [➙ 178]
Lower Limit
0 mA
4745
P27.16 [➙ 178]
Upper Limit
20 mA
4746
P27.17 [➙ 178]
Dead Band Deviation
0 kg
4750
P27.18 [➙ 178]
Dead Band Factor
0
4751
P27.19 [➙ 178]
Setpoint Filter
0.5 s
4752
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 83 -
Parameters
P27.20 [➙ 178]
Flow Rate Filter
0.5 s
4753
P27.21 [➙ 178]
DI: Init. Controller
n/a
4754
P27.22 [➙ 178]
Bin Setpoint source
PARAMETER
5476
28 - 2nd Weighbridge Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P28.01 [➙ 182]
2nd Weighbridge active
NO
4905
P28.02 [➙ 182]
2nd Weighbridge
n/a
4906
P28.03 [➙ 182]
LC Characteristic Value
2 mV/V
4907
P28.04 [➙ 182]
LC Rated Capacity
200 kg
4908
P28.05 [➙ 182]
Effective Platform Length
0.18 m
4909
P28.06 [➙ 182]
LC Filter
0.25 s
4910
P28.07 [➙ 182]
Event: Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) W1
4911
P28.08 [➙ 182]
2nd Bridge MIN
5%
4912
P28.09 [➙ 182]
Event: 2nd Bridge MIN
W2
4913
P28.10 [➙ 182]
DO: 2nd Bridge MIN
n/a
4914
P28.11 [➙ 182]
2nd Bridge MAX
150 %
4915
P28.12 [➙ 182]
Event: 2nd Bridge MAX
W2
4916
P28.13 [➙ 182]
DO: 2nd Bridge MAX
n/a
4917
P28.14 [➙ 182]
Range Correction (2nd Bridge)
1
4918
P28.15 [➙ 182]
Tare (2nd Bridge)
0 kg/m
4919
P28.16 [➙ 182]
Controller active
NO
4920
P28.17 [➙ 182]
P-Component KP
0.5
4921
P28.18 [➙ 182]
I-Component TN
10 s
4922
P28.19 [➙ 182]
Analog Output 2nd Bridge
n/a
5383
P28.20 [➙ 182]
2nd Bridge Offset
4 mA
5384
P28.21 [➙ 182]
2nd Bridge Range
20 mA
5385
P28.22 [➙ 182]
2nd Bridge analog Input Offset
4 mA
5833
P28.23 [➙ 182]
2nd Bridge analog Input Range
20 mA
5836
Number:
Name
Default
P29.01 [➙ 187]
Type of Check System
NO
4861
P29.02 [➙ 187]
Auto Correction
NO
4903
29 - Check System
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 84 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P29.03 [➙ 187]
Cyclic Auto Start
NO
4862
P29.04 [➙ 187]
Cycle Time
0.5 h
4863
P29.05 [➙ 187]
Release Check System
n/a
4864
P29.06 [➙ 187]
Event: No Check Release
W2
4884
P29.07 [➙ 187]
Check Start Span
OP
4865
P29.08 [➙ 187]
Check Start Tare
OP
4866
P29.09 [➙ 187]
Accept Correction
OP
4867
P29.10 [➙ 187]
Finish Check Measurement
OP
4868
P29.11 [➙ 187]
Set: Quantity or Rotations
Quantity
4869
P29.12 [➙ 187]
Check Circuits
0
4870
P29.13 [➙ 187]
Check Quantity
0 kg
4871
P29.14 [➙ 187]
Storage Quantity
500 kg
4872
P29.15 [➙ 187]
Minimum Check Quantity
0 kg
4873
P29.16 [➙ 187]
Event: Minimum Check Quantity
W1
4874
P29.17 [➙ 187]
Minimum Fill Weight
0 kg
4875
P29.18 [➙ 187]
Event: Minimum Fill Weight
W1
4876
P29.19 [➙ 187]
Maximum Fill Weight
1000 kg
4877
P29.20 [➙ 187]
Event: Maximum Fill Weight
W1
4878
P29.21 [➙ 187]
Damping Time
3s
4879
P29.22 [➙ 187]
Blind Distance
0%
4880
P29.23 [➙ 187]
DO: Control Started
n/a
4881
P29.24 [➙ 187]
Feeder Stopped
n/a
4882
P29.25 [➙ 187]
Event: Feeder Not Stopped
W1
4883
P29.26 [➙ 187]
Event: Prepare Check Measurement
W2
4885
P29.27 [➙ 187]
DO: Check Measurement Active
n/a
4887
P29.28 [➙ 187]
Event: Expect Acceptance
W2
4888
P29.29 [➙ 187]
DO:Expect Acceptance
n/a
4889
P29.30 [➙ 187]
Absolute Range
10 %
4890
P29.31 [➙ 187]
Relative Range
3%
4891
P29.32 [➙ 187]
Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
W1
4892
P29.33 [➙ 187]
Event: Relative Tare Correction Error
W1
4893
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 85 -
Parameters
P29.34 [➙ 187]
Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
W1
4894
P29.35 [➙ 187]
Event: Relative Span Correction Error
W1
4895
P29.36 [➙ 187]
Correction Evaluation
1
4896
P29.37 [➙ 187]
Correction Speed
0s
4897
P29.38 [➙ 187]
AO: Check Measurement Result
n/a
4898
P29.39 [➙ 187]
DO: Check Gate
n/a
4899
P29.40 [➙ 187]
Check Gate Feedback
n/a
4900
P29.41 [➙ 187]
Check Gate Time
0s
4901
P29.42 [➙ 187]
Event: Check Gate Error
W1
4902
P29.43 [➙ 187]
Limit Max. Bin Error
0%
4946
P29.44 [➙ 187]
Event: Bin Error
W1
4947
P29.45 [➙ 187]
DO: Correction Error
n/a
4904
Number:
Name
Default
P30.01 [➙ 200]
Moisture Active
NO
5386
P30.02 [➙ 200]
Moisture Select
n/a
5399
P30.03 [➙ 200]
AI: Moisture Measurement
n/a
5387
P30.04 [➙ 200]
Nominal Moisture
20 %
5388
P30.05 [➙ 200]
Moisture Offset
4 mA
5389
P30.06 [➙ 200]
Moisture Range
20 mA
5390
P30.07 [➙ 200]
DO: Moisture active
n/a
5400
P30.08 [➙ 200]
Moisture MAX
10 %
5391
P30.09 [➙ 200]
DO: Moisture MAX
n/a
5392
P30.10 [➙ 200]
Event: Moisture MAX
W1
5393
P30.11 [➙ 200]
AO: Flow Rate corrected
n/a
5394
P30.12 [➙ 200]
AO: Flow Rate Offset
4 mA
5395
P30.13 [➙ 200]
AO: Flow Rate Range
20 mA
5396
P30.14 [➙ 200]
Pulse Counter corrected
NO
5397
Number:
Name
Default
P31.01 [➙ 203]
Dead Time Active
NO
5403
P31.02 [➙ 203]
Dead Time
0s
5404
30 - Moisture Customer
Sys ID
31 - Dead Time
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 86 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P31.03 [➙ 203]
Setpoint Select
n/a
5405
P31.04 [➙ 203]
Setpoint Clock ON
n/a
5406
P31.05 [➙ 203]
ON/OFF Select
n/a
5407
P31.06 [➙ 203]
ON/OFF Clock ON
n/a
5408
P31.07 [➙ 203]
Time Elements Preassign
n/a
5409
P31.08 [➙ 203]
Initialise Time Elements
n/a
5410
P31.09 [➙ 203]
DO: Dead Time Active
n/a
5411
P31.10 [➙ 203]
DO: Setpoint Active
n/a
5412
P31.11 [➙ 203]
DO: ON/OFF Active
n/a
5413
Number:
Name
Default
P32.01 [➙ 205]
Linearization ON *
NO
4577
P32.02 [➙ 205]
Linearization S1 *
25 % Q
4681
P32.03 [➙ 205]
Linearization I1 *
25 % Q
4579
P32.04 [➙ 205]
Linearization S2 *
50 % Q
4682
P32.05 [➙ 205]
Linearization I2 *
50 % Q
4581
P32.06 [➙ 205]
Linearization S3 *
75 % Q
4683
P32.07 [➙ 205]
Linearization I3 *
75 % Q
4583
P32.08 [➙ 205]
Linearization S4 *
100 % Q
4684
P32.09 [➙ 205]
Linearization I4 *
100 % Q
4585
P32.10 [➙ 205]
Event: Linearization Error *
W2
4586
Number:
Name
Default
P33.01 [➙ 207]
AI: Position Flow Gate
n/a
4691
P33.02 [➙ 207]
AI: Offset
4 mA
4692
P33.03 [➙ 207]
AI: Range
20 mA
4693
P33.04 [➙ 207]
AO: Position Flow Gate
n/a
4694
P33.05 [➙ 207]
AO: Offset
4 mA
4695
P33.06 [➙ 207]
AO: Range
20 mA
4696
P33.07 [➙ 207]
Event: MIN Flow Gate
W2
4697
32 - Linearization Customer
Sys ID
33 - Flow Gate
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 87 -
Parameters
P33.08 [➙ 207]
Position MIN Flow Gate
n/a
4698
P33.09 [➙ 207]
Event: MAX Flow Gate
W2
4699
P33.10 [➙ 207]
Position MAX Flow Gate
n/a
4700
Number:
Name
Default
P34.01 [➙ 208]
2-Sensor Slip active
NO
5433
P34.02 [➙ 208]
Source Sensor 1
Speed
5434
P34.03 [➙ 208]
DI: Sensor 1
n/a
5435
P34.04 [➙ 208]
Characteristic Value Sensor 1
100 I/m
5436
P34.05 [➙ 208]
DI: Sensor 2
n/a
5437
P34.06 [➙ 208]
Characteristic Value Sensor 2
100 I/m
5438
P34.07 [➙ 208]
Slip Value 2
2 % LB
5439
P34.08 [➙ 208]
Event: Slip 2
W1
5440
P34.09 [➙ 208]
DO: Slip 2
n/a
5443
34 - 2-Sensor Slip Customer
Sys ID
35 - Pressure Compensation Number:
Name
Default
P35.01 [➙ 210]
Compensation Active
NO
5479
P35.02 [➙ 210]
Compensation Source
n/a
5480
P35.03 [➙ 210]
Pressure Characteristic Value
2 mV/V
5481
P35.04 [➙ 210]
Pressure Rated Cap.
0.5 Bar
5482
P35.05 [➙ 210]
Filter Pressure Value DMS
0.25 s
5483
P35.06 [➙ 210]
Event: DMS-Input
A
5484
P35.07 [➙ 210]
Event: DMS-Input > MAX
A
5485
P35.08 [➙ 210]
Event: DMS-Input < MIN
W1
5486
P35.09 [➙ 210]
Zero
0 Bar
5487
P35.10 [➙ 210]
Norming
0 kg/Bar
5488
P35.11 [➙ 210]
Pressure-MIN
0%
5489
P35.12 [➙ 210]
Event: Pressure-MIN
W2
5490
P35.13 [➙ 210]
DO: Pressure-MIN
n/a
5491
P35.14 [➙ 210]
Pressure-MAX
105 %
5492
P35.15 [➙ 210]
Event: Pressure-MAX
W2
5493
P35.16 [➙ 210]
DO: Pressure-MAX
n/a
5494
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 88 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P35.17 [➙ 210]
DI: Switch On Compensation
n/a
5495
P35.18 [➙ 210]
Compensation analog Input Offset 4 mA
5583
P35.19 [➙ 210]
Compensation analog Input Range
5584
20 mA
36 - FCB analog outputs Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P36.01 [➙ 214]
FCB_AO 01
n/a
P36.02 [➙ 214]
Offset FCB_AO 1
4 mA
6272
P36.03 [➙ 214]
Range FCB_AO 1
20 mA
6273
P36.04 [➙ 214]
Reference FCB_AO 1
1000
6274
P36.05 [➙ 214]
FCB_AO 02
n/a
P36.06 [➙ 214]
Offset FCB_AO 2
4 mA
6275
P36.07 [➙ 214]
Range FCB_AO 2
20 mA
6276
P36.08 [➙ 214]
Reference FCB_AO 2
1000
6277
P36.09 [➙ 214]
FCB_AO 03
n/a
P36.10 [➙ 214]
Offset FCB_AO 3
4 mA
6278
P36.11 [➙ 214]
Range FCB_AO 3
20 mA
6279
P36.12 [➙ 214]
Reference FCB_AO 3
10000
6280
P36.13 [➙ 214]
FCB_AO 04
n/a
P36.14 [➙ 214]
Offset FCB_AO 4
4 mA
6281
P36.15 [➙ 214]
Range FCB_AO 4
20 mA
6282
P36.16 [➙ 214]
Reference FCB_AO 4
1000
6283
P36.17 [➙ 214]
FCB_AO 05
n/a
P36.18 [➙ 214]
Offset FCB_AO 5
4 mA
6284
P36.19 [➙ 214]
Range FCB_AO 5
20 mA
6285
P36.20 [➙ 214]
Reference FCB_AO 5
1000
6286
P36.21 [➙ 214]
FCB Variant
Empty
5902
P36.22 [➙ 214]
Event: FCB-Error
A
5903
20481
20482
20483
20484
20485
37 - FCB digital outputs Number:
Name
Default
P37.01 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 01
n/a
20529
P37.02 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 02
n/a
20530
P37.03 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 03
n/a
20531
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 89 -
Parameters
P37.04 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 04
n/a
20532
P37.05 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 05
n/a
20533
P37.06 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 06
n/a
20534
P37.07 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 07
n/a
20535
P37.08 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 08
n/a
20536
P37.09 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 09
n/a
20537
P37.10 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 10
n/a
20538
P37.11 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 11
n/a
20539
P37.12 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 12
n/a
20540
P37.13 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 13
n/a
20541
P37.14 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 14
n/a
20542
P37.15 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 15
n/a
20543
P37.16 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 16
n/a
20544
P37.17 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 17
n/a
20545
P37.18 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 18
n/a
20546
P37.19 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 19
n/a
20547
P37.20 [➙ 218]
FCB_DO 20
n/a
20548
Number:
Name
Default
P38.01 [➙ 221]
Hourly Total Time
0 min
5743
P38.02 [➙ 221]
Daily Total Time
0 min
5744
P38.03 [➙ 221]
Logger cycle time
1 min
6288
P38.04 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 1
752
6289
P38.05 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 2
755
6290
P38.06 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 3
1894
6291
P38.07 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 4
1872
6292
P38.08 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 5
1904
6293
P38.09 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 6
1880
6294
P38.10 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 7
1874
6295
38 - Data Logging
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 90 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P38.11 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 8
1890
6296
P38.12 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 9
0
6297
P38.13 [➙ 221]
Data Log Value 10
0
6298
39 - Configuration HMI Values Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P39.01 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 01
1996
6299
P39.02 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 02
1944
6300
P39.03 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 03
1942
6301
P39.04 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 04
1960
6302
P39.05 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 05
1904
6303
P39.06 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 06
1952
6304
P39.07 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 07
1950
6305
P39.08 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 08
2158
6306
P39.09 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 09
0
6307
P39.10 [➙ 223]
HMI Value 10
0
6308
40 - Local Mode (Speed) Number:
Name
Default
P40.01 [➙ 225]
Motor Select (Block 1)
VMO1 Motor1
5841
P40.02 [➙ 225]
ON in Remote (Block 1)
n/a
5842
P40.03 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude (Block 1)
n/a
5843
P40.04 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1)
0 mA
5897
P40.05 [➙ 225]
JOG enable (Block 1)
NO
5844
P40.06 [➙ 225]
Release local Start (Block 1)
n/a
5845
P40.07 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 1 (Block 1)
n/a
5846
P40.08 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 2 (Block 1)
n/a
5847
P40.09 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 3 (Block 1)
n/a
5848
P40.10 [➙ 225]
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)
n/a
5849
P40.11 [➙ 225]
Motor Select (Block 2)
VMO1 Motor2
5850
P40.12 [➙ 225]
ON in Remote (Block 2)
n/a
5851
P40.13 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude (Block 2)
n/a
5852
P40.14 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 2)
0 mA
5898
P40.15 [➙ 225]
JOG enable (Block 2)
NO
5853
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 91 -
Parameters
P40.16 [➙ 225]
Release local Start (Block 2)
n/a
5854
P40.17 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 1 (Block 2)
n/a
5855
P40.18 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 2 (Block 2)
n/a
5856
P40.19 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 3 (Block 2)
n/a
5857
P40.20 [➙ 225]
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 2)
n/a
5858
P40.21 [➙ 225]
Motor Select (Block 3)
not active
5859
P40.22 [➙ 225]
ON in Remote (Block 3)
n/a
5860
P40.23 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude (Block 3)
n/a
5861
P40.24 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 3)
0 mA
5899
P40.25 [➙ 225]
JOG enable (Block 3)
NO
5862
P40.26 [➙ 225]
Release local Start (Block 3)
n/a
5863
P40.27 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 1 (Block 3)
n/a
5864
P40.28 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 2 (Block 3)
n/a
5865
P40.29 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 3 (Block 3)
n/a
5866
P40.30 [➙ 225]
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 3)
n/a
5867
P40.31 [➙ 225]
Motor Select (Block 4)
not active
5868
P40.32 [➙ 225]
ON in Remote (Block 4)
n/a
5869
P40.33 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude (Block 4)
n/a
5870
P40.34 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 4)
0 mA
5900
P40.35 [➙ 225]
JOG enable (Block 4)
NO
5871
P40.36 [➙ 225]
Release local Start (Block 4)
n/a
5872
P40.37 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 1 (Block 4)
n/a
5873
P40.38 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 2 (Block 4)
n/a
5874
P40.39 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 3 (Block 4)
n/a
5875
P40.40 [➙ 225]
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 4)
n/a
5876
P40.41 [➙ 225]
Motor Select (Block 5)
not active
5877
P40.42 [➙ 225]
ON in Remote (Block 5)
n/a
5878
P40.43 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude (Block 5)
n/a
5879
P40.44 [➙ 225]
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 5)
0 mA
5901
P40.45 [➙ 225]
JOG enable (Block 5)
NO
5880
P40.46 [➙ 225]
Release local Start (Block 5)
n/a
5881
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 92 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P40.47 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 1 (Block 5)
n/a
5882
P40.48 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 2 (Block 5)
n/a
5883
P40.49 [➙ 225]
DI: External Error 3 (Block 5)
n/a
5884
P40.50 [➙ 225]
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 5)
n/a
5885
41 - Local Mode (Gate) Number:
Name
Default
P41.01 [➙ 234]
Motor Select
VMO1 Motor5
5886
P41.02 [➙ 234]
OPEN in Remote
n/a
5887
P41.03 [➙ 234]
DI: Limit Switch OPEN
n/a
5888
P41.04 [➙ 234]
CLOSE in Remote
n/a
5889
P41.05 [➙ 234]
DI: Limit Switch CLOSE
n/a
5890
P41.06 [➙ 234]
Release local Start
n/a
5891
P41.07 [➙ 234]
DI: External Error 1
n/a
5892
P41.08 [➙ 234]
DI: External Error 2
n/a
5893
P41.09 [➙ 234]
DI: External Error 3
n/a
5894
7.4.2
Customer
Sys ID
Parameter Details
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules A DISOCONT Tersus system can comprise up to a maximum of 3 VCU control units, several VHM (OP) operating panels and up to 2 motor controllers (VMO). A PC running the EasyServe program can be connected for service purposes. With the exception of EasyServe and the operating elements (VHM, OP) all of the units involved must be signed on with the parameters in group P01.xx. Units that are not signed on cannot be used and their inputs and outputs will not be made available by either EasyServe or the operating elements. Furthermore, up to 2 analog input or output components (VAI or VAO) can be installed. Caution: For reasons of safety, it is imperative that the relevant communication error messages should register an alarm (A) when originating from units that are actively involved in the control loop. P01.01
Analog Channel A10
Alternative:
NO AI1 (Analog In 1) AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Default: NO
Defines the analog channel set at position A10 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is labeled to ease identification. AIx: analog input VAI installed AOx: analog output installed x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 93 -
Parameters
P01.02
Analog Channel A11
Alternative:
NO AI2 (Analog In 2) AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Default: NO
Defines the analog channel set at position A11 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is labeled to ease identification. AIx: analog input VAI installed AOx: analog output installed x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.03
VCU20100-Unit 2
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 2 and VIO software.
P01.04
VCU2: Analog Channel A10
Alternative:
NO AI1 (Analog In 1) AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Default: NO
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A10 on the main VCU. The position is labeled to ease identification. AIx: analog input VAI installed AOx: analog output installed x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.05
VCU2: Analog Channel A11
Alternative:
NO AI2 (Analog In 2) AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Default: NO
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A11 on the main VCU. The position is labeled to ease identification. AIx: analog input VAI installed AOx: analog output installed x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.06
Event: Communication VCU20100Unit 2
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 02
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should be checked if an error occurs.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 94 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P01.07
VCU20100-Unit 3
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 3 and VIO software.
P01.08
VCU3: Analog Channel A10
Alternative:
NO AI1 (Analog In 1) AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Default: NO
Defines the analog channel applied to position A10 on the VCU with local address 3. The position is labeled to ease identification. AIx: analog input VAI installed AOx: analog output VAO installed x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.09
VCU3: Analog Channel A11
Alternative:
NO AI2 (Analog In 2) AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Default: NO
Defines the analog channel applied to position A11 on the VCU with local address 3. The position is labeled to ease identification. AIx: analog input VAI installed AOx: analog output VAO installed x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.10
Event: Communication VCU20100Unit 3
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 03
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should be checked if an error occurs.
P01.11 Min: 1
VHM RS485 Address
Default: 1
Max: 16
The parameter defines the address under which the VHM operating element can reach the scale via RS485 coupling.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 95 -
Parameters
P01.12
VMO20100-Unit 1
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
The first unit VMO 201xx is connected to the local bus. The address 11 must be set by parameter for this unit.
P01.13
Event: Communication VMO20100Unit 1
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 15
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.
P01.14
VMO20100-Unit 2
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Second VMO 201xx unit is connected to the local bus. The address 12 must be set by parameter for this unit.
P01.15
Event: Communication VMO20100Unit 2
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 16
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour The parameters of this group define system behavior towards the operator and set access authorization. P02.01
Language
Alternative:
DEUTSCH ENGLISH OTHER
Default: DEUTSCH
Device dialog language. User-defined texts can be used if OTHER is selected. Texts can be written and loaded using EasyServe.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 96 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P02.02
Units
Alternative:
Metric English
Default: Metric
Switches display and parameter entry units from metric (SI units) to non-metric systems (English). All values entered will be converted automatically.
P02.03
Scale Name
Default: DISOCONT Tersus VWF
Letters and characters can be used. The name appears in the upper row of the operating console and when searching through networks for controllers. Remark: The characters ";" and "=" are not accepted. During the saving procedure these characters will automatically be deleted.
P02.04
Access Rights Limitation HMI
Alternative:
NO REMOTE IP
Default: NO
The rights for controlling the scales from the operating console VHM or the user interface of a browser (HMI) connected via Ethernet can be restricted. The restricted rights apply to the start and stop commands and the setpoint entry. Alternatives: NO: control commands are permitted from all operating locations REMOTE IP: control commands are possible only from the operating console with the IP address listed in the following parameters. Also refer to: P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1 ... P02.10 Event: Communication HMI 3
P02.05
Remote IP Address HMI 1
Default: 192.168.240.21
Address of the first operating panel from which control commands should be given. The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via RS485. Also refer to: P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 97 -
Parameters
P02.06
Event: Communication HMI 1
Event Group: SY
Default: IG
Number: 04
Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel. Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s. To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
P02.07
Remote IP Address HMI 2
Default: 192.168.240.21
Address of the second operating panel from which control commands are to be given. The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via RS485. Also refer to: P02.08 Event: Communication HMI 2
P02.08
Event: Communication HMI 2
Event Group: SY
Default: IG
Number: 05
Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console. Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s. To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
P02.09
Remote IP Address HMI 3
Default: 127.0.0.1
The address of the third operating panels that control commands are supposed to be given from. The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via RS485. Also refer to: P02.10 Event: Communication HMI 3
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 98 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P02.10
Event: Communication HMI 3
Event Group: SY
Default: IG
Number: 06
Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel. Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s. To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
P02.11
Event: Communication VHM serial
Event Group: SY
Default: IG
Number: 07
This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operating panel is interrupted. Causes of this event: Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period Steps: - check cable connection - check that operating console is correctly functioning - check the operating console settings - check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
P02.12 Min: 1000
Password
Default: 10000
Max: 9999
Password 1 for access protection of certain functions on the operator panel as per the following parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the 2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password keyed in is shown encoded for protection. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be forgotten. The password set at the factory: 7353
P02.13 Min: 1000
2. Password
Default: 14389
Max: 9999
Password 2 for access protection for certain functions on the operator panel as per the following parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the 2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password entered is shown encoded on the screen. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be forgotten. The password set at the factory: 2889
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 99 -
Parameters
P02.14
Reset Counter 1
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: active
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.15
Reset Counter 2
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: active
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.16
Batch control
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: active
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.17
Switch Grav./Vol. command
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: active
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.18
Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: active
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.19
Filling control bin weigher
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: active
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 100 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P02.20
Data Log ON/OFF
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: Password
Enables functions Start Data Logging , Stop Data Logging and Clear Data Log File. Parameters see block Data Logging.
P02.21
Exit Scale
Alternative:
active not active Password 2.Password
Default: active
Defines the access protection for the function at the operator panel.
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition The parameters of this group configure basic functionality. P03.01 Min: 0 kg/h
Nominal Flow Rate
Default: 10000 kg/h
Max: 220000000 kg/h
The nominal feed rate is a characteristic value of the scale that acts as a reference value for threshold values and service displays.
P03.02 Min: 0.001 m/s
Nominal Speed
Default: 0.1 m/s
Max: 50 m/s
The rated speed is the reference value for threshold value monitoring that defines nominal belt loading together with the nominal flow rate. This value should be precise to a couple of percent.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 101 -
Parameters
P03.03
Flow Rate Units
Alternative:
------ kg/h ----.- kg/h ---.-- kg/h --.--- kg/h ------ t/h ----.- t/h ---.-- t/h --.--- t/h ------ kg/s ----.- kg/s ---.-- kg/s --.--- kg/s ----- kg/min -----.- kg/min ----.-- kg/min ---.--- kg/min
Default: ------ kg/h
Display format for setpoint and actual feed rate values.
P03.04
Counter 1 Unit
Alternative:
------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t
Default: ------- kg
Display format for counter 1.
P03.05 Min: 0 s
Pulse Length Total
Default: 0.05 s
Max: 10 s
Duration of an external totalizing counter output pulses. The weighting of a pulse (WI) is defined by P03.09 Totalizer Increment. If the pulses duration is shorter than 10 ms the impulse output is disabled. All impulses not issued yet are cleared. The output frequency f is approximately Nominal Flow Rate: f [Hz] = P03.01 / 3600 * P03.09 The output frequency must be
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 102 -
≤
10 Hz if an external counter is connected.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P03.06
Counter 2 Unit
Alternative:
------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t
Default: ----.-- t
Display format for counter 2
P03.07
Counter 3 Unit
Alternative:
------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t
Default: -----.- t
Display format for counter 3.
P03.08
DO: Pulse Counter
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
DO: Selecting the physical output for triggering an external pulse counter for the measured quantity. Bear in mind the limitations on speed and life cycle when selecting a relay output and set the weight equivalent for an pulses in P03.09 Totalizer Increment. The duration of the pulses is set by P03.05 Pulse Length Total.
P03.09 Min: 0 kg
Totalizer Increment
Default: 0 kg
Max: 100000 kg
Weight equivalent of an impulse at the output for the external counter as per P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter. The DO: Pulse Counter is blocked when setting the valence 0.
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources The parameters of this group assign internal signals to the physical outputs.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 103 -
Parameters
P04.01
Feeder Start
Alternative:
FB OP DI
Default: FB
Specifies the device that will turn on the scales. The digital input is flank-controlled, i.e., the ON signal must be removed and then reapplied if the scale becomes inoperative because of something like an alarm.
P04.02
Feedrate Setpoint
Alternative:
FB OP AI
Default: FB
Determines which signal input gives the feed rate setpoint. If analog input is selected: refer to norming the input P11.17 Setpoint Offset P11.18 Setpoint Range
P04.03
Source Run Enable
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
Determines the signal input that gives the scales release signal. This input is generally used for interlocking with downstream transport equipment. The setting 'n/a' means that no release is required.
P04.04
Event: Run Disabled
Event Group: IL
Default: W2
Number: 01
No release signal from the source determined by P04.03 Source Run Enable. If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched on.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 104 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P04.05
Source Relative Setpoint
Alternative:
n/a OP AI
Default: n/a
A preset feed rate setpoint (compare P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint) can be percentaged by the VHM operating console or by an analog input. This function is used if the system is to feed a percentage of an additional material to the original component. For example: P04.02 = AI P04.05 = OP The effective setpoint is the percentage component, entered into the operating console, of the absolute setpoint set through the analog input. If the setpoint is given as per P04.02 by the operating console (P04.02 = OP) or the scales are in keyboard mode P04.05 will have no effect, i.e. the setpoint entered at the operating console works as entered.
P04.06 Min: 0 mA
Relativer Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Effective only when P04.05 Source Relative Setpoint = AI. Current at the analog input for entry 100%.
P04.07
Relative Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Effective only when P04.05 Source Relative Setpoint = AI. Current at the analog input for an input of 0%.
P04.08
Difference Flow Rate
Alternative:
n/a FB AI
Default: n/a
Definition of the input channel for a signal that should be subtracted from the measured flow rate. This function is used when the weigh belt records a material quantity that is both well-known and still to be measured. Dependant upon P04.11 Difference Function, further signal processing uses the difference from the actually measured flow rate and the already known flow rate, meaning the still unknown flow rate. Therefore, the totalizing counters only add together the additional quantity of bulk solids. The flow rate regulator might receive the additional quantity of bulk solids as the actual input quantity so that it can be controlled through the prefeeder.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 105 -
Parameters
P04.09 Min: 0 mA
Difference Flow Rate Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Effective only when P04.08 Difference Flow Rate = AI. Current at the analog input for 100 % entry of the nominal feed rate in P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
P04.10
Difference Flow Rate Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Effective only when P04.08 Difference Flow Rate = AI. Current at the analog input for an input of 0 %.
P04.11
Difference Function
Alternative:
NO Control Display Control + Display
Effective only when P04.08 Difference Flow Rate
Default: NO
≠
n/a.
Definition of the effect of the actual differential flow rate: NO: The input signal for the actual differential flow rate does not have any effect. Control: The actual flow rate fed to the flow rate regulator = the measured flow rate − the actual differential flow rate. Display: The flow rate display = the measured flow rate − the actual differential flow rate. Control + display: Both the display and the flow rate regulator use the measured flow rate − the actual differential flow rate.
Also refer to: P04.08 Difference Flow Rate
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics. P05.01 Min: 1 I/m
Pulses per length
Default: 10000 I/m
Max: 1000000 I/m
The number of impulses from the speed transmitter per meter of belt length. This parameter is essential to scale accuracy. Note: If there is no active tachometer, you should not change the parameter because this would change the running period of the calibration programs.
P05.02
LC Characteristic Value
Min: 0.01 mV/V
Default: 2 mV/V
Max: 10 mV/V
Characteristic value (transmission factor) of the (main) load cell.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 106 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P05.03 Min: 0.5 kg
LC Rated Capacity
Default: 60 kg
Max: 220000000 kg
The total of the load cell rated loads for recording the weight.
P05.04 Min: 0.1 m
Effective Platform Length
Default: 0.5 m
Max: 50 m
Effective (active) length of the weighing platform. In systems with a weighing roller that rotates in the direction of belt travel, the active length is half of the distance between the non-weighing rollers on either side of the weighing roller.
P05.05 Min: 0.01
Lever Ratio
Default: 1
Max: 2
Lever transmission between the force application at the weighing section and the force on the load cell. For scales that use levers for the application of force to the load cell, this sets the ratio between the weight and the force acting on the load cell.
P05.06 Min: 0 Grad
Angle
Default: 0 Grad
Max: 60 Grad
The inclination of the longitudinal axis to the horizontal axis of the scales with the load cell installed vertical to the belt.
P05.07
Speed Measurement
Alternative:
DI n/a
Default: DI VCU1.DI6 High
Definition of the channel for reading in the signals of the frequency tachometer on the belt drive
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 107 -
Parameters
P05.08
Source Load Cell
Alternative:
LC AI FB n/a
Default: LC VCU1.LC1
The definition of the (main) load cell input for recording the load on the belt.. We recommend choosing an input on VCU1. The signals from up to two measuring points can be logged separately for extended diagnostic (compare P05.09 Source Load Cell 2). Also refer to: P05.02 P05.03 If AI is selected, refer also to: P05.10toP05.11
P05.09
Source Load Cell 2
Alternative:
n/a LC AI FB
Default: n/a
The definition of the 2nd load cell input for recording the belt load. We recommend choosing an input on VCU1. The total load is calculated from the total of the signals from the main and 2nd load cell. The fact that both weights are recorded separately allows diagnostics of the weight calculation. Also refer to P05.08 Source Load Cell Note: Both load cells must have the same rated load and sensitivity!
P05.10
Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Only relevant if P05.08 Source Load Cell = AI. The input flow for an internal value of the load of 0 %. Also refer to: The appendix chapter in the manual → Using alternative signals (such as analog and fieldbus) for DMS inputs P05.08 Source Load Cell P05.11 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 108 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P05.11
Load Cell 1 analog Input Range
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Only relevant if P05.08 Source Load Cell = AI. The flow for the value set in P05.03 LC Rated Capacity. Also refer to: 'Appendix' chapter in the manual → Using alternative signals (such as analog and fieldbus) for DMS inputs' P05.08 Source Load Cell
P05.12
Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
P05.13
Load Cell 2 analog Input Range
Min: 0 mA
Default: 4 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control The parameters of this group describe the control functions of the basic functionality. P06.01 Min: 0 s
Afterflow Totalizer
Default: 3 s
Max: 2000 s
For this time after shutting off, the scale continues to record the resulting quantity conveyed through the afterflow of bulk solids when the drives run out.
P06.02
Zero Drop-Out Active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
The zero drop out function sets the display of the flow rate to zero when the load drops below the threshold value in P06.02 Zero Drop-Out Active. This prevents the totalizing counter from running on if measuring continues for a longer period while no bulk material flows. This suppresses small, unavoidable tare errors. YES: activate the Zero Drop Out system. NO: Zero Drop Out has no effect. The small operating range is displayed at the measured value.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 109 -
Parameters
P06.03 Min: 0 % Q
Zero Drop-Out Limit
Default: 1 % Q
Max: 10 % Q
Recording the total is suppressed with measurements within this limit around the zero point to ensure that the counter remains constant when the belt is idle. No feature appears on the display. Reference: Nominal Belt Load (service value)
P06.04
Start-Up Mode
Alternative:
Q MIN Circuits FAST
Default: Circuits
The mode for volumetric start-up operation without bulk solids on the belt: Q-MIN: Start-up mode is finished when the load has exceeded the threshold value P09.05 Limit: Load MIN, however no later than after any belt progress defined by P11.15 Volumetric Start-Up. Circuits: Start-up mode continues until the belt has run the portion defined by P11.15 Volumetric Start-Up on the complete belt circuit (belt progress). FAST: In this mode, the drive is operated at rated speed until at least one of the following conditions is met: a) load > P09.05 Limit: Load MIN b) belt progress > P11.15 Volumetric Start-Up c) measured flow rate > flow rate setpoint Once start-up mode has been completed, feeding switches to gravimetric operation if volumetric mode has not been explicitly selected.
P06.05
DO: CleanOut Timer
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The cleaning equipment below the weighfeeder, often a simple scraper, can be controlled. Generally, continuous operation is not necessary for this equipment so that it only has to be switched on briefly. The operation of this equipment can be monitored. This parameter defines the output channel for the trigger signal for the cleaning equipment. Also refer to: P06.06 CleanOut ON Time P06.07 CleanOut OFF Time P06.08 DI: Chain Motion Monitor
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 110 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P06.06
CleanOut ON Time
Min: 0.01 h
Default: 0.25 h
Max: 1000 h
The duration of switching on cleaning equipment with clocked operation. Also refer to: P06.05 DO: CleanOut Timer P06.07 CleanOut OFF Time
P06.07 Min: 0 h
CleanOut OFF Time
Default: 6 h
Max: 1001 h
A pause between each time the cleaning equipment is switched on with clocked operation. Also refer to: P06.05 DO: CleanOut Timer P06.06 CleanOut ON Time
P06.08
DI: Chain Motion Monitor
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The input channel for the signal for monitoring the running of the cleaning equipment. A pulse generator is mounted for monitoring on the drive or a roller that is driven by the scraper. As long as the cleaning equipment is switched on, it monitors whether a feedback impulse has arrived within the tolerance period. Also refer to: P06.05 DO: CleanOut Timer P06.09 Chain Motion Delay P06.10 Event: Chain Motion Monitor
P06.09 Min: 1 s
Chain Motion Delay
Default: 20 s
Max: 1000 s
The tolerance period within which an impulse is expected from the cleaning drive monitor. Also refer to: P06.08 DI: Chain Motion Monitor P06.10 Event: Chain Motion Monitor
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 111 -
Parameters
P06.10
Event: Chain Motion Monitor
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 06
This event is identified when the cleaning equipment was switched on below the feeder scale, although there are not any feedback impulses over a time longer than the tolerance period. Possible cause: - the cleaning equipment is blocked - the supply voltage is lacking for the equipment - there is a defect on the impulse sensor Steps to be taken: Check the cleaning equipment mechanically and electrically
P06.11
Auto Zero Active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Preselection of the automatic zeroing system that corrects the zero point after each belt circuit with an empty belt. The conditions for identifying that the belt is empty: P06.14 Limit Value Difference P06.15 Mean Limit Value Also refer to: P06.12 Zeroing Limit P06.13 Event: Tare Correction
P06.12 Min: 0 % Q
Zeroing Limit
Default: 5 % Q
Max: 100 % Q
Only relevant if P06.11 Auto Zero Active = YES The maximum permissible amount of the sum of all zeroing operations of automatic zeroing. Reference: nominal load (service value) Also refer to: P06.13 Event: Tare Correction
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 112 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P06.13
Event: Tare Correction
Event Group: CA
Default: W1
Number: 06
This event is identified if the change in tare identified by the automatic zeroing system exceeds the threshold value in P06.12 Zeroing Limit. Possible causes: - low quantities of bulk material on the belt - error in the weighing mechanics Actions: - visual inspection of the belt and the weighing system. - run the base tare adjustment program - check weight measuring using test weights
P06.14 Min: 0 % Q
Limit Value Difference
Default: 0.5 % Q
Max: 10 % Q
First precondition for the automatic zeroing system. Defines the uniformity of the mean belt load between two successive belt circuits. The belt is only assumed to be empty once the weight deviation is lower than this threshold value across two circuits. Reference value: nominal belt loading (service value) Also refer to: P06.11 Auto Zero Active P06.15 Mean Limit Value
P06.15 Min: 0 % Q
Mean Limit Value
Default: 1 % Q
Max: 10 % Q
Second precondition for the automatic zeroing system. This defines the max. permissible mean of belt loading value over two consecutive belt circuits where it is assumed that the belt is empty. Reference: Nominal belt load (service value) Also refer to: P06.11 Auto Zero Active P06.14 Limit Value Difference
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 113 -
Parameters
P06.16
Volum on LC failure
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
This parameter defines whether feeding is supposed to switch into volumetric operation if their is a defect in the main weighing channels. YES: Feeding functions volumetrically if there is a load cell defect NO: Feeding continues to function gravimetrically (and possibly with an incorrect actual feed rate) if there is a load cell defect. This is only relevant if two weighing channels are used for recording the belt load at the main weighbridge. Also refer to: P05.07 Speed Measurement P05.09 Source Load Cell 2
P06.17
Event: Volum. caused by LC-error
Event Group: CO
Default: IG
Number: 05
This event is identified when the scale has switched to volumetric operation because of a defect in measured value acquisition. This defect is only identified when two weighing channels are used for main measured value acquisition and the measured values of both channels depart from one another by more than 13 %. Possible causes: - blocked material in the weighing range - non-symmetrical belt loading Only relevant if P06.16 Volum on LC failure = YES
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm (A) and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2). P07.01
Event: Stand-By
Event Group: SC
Default: W2
Number: 02
Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed outwards. This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling. Actions: Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 114 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P07.02 Min: 0 % Io
Stand-By Limit Value
Default: 2 % Io
Max: 100 % Io
If the controller magnitude is below the threshold value, the feed drive switched off to protect the motor from overheating. Also refer to: P07.01 Event: Stand-By
P07.03
Event: Tachometer Input
Event Group: CA
Default: A
Number: 02
The signals at the feeder drive's impulse speedometer input are outside of the specified range. Possible causes: - there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wiring) - the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
P07.04
Event: Error LC Input
Event Group: CA
Default: A
Number: 01
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The load cell may be faulty. Measures: - check the cabling and the load cell - check the load cell Note: The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switched on even after the error has been rectified.
P07.05
Event: LC Input < MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: A
Number: 01
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads. Possible causes: - force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell - incorrect cabling - faulty load cell
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 115 -
Parameters
P07.06
Event: LC Input > MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: A
Number: 01
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of the load cells. Measuring range end: 125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V 175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V Possible causes: - Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading - incorrect cabling - faulty load cell
P07.07
Event: Setpoint Limited
Event Group: SC
Default: W1
Number: 01
Cause of the event: Depending on the respective mode of operation: a) The setpoint is limited to P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation. b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in volumetric operation.
P07.08
Event: Power Failure
Event Group: WE
Default: A
Number: 01
This event is identified once the power supply is restored. The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event must first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales will restart.
P07.09
Event: Memory
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 01
The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during that. The scales will no longer function correctly. Steps to take: - load the factory settings - Normally the hardware has to be replaced.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 116 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P07.10
Source Emergency Setpoint
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
If the emergency setpoint is activated, setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint (P07.11 Emergency Setpoint) are limited to its value. The message SC01 is triggered (P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P07.11
Emergency Setpoint
Min: 0 kg/h
Default: 0 kg/h
Max: 220000000 kg/h
If the emergency setpoint is activated (input P07.10 Source Emergency Setpoint), setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint (P07.11) are limited to its value. The message SC01 is triggered (P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P07.12
Event: Analog Input < Offset
Event Group: WE
Default: A
Number: 08
One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set. A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input signal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display. All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the time set if there is an abrupt change in the signal. Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display. P08.01 Min: 0 s
Filter: Actual Flow Rate
Default: 3 s
Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display and for outputs of the actual flow rate at the operating panel, EasyServe and fieldbus. Has no effect on the feeder regulation.
P08.02 Min: 0 s
Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
Default: 3 s
Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the actual flow rate analog output. The filter can have an impact on the control characteristics with an externally closed control circuit through the analog value.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 117 -
Parameters
P08.03 Min: 0 s
Filter: Belt Load
Default: 3 s
Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for displaying the belt load. Has no effect on the feeder regulation.
P08.04 Min: 0 s
Filter: Belt Speed
Default: 3 s
Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for displaying the belt speed.
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values The parameters of this group define the limits for process values and specify the event classes of the associated events. Events that can only occur with regular feed operation are only monitored 10 s after beginning feed operation. P09.01
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
Min: -10 % Io
Max: 200 % Io
Default: 5 % Io
Lower threshold for the actual feed rate. Reference : P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
P09.02
Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: W1
Number: 02
The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN. Possible causes: - no bulk material - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment - feed rate setpoint too low
P09.03
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Min: -10 % Io
Max: 200 % Io
Default: 120 % Io
Upper threshold for the actual feed rate. Reference : P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 118 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P09.04
Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: W1
Number: 02
Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Possible causes: - bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment - feed rate setpoint too large
P09.05
Limit: Load MIN
Min: -10 % Q
Max: 200 % Q
Default: 60 % Q
Lower limit for belt load. Reference: Nominal belt load (service value)
P09.06
Event: Load MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: W1
Number: 03
The belt load is less than the minimum value set in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN Possible causes: - no bulk material - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
P09.07
Limit: Load MAX
Min: -10 % Q
Max: 200 % Q
Default: 120 % Q
Upper limit for the belt load. Reference: Nominal belt load (service value)
P09.08
Event: Load MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: W1
Number: 03
The belt load is greater than the maximum value set in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX Possible causes: - bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 119 -
Parameters
P09.09
Limit: Speed MIN
Min: -10 % V
Max: 200 % V
Default: 5 % V
Lower limit for belt speed. Reference: P03.02 Nominal Speed
P09.10
Event: Speed MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: W1
Number: 04
The belt speed is less than the minimum value set in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
P09.11
Limit: Speed MAX
Min: -10 % V
Max: 200 % V
Default: 120 % V
Upper limit for belt speed. Reference: P03.02 Nominal Speed
P09.12
Event: Speed MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: W1
Number: 04
The belt speed is greater than the maximum value set in P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values that have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values. If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No readjustment is necessary. P10.01 Min: 0.25 s
LC Filter
Default: 0.25 s
Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value should be left at the factory setting. Note: filtering the load cell signal also effects the regulating action.
P10.02 Min: 0.5
Range Correction
Default: 1
Max: 2
The parameter affects the load measurement F proportionally. Q(corrected) = Q(measured) * P10.02
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 120 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P10.03 Min: 1 s
Belt Circuit Time
Default: 30 s
Max: 9999 s
Determines the measurement period for the calibration program LB: Pulses/Belt. Usually, the time chosen is the time required for one belt circuit.
P10.04
Calibration Weight
Min: 0.001 kg
Default: 10 kg
Max: 22000 kg
Belt load measurement can be verified using test weights. This is done by running the adjustment program CW: Span Calibrationwithout flow of material. The test weight as it acts on the load cell is keyed in. Also refer to: P10.02 Range Correction
P10.05 Min: 0 kg/m
Basic Tare
Default: 0 kg/m
Max: 10000 kg/m
The result of the TW: Tare calibration program in accordance with the dead weight without the flow of bulk solids.
P10.06
Tare Correction
Min: -1000 kg/m
Default: 0 kg/m
Max: 1000 kg/m
The result of the adjustment program >0< Zero Set or the automatic material check (KME).
P10.07 Min: 0 I/B
Belt Circuit No.
Default: 1000000 I/B
Max: 9000000 I/B
Number of impulses from the pulse generator at the belt drive that constitute one belt rotation. The result of the calibration program LB: Pulses/Belt. This defines the duration of calibration programs. Divided by P05.01 Pulses per length, this gives the belt length in meters.
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller The parameters of this group define the behavior of the feed rate controller. Also refer to the controller block diagrams in the appendices.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 121 -
Parameters
P11.01
Optimize Controller
Alternative:
STANDARD UNIVERS
Default: STANDARD
STANDARD: standard controller adjustment for the weighfeeder application. UNIVERS: user-defined controller adjustment for special cases (refer to appendix). The appendix contains a detailed wiring diagram and applications for special cases. Caution! The parameters from P11.19 are reset to the factory settings when changing from UNIVERS to STANDARD.
P11.02
P-Component KP
Min: 0 mA/%
Max: 1000 mA/%
Default: 0.04 mA/%
Proportional component of the feed rate regulator. Special case: KP = 0 results in an I-regulator Reference value: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate Also refer to: A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendices
P11.03 Min: 0 s
I-Component TN
Default: 1 s
Max: 60000 s
Controller readjusting time. TN is the reciprocal value of the integration constants KI, i.e. a larger value means a slower controller. KI = 1/TN TN in%/(mA/s) Reference value: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate TN = 0 results in a proportional controller. Also refer to: A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendix
P11.04 Min: 0 s
Filter: Deviation
Default: 3 s
Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for all displays and printouts of the control deviation.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 122 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P11.05
Time Deviation
Min: 0 s
Default: 20 s
Max: 600 s
Duration for which a control deviation above the threshold in P11.06 Threshold Deviation will be tolerated. The event 'control deviation' is identified once the time has been exceeded. Simultaneously P11.05 Time Deviation functions as a time constant for the filter that contains the value of the control deviation. A 'control deviation' event is also identified if the filtered result exceeds the threshold value P11.08 Deviation abs. max.. Also refer to: P11.06 Threshold Deviation P11.07 Factor Deviation P11.08 Deviation abs. max. P11.09 Event: Deviation
P11.06
Threshold Deviation
Min: 0 %
Default: 5 %
Max: 100 %
Maximum permissible control deviation. Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate. Also refer to: P11.05 Time Deviation, P11.09 Event: Deviation
P11.07 Min: 0
Factor Deviation
Default: 1
Max: 1
An event message as per P11.09 Event: Deviation will be identified if the absolute value of the control deviation for the duration P11.05 Time Deviation is greater than the threshold P11.06 Threshold Deviation. With a setpoint of 100%, the effective threshold is always determined by the parameter P11.06 Threshold Deviation. For lower setpoints the threshold can be reduced with parameter P11.07 Factor Deviation. Examples: P11.07 = 0 : Effective threshold = P11.06 × Setpoint / P03.01 P11.07 = 1 : Effective threshold = P11.06
P11.08 Min: 0.1 %
Deviation abs. max.
Default: 100 %
Max: 1000 %
The amount of the control deviation will be filtered (filter time constant: P11.05 Time Deviation). If the filter output exceeds the limit set here a 'control deviation' event will be identified (P11.09 Event: Deviation). The filter is reset when the scales are switched off.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 123 -
Parameters
P11.09
Event: Deviation
Event Group: HI
Default: W1
Number: 05
Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the setpoint over too long a period of time. Possible causes: - material has been incorrectly handled: - the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily - arching in the feed hopper - there is a backup on the discharge side - a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder - the controller has at times come against its limits - error in the electronics - check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output regulator settings (current limiting, speed range) - calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical value that minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable operation. Also refer to: P11.08 Deviation abs. max., P11.07 Factor Deviation, P11.06 Threshold Deviation, P11.05 Time Deviation
P11.10
Event: Controller Limited
Event Group: CO
Default: W1
Number: 01
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response threshold. After a time message HI05 (P11.09) will be output. 1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular. 2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set. Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service value Y). At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.
P11.11 Min: -20 mA
Lower Limit
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Lower limit for the regulator actuating variable. If transfer is made with currents from 4 ... 20 mA, the parameter should be set at least to 4 mA. P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset must be set to a value equal to or greater than P11.11 Lower Limit. Also refer to: P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 124 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P11.12 Min: 0 mA
Upper Limit
Default: 20 mA
Max: 20 mA
Upper limit for the regulator actuating variable. With inputs lower than 20 mA the limit depends on the size of the threshold value. Also refer to: A description of the effect of the upper limit can be found in the appendices
P11.13 Min: 0 mA
Controller Magnitude Offset
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Offset of the actuating variable by a constant value. The offset takes effect before the limitation of the actuating variable. Generally the same values are chosen for P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset as for P11.11 Lower Limit. Optimization: - fill the feeder hopper with bulk material - calculate the actuating variable Y1, the value at which the discharge unit begins to work - calculate the actuating variable Y2, the value at which reduction of the feed is suspended. For feeders that are operated with feed rate setpoints of 0: P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y2 All other feeders: P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y1 Note: P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset must be equal to or greater than P11.11 Lower Limit.
P11.14
Position at STOP
Alternative:
0 Lower Limit
Default: 0
If the scales are switched off the actuating variable can be set to 0 or to the offset value P11.11 Lower Limit.
P11.15 Min: 0 Circuits
Volumetric Start-Up
Default: 0 Circuits
Max: 2 Circuits
The maximum duration of volumetric operation once the scale has been switched on. If selected, feeding will switch to gravimetric operation once the startup time has past. This duration is given in fractions of one complete belt circuit. This function improves the startup with an empty feeder. Also refer to: P06.04 Start-Up Mode
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 125 -
Parameters
P11.16
Volumetric Clearance
Min: 0 Circuits
Default: 0 Circuits
Max: 2 Circuits
Duration of clearance mode. The flow gate is switched off before the feeder discharge element (belt drive) to clear the system. This allows the discharge element to be emptied. The duration is given as a fraction of a complete belt circuit.
P11.17
Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Input current offset for an analog setpoint of 0 % of Nominal Flow Rate. This parameter takes effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.
P11.18 Min: 0 mA
Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Input current for the analog setpoint of 100 % of the Nominal Flow Rate. The range and offset parameters take effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.
P11.19
Store
Alternative:
NO YES YES-A
Default: NO
Saving the control magnitude before turning off the scale. The next start will begin with this value. NO: do not save YES: save YES-A: only save if the scale has not broken down due to an alarm
P11.20
Volumetric Mode
Alternative:
Qconst Yconst
Default: Qconst
Specifying volumetric mode. Qconst: V * Qconst is effective as the actual value. V represents the instantaneous belt speed, Qconst the stored belt load value (rated belt load or most recent measured value). The scales are speed-controlled. Yconst: the controller is switched off, P11.21 Bypass only is effective. For further details see the section 'Details: Regulation' in the appendices.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 126 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P11.21
Bypass
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Constant for the flow rate setpoint pilot control. One value is superimposed additively on the actuating variable, proportionally to the preset setpoint. This parameter gives the bypass value for the nominal setpoint. Also refer to: the controller block diagram in the appendix.
P11.22 Min: 0 s
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord
Default: 0 s
Max: 6000 s
The time constant for a 1st-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass. To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.22 and P11.23 delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a delay. The filter is switched off with P11.22 = 0. Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.23 Min: 0 s
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord
Default: 0 s
Max: 6000 s
The time constant for a second filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass. To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.22 and P11.23 delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a delay. The filter is switched off with P11.23 = 0. Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.24
Set/Act Sources
Alternative:
I Q
Default: I
Selecting the process variable: I: feed rate is regulated to the feed rate setpoint Q: belt load is regulated to the belt load setpoint
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 127 -
Parameters
P11.25
Adaptation 1
Alternative:
NO W
Default: NO
Controlled adaption of the controller input The adaption means that the controller can be adapted to variable route reinforcements or the guidance behavior can be improved.
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels. On the VCU 20104 controller only one analog channel is available and it is set to feedrate feedback by default. P12.01
AO: Setpoint
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Analog output channel for the setpoint flow rate. Also refer to: P12.02 Setpoint Offset, P12.03 Setpoint Range
P12.02
Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The output current for the value of the setpoint feed rate of 0 %. Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.03 Min: 0 mA
Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output current for the value of a setpoint flow rate of 100 %. Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.04
AO: Actual Flow Rate
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Analog output channel for the actual flow rate. Also refer to: P12.05 Flow Rate Offset, P12.06 Flow Rate Range
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 128 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P12.05
Flow Rate Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 0 %. Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.06 Min: 0 mA
Flow Rate Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 100 %. Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.07
AO: Belt Load
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Analog output channel for the belt load.
P12.08
Belt Load Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The output flow for the value of the belt load of 0 %. Reference: nominal belt loading (service value) Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Belt Load
P12.09 Min: 0 mA
Belt Load Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output flow for the value of the belt load of 100 %. Reference: nominal load (service value) Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Belt Load
P12.10
AO: Speed
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Analog output channel for the belt speed.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 129 -
Parameters
P12.11
Speed Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The output flow for the value of the belt speed of 0 %. Reference: P03.02 Nominal Speed Also refer to: P12.10 AO: Speed
P12.12 Min: 0 mA
Speed Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output flow for the value of the belt speed of 100 %. Reference: P03.02 Nominal Speed Also refer to: P12.10 AO: Speed
P12.13
AO: Deviation
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Analog output channel for the control deviation. Also refer to: P12.14 Deviation Offset, P12.15 Deviation Range
P12.14
Deviation Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The value of the control deviation 'zero' lies between the offset and 20 mA. Also refer to: P12.13 AO: Deviation
P12.15 Min: 0 mA
Deviation Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output current is calculated according to the following formula: Current = 10 mA + (P12.14)/2 + (P12.15 - P12.14) × control deviation / 100 % Reference value: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 130 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P12.16
AO: Motor Speed Control
Alternative:
AO n/a
Default: AO VCU1.AO1
Analog output channel for the actuating variable Y of the feed rate regulator. Also refer to: - the parameters in the 'regulator' block - the regulator diagram in the appendices
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs Inputs The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired on the controller and cannot be changed. P13.01
Event: External Event 1
Event Group: SC
Default: A
Number: 05
External interference signal at fault input 1. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive
P13.02
DI: External Event 1
Alternative:
DI n/a
Default: DI VCU1.DI1 Low
Input 1 for an external interference signal. The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking). Also refer to: P13.01 Event: External Event 1
P13.03
Event: External Event 2
Event Group: SC
Default: A
Number: 06
External interference signal at fault input 2. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 131 -
Parameters
P13.04
DI: External Event 2
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Input 2 for an external interference signal. The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking). Also refer to: P13.03 Event: External Event 2
P13.05
Event: External Event 3
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 11
External interference signal at fault input 3. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
P13.06
DI: External Event 3
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Input 3 for an external interference signal. The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking). Also refer to: P13.05 Event: External Event 3
P13.07
Event: External Event 4
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 12
External interference signal at fault input 4. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
P13.08
DI: External Event 4
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Input 4 for an external interference signal. The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking). Also refer to: P13.07 Event: External Event 4
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 132 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P13.09
DI: Acknowledge Events
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Digital input for acknowledging event messages. Caution: the level is static and may not be on permanently (otherwise continuous acknowledgement).
P13.10
DI: Local Mode
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Feedback from the local operating console VLG that has been switched to 'local'. The DISOCONT Tersus is now a passive display device only. It is switched to 'volumetric' automatically to suppress event messages. The DISOCONT Tersus switches itself off when it is switched back.
P13.11
DI: Volumetric Mode
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Digital input for switching the scales to volumetric operation, not synchronized with previous operation. Also refer to: P13.12 DI: Volumetric synchron
P13.12
DI: Volumetric synchron
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Switches to volumetric operation while the actuating variable continues continuously. The actuating variable is calculated as an average of the actuating variable obtained during regular operation. Alterations to the feed rate setpoint automatically adjust the actuating variable. Also refer to: P13.11 DI: Volumetric Mode
P13.13
Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6
Event Group: WE
Default: A
Number: 02
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 133 -
Parameters
P13.14
Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7
Event Group: WE
Default: A
Number: 03
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.15
Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6
Event Group: WE
Default: IG
Number: 04
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.16
Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI7
Event Group: WE
Default: IG
Number: 05
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.17
Event: NAMUR Error VCU3-DI6
Event Group: WE
Default: IG
Number: 06
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 134 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P13.18
Event: NAMUR Error VCU3-DI7
Event Group: WE
Default: IG
Number: 07
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.19
DI: Reset Totalizer 1
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Digital input for canceling totalizing counter 1. The positive flank is the actuator.
P13.20
DI: Reset Totalizer 2
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Digital input for clearing totalizing counter 2. The positive flank takes effect.
P13.21
Belt Limit Switch
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The input channel for connecting the signal from a belt limit switch. The 'belt skew' event is identified when the switch responds. Also refer to: P13.22 Event: Limit Switch
P13.22
Event: Limit Switch
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 01
The event is identified when the belt limit switch has responded. Possible causes: - extreme belt off-center run - contaminated limit switch - defect on automatic belt tracking - defect on the belt Actions: - make a visual check of the belt run - correct the belt run with the belt tightening equipment - check the belt tightening and automatic belt tracking
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 135 -
Parameters
P13.23
DI: Zero Set
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Input channel for starting the 'zeroing program' with an empty belt (calibration program >0< Zero Set).
P13.24
Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7
Event Group: WE
Default: IG
Number: 13
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.25
Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7
Event Group: WE
Default: IG
Number: 14
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly. P14.01
DO: Scale Start
Alternative:
DO n/a
Default: DO VCU1.DO1 High
Sends a start command to the feeder's main drive.
P14.02
DO: Feeder Started
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Digital output signal used to display the ON or OFF scales states.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 136 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P14.03
DO: Start Prefeeder
Alternative:
DO n/a
Default: DO VCU1.DO2 High
The digital output for turning the prefeeder on or off. An output should be selected on the main VCU (local bus address 1) if there is active belt load regulation of the P25.01 type = "PULSE" .
P14.04
DO: ALARM
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active if any alarm is triggered (common alarm). The scales have failed.
P14.05
DO: Deviation
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active when the monitoring activates the control deviation (P11.09 Event: Deviation). This contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.06
DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active if the feed rate falls below the minimum feed rate (P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN). The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.07
DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active when the maximum feed rate (P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX) is exceeded. The contact output is independent of the event class.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 137 -
Parameters
P14.08
DO: Load MIN
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active when it falls below the minimum belt load (P09.05 Limit: Load MIN). The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.09
DO: Load MAX
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active when it exceeds the maximum belt load (P09.07 Limit: Load MAX). The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.10
DO: Speed MIN
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active when it falls below the minimum belt speed (P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN). The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.11
DO: Speed MAX
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active when it exceeds the maximum belt speed (P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX). The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.12
DO: Volumetric Mode
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to a volumetric mode.
P14.13
DO: Local Mode
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to local mode.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 138 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P14.14
DO: WARNING
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active if any warning is pending.
P14.15
DO: Keyboard Mode
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active when keyboard mode is preselected. (The DISOCONT Tersus is operated using the operating console VHM or EasyServe).
P14.16
DO: Zero Set OK
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
This contact can monitor the successful conclusion of the zero setting program (*). The digital output is set to be inactive when starting zero setting. After completing the control, the contact is set active again if the results are within the allowed boundaries. (*) Refer to the calibration program >0< Zero Set
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode The parameters of this group define and optimize behavior in batch mode. Batching mode is used to ensure that the feeder turns off independantly after conveying a preset quantity. Also refer to the chapter in the manual: 'General Diagram' → 'Batching' 'Appendix'' → 'Batch Operation Control' P15.01
Batch Mode
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Sets whether batch mode can be run or not. In addition, "batching" "selection" has to be selected with the operating menu . Also refer to the chapter in the manual: 'General Diagram' → 'Batching' 'Appendix'' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.02
Batch Setpoint Source
Alternative:
OP FB AI
Default: OP
Establish the source that will determine the batch.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 139 -
Parameters
P15.03 Min: 0 s
Adaptation Time
Default: 3 s
Max: 3600 s
Establishes the duration of the entire dribble feed phase.
P15.04
Correction Amount
Min: -100000 kg
Default: 0 kg
Max: 1000000 kg
The start of the adaptation time is shifted by this quantity. An adaptation time = 0 corresponds to a pre-threshold. The correction quantity should be set to 0 for initial startup. The value of Correction Amount is adapted after each batch if P15.05 Adaptation Factor is not equal to zero so that the defect of the next batch is minimized.
P15.05 Min: 0
Adaptation Factor
Default: 0.5
Max: 1
The application point of the switch-off function is adapted automatically so that the system is better adapted to the actual conditions for the next batch. Adaptation Factor = 0 : no adaptation Adaptation Factor = 1 : full adaptation Interim values result in filtered adjustment; this should be used in particular for systems with poor reproducibility. The result of the event is stored in P15.04 Correction Amount. P15.04 NEW = P15.04 OLD - Batch Residual Amount * P15.05
P15.06
Batch Automatic Record
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
YES: automatic print after each completed batch. NO: Printout of the batch can only be made via menu. The printout can be made only after a batch has ended automatically or manually. The printout is stored to a file that can be read using the Web-Server.
P15.07
DI: Batch Terminate
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Digital input signal for stopping a current batch.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 140 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P15.08
DO: Batch Running
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active if a batch is run. The signal is active at the start of the batch and deactivated again when the batch has been completed. It remains active if batch operation is continuous.
P15.09
DO: Dribble Feed
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active in the dribble feed phase.
P15.10
DO: Full Feed
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active in the full feed phase.
P15.11 Min: 0 kg
Analog Setpoint Relat.
Default: 1000 kg
Max: 220000000 kg
Effective only when P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source = AI The batch setpoint resulting for an input flow corresponding to the parameter P15.12 Batch Setpoint Range.
P15.12 Min: 0 mA
Batch Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Input current for a batch setpoint that corresponds to P15.11 Analog Setpoint Relat..
P15.13
Batch Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Input current for a batch setpoint of 0. Negative values can bridge the input area. For example: P15.11 = 1000 kg P15.12 = 20 mA P15.13 = -20 mA 0 ... 20 mA then correspond to 500 ... 1000 kg
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 141 -
Parameters
P15.14 Min: 0 kg
Batch Tolerance
Default: 100000 kg
Max: 1000000 kg
If the batch lies outside of the tolerance range, the maximum alteration of the correction quantity at adaptation is the entered tolerance value. Also, an event is identified. Also refer to: P15.15 Event: Out of Tolerance
P15.15
Event: Out of Tolerance
Event Group: MF
Default: W2
Number: 06
The batch result is outside the tolerance range. Possible causes: - highly erratic material flow - altered feeder discharge behavior - error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces
P15.16 Min: 0 kg
Pre-cut-off Amount
Default: 0 kg
Max: 1000000 kg
The digital output P15.17 DO: Pre-cut-off is set if the remaining quantity of the batch drops below the value in the parameter P15.16. The contact continues to be set until the batch is finished.
P15.17
DO: Pre-cut-off
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The digital output P15.17 is set if the remaining quantity of the batch drops below the value in the parameter P15.16 Pre-cut-off Amount. The contact continues to be set until the batch is finished.
P15.18 Min: 1 kg
Batch Setpoint Limit
Default: 1000000 kg
Max: 100000000 kg
Upper threshold for batch setpoint entry. The threshold is used to prevent incorrect entries and thus overflows. Also refer to: P15.19 Event: Batch setpoint Limit
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 142 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P15.19
Event: Batch setpoint Limit
Event Group: MF
Default: W1
Number: 07
Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible upper limit in P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit. Possible causes: - incorrect entry - incorrect upper threshold Also refer to: P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit
P15.20
Batch behaviour after power down
Alternative:
Continue Cancel
Default: Cancel
Defines behavior after a power down: Cancel: the batch begun before the power down is aborted. A new batch is begun with the current setpoint. Continue: the batch begun before the power down is completed.
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval The parameters of this group define maintenance intervals and the internal accuracy analysis function. P16.01 Min: 1 h
Maintenance Electric
Default: 3000 h
Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty cycle of the power supply. This parameter defines the interval between maintenance work. Also refer to: P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric
P16.02
Event: Maint. Electric
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 04
The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P16.01 Maintenance Electric. A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work required.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 143 -
Parameters
P16.03 Min: 1 h
Maintenance Feeder Run
Default: 3000 h
Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty cycle of the scales (scales ON). This parameter defines the interval between maintenance work. Also refer to: P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run
P16.04
Event: Maint.Feeder Run
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 03
The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run. A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work required.
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - VAP If measurement is made at the discharge point VAP, the weighbridge measuring point is repositioned to the material discharge point by a delay element. The totalized amount of material discharged is directly recorded. The belt sensor has to be installed and evaluated. Note for the weighfeeders: if VAP is active, we recommend switching on automatic belt influence compensation BIC. The conditions: The ratio of the 'distance from the center of the weighbridge to material discharge' to the 'total belt length' is known. P17.01
VAP Active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Activates the delay for the belt load used for regulation for the time required for the material to reach the discharge point.
P17.02 Min: 0 % LB
Platform Dis.Length
Default: 0 % LB
Max: 50 % LB
The space from the middle of the weighbridge to the material dispatch in % of the entire belt length (refer to P10.07 Belt Circuit No.)
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Belt Monitoring The parameters in this group control the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 144 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P18.01
Belt Sensor Active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
The belt sensor and sensor surface in the conveyor belt are used for identifying Belt Drift and Slip Value and synchronizing adaptive belt influence compensation (BIC). The belt sensor must be activated and the signal input defined in order to apply adaptive belt influence compensation (P18.03 BIC Active), basic slip control (P18.12 Event: Slip) and basic belt motion monitoring (P18.08 Event: Belt Drift). See also: P18.02 DI: Source Belt Sensor P18.04 Sensor Length P18.05 Sensor Width P18.06 Sensor Offset
P18.02
DI: Source Belt Sensor
Alternative:
DI n/a
Default: DI VCU1.DI7 High
The digital input for the belt sensor. This function can be checked with the corresponding service value. DI: A DI6, DI7 sensor input should be used. n/a: BIC and the belt monitoring functions are inactive.
P18.03
BIC Active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) monitors and corrects the belt influence. As with belt monitoring it requires a sensor and sensor surface. Note: Initial startup is made without active BIC. Characteristics: After belt influence compensation is activated the influence that the conveyor belt has on weight measurement is offset after approximately ten belt circuits.
P18.04
Sensor Length
Min: 0.01 cm
Max: 400 cm
Default: 8.2 cm
Length of the metallic markings worked into the belt in the direction of belt travel.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 145 -
Parameters
P18.05
Sensor Width
Min: 0.01 cm
Max: 400 cm
Default: 12 cm
Width of the metallic markings worked into the belt at right angles to the direction of belt travel.
P18.06
Sensor Offset
Min: -400 cm
Max: 400 cm
Default: 0 cm
The zero point of recording the belt drift can be corrected with the offset. Unfortunately, this restricts the maximum display zone. This is why greater differences should be calibrated by mechanically shifting the sensor. The new display = the old display - the offset
P18.07
Belt Drift
Min: 0.01 cm
Max: 400 cm
Default: 3 cm
Threshold value for belt misalignment identification to generate an event message Event: Belt Drift.
P18.08
Event: Belt Drift
Event Group: WM
Default: W1
Number: 04
The belt has exceeded the tolerance levels set. Steps: 1. Remove any soiling to the tail and drive pulleys 2. Align the belt Monitoring may also be subject to error. Therefore: keep an eye on the service value for the belt motion sensor and correct any errors that may arise. Related threshold value: Belt Drift
P18.09
Belt Skew
Min: 0.01 cm
Max: 400 cm
Default: 4 cm
Threshold of the belt drift for detection of event Event: Belt Skew.
P18.10
Event: Belt Skew
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 03
Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable. Action: See Event: Belt Drift Related threshold: Belt Skew
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 146 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P18.11 Min: 0 % LB
Slip Value
Default: 2 % LB
Max: 10 % LB
The permitted slip of the belt over one complete revolution or the permitted change in length of the conveyor belt in % of the total belt length. There is a Event: Slip event message if it exceeds the limit and the P18.15 DO: Belt Slip digital output is set.
P18.12
Event: Slip
Event Group: WM
Default: W1
Number: 02
This event is identified if the belt motion does not correspond to that predicted by the motor revolutions. Possible causes: - belt is slipping at the drive pulley - withdrawal forces are too high - gearing is defective - belt or drive pulley heavily soiled Steps: - visual inspection of the belt and the bulk material flow
P18.13
DO: Belt Drift
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The digital output to show the event of drift. Also refer to: P18.07 Belt Drift and P18.08 Event: Belt Drift The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
P18.14
DO: Belt Skew
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Digital output to show the belt skew event. Also refer to: P18.09 Belt Skew and P18.10 Event: Belt Skew The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 147 -
Parameters
P18.15
DO: Belt Slip
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Digital output to show Event: Slip. Also refer to P18.11 Slip Value The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
P18.16
DI: BIC freeze
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The BIC values currently running in are frozen when this digital input is set. This prevents the values already ascertained from being falsified on belt loads that fluctuate substantially.
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block Block 19 - Communication EasyServe The parameters of this group define the parameters for serial communication with EasyServe via RS232 or RS485. These parameters have no function if EasyServe is connected via Ethernet. P19.01 Min: 1
Own Address
Default: 1
Max: 254
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485. All devices connected to the communicatio bus must have disjunct addresses. Also refer to: P19.02 Baud Rate, P19.03 Format Data
P19.02
Baud Rate
Alternative:
38400
Default: 38400
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485. Data transfer speed. This parameter is used for information only. The speed cannot be changed.
P19.03
Format Data
Alternative:
8-N-1
Default: 8-N-1
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485. Formats the serial data. The value is used for information only and cannot be altered.
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Communication Fieldbus The parameters of this group define the communication procedure to be used to a higher-level plant control system and configure the data link.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 148 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
Details on the fieldbus interface can be found in the following manuals: DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448 INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474 DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468 P20.01
Protocol Type
Alternative:
NO Modbus-RTU PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet Modbus-TCP Ethernet/IP
Default: NO
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus card. DISOCONT Tersus: Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual BV-H2406. Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2448) contains further information on the data structures. INTECONT Tersus: Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2474) contains further information on the data structures.
NO: Modbus-TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed. Modbus-RTU: RS232, RS422 or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface card VSS 28020 must be installed. PROFIBUS DP: Fieldbus interface card VPB 28020 must be installed. DeviceNet: Fieldbus interface card VCB 28020 must be installed. Modbus-TCP: Complete communication (read/write) using Ethernet and the main VCU RJ45 plug. Ethernet/IP: Communication via Ethernet and the RJ45 plug on the main VCU. The red-coded RJ45 socket X96 may not be used for communication with the host computer.
P20.02 Min: 1 s
Timeout Host
Default: 5 s
Max: 600 s
Monitors the interface A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in P20.02 is greater than zero.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 149 -
Parameters
P20.03
Event: Cyclic Communication
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 08
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P20.02. To rectify: check cable connections.
P20.04
Event: Acyclic Communication
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 10
Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer. Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
P20.05
Check in Keyboard Mode
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: YES
To be able to use the keyboard mode as emergency operation if the coupling fails (without having to log off the fieldbus coupling), this parameter can be used to deactivate fieldbus communication monitoring in keyboard mode. This allows the scales to be operated even if the fieldbus link fails.
P20.06
Compatibility DISOCONT Master
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Compatibility setting for the predecessor electronics systems DISOCONT or INTECONT PLUS. NO: Not completely compatible YES: compatible, but with restricted data link compatibility for new functions
P20.07
Word Sequence
Alternative:
I:std/L:std I:swp/L:std I:std/L:swp I:swp/L:swp
Default: I:std/L:std
The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word. I → denotes IEEE 754 values (floating-point values) L → denotes LONG values (4 byte integer values) std → will not swap the word order swp → will swap the word order
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 150 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P20.08
Byte Sequence
Alternative:
High - Low Low - High
Default: High - Low
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.
P20.09
Configuration
Alternative:
NO_PARA_ID_3_6 NO_PARA_ID_4_12 PARA_ID_6_15 FIXED_8_16 FIXED_8_8 FIXED_4_4 VARIABLE COMPATIBLE FIXED COMPATIBLE
Default: FIXED_8_16
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a detailed description in the manuals for data communication: DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448 INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474 DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468 The contents of the data has to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is compatible to one another!
P20.10 Min: 1
Address
Default: 1
Max: 254
Address of the device as a slave at the modbus. Each address may be used at a bus once only.
P20.11 Min: 1
Resolution
Default: 4096
Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value transferred. The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
P20.12
Baud rate
Alternative:
9600 4800 2400 19200 38400
Default: 19200
Data transfer rate at Modbus-RTU.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 151 -
Parameters
P20.13
Data Format
Alternative:
8-O-1 8-E-1 8-N-1
Default: 8-O-1
Modbus-RTU always uses an 11-bit character frame. Example: 8-O-1 means: 1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit N = No parity O = Odd parity E = Even parity
P20.14
Physics
Alternative:
RS485-2-wire RS485-4-wire RS232
Default: RS232
Selects the electrical interface type (Modbus RTU)
P20.15 Min: 0
Address
Default: 16
Max: 126
Address of the slave at the PROFIBUS
P20.16
FLOAT-Format
Alternative:
IEEE SIEMENS-KG
Default: IEEE
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parameters.
P20.17 Min: 0
Address
Default: 63
Max: 63
The address of the weighing electronics on DeviceNet
P20.18
Baud rate
Alternative:
125K 250K 500K
Default: 125K
Data transfer rate of the DeviceNet.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 152 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P20.19
Parameter
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P20.20 Min: 2
Preset Count
Default: 2
Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order plant control system.
P20.21 Min: 0
READ_ID Count
Default: 6
Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales→ master) that are queried in a telegram.
P20.22
Access Rights Limitation FB
Alternative:
NO FIRST WRITE REMOTE IP
Default: NO
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a controller: NO: No restrictions FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights. The other subscribers may read only. REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P20.23 Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
P20.23
Remote IP Address FB
Default: 192.168.240.250
IP address of the subscriber with control rights for Modbus-TCP. Also refer to: P20.22 Access Rights Limitation FB
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Fixed mode configuration Configuration of the data in fieldbus communication 'FIXED' mode that were exchanged with the host computer via serial interface. Also refer to: P20.09 Configuration For the available data and their Ids see the separated communication manual: DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 153 -
Parameters
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448 INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474 DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468 P21.01
ID Preset Value 1
Default: 320
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the fieldbus telegram. It cannot be changed in this parameter. The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the data communication manual: DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448 INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474 DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P21.02
ID Preset Value 2
Default: 352
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1
P21.03
ID Preset Value 3
Default: 384
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1
P21.04
ID Preset Value 4
Default: 592
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1
P21.05
ID Preset Value 5
Default: 594
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1
P21.06
ID Preset Value 6
Default: 610
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1
P21.07
ID Preset Value 7
Default: 0
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 154 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P21.08
ID Preset Value 8
Default: 0
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1
P21.09
ID Read Value 1
Default: 752
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual: DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448 INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474 DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P21.10
ID Read Value 2
Default: 784
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.11
ID Read Value 3
Default: 1552
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.12
ID Read Value 4
Default: 1872
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.13
ID Read Value 5
Default: 1874
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.14
ID Read Value 6
Default: 1880
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.15
ID Read Value 7
Default: 1890
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 155 -
Parameters
P21.16
ID Read Value 8
Default: 1894
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.17
ID Read Value 9
Default: 816
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.18
ID Read Value 10
Default: 1876
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.19
ID Read Value 11
Default: 1884
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.20
ID Read Value 12
Default: 1960
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.21
ID Read Value 13
Default: 1896
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.22
ID Read Value 14
Default: 1898
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
P21.23
ID Read Value 15
Default: 1902
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 156 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P21.24
ID Read Value 16
Default: 1904
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Ethernet The parameters in this group control the Ethernet ports. It is necessary to provide inputs when EasyServe, a VHM operating element or a host computer is supposed to be connected via Ethernet. You can find information on the selection of addresses in the BV-H2406 manual. P22.01
IP Address
Default: 192.168.240.1
IP address of the weighing electronics. If the control system is integrated into an Ethernet network, the address must be chosen in agreement with the network administrator. In isolated networks we recommend the factory setting 192.168.240.x. "x" allows for selection of the system on the bus.
P22.02
Net Mask
Default: 255.255.255.0
The net mask setting is based on the local network type. In general the following setting is used: 255.255.255.0 See also: P22.02 Net Mask, system manual BV-H2406
P22.03
Gateway
Default: 0.0.0.0
Generally no input is required. Typical value: 0.0.0.0
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block Block 23 - PLC Outputs Applicable only when physical DISOCONT Tersus outputs are controlled by the control system. The DISOCONT Tersus allows physical output signals to be controlled directly by the control system computer via fieldbus. The parameters of this group assign physical channels to the fieldbus commands. Please also refer to: status of fieldbus protocol commands in manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communication' (BV-H2448). P23.01
DO: PLC 1
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 157 -
Parameters
P23.02
DO: PLC 2
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1
P23.03
DO: PLC 3
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1
P23.04
DO: PLC 4
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1
P23.05
DO: PLC 5
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1
P23.06
DO: PLC 6
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1
P23.07
DO: PLC 7
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1
P23.08
DO: PLC 8
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 158 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P23.09
AO: PLC 1
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
P23.10
AO: PLC 2
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P23.09 AO: PLC 1
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Interlocking The parameters of this group configure the system's predefined events and running messages. Also refer to the interlocking logic circuit diagram in the appendix P24.01
DI: Event Mechanics 1
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
P24.02
DI: Event Mechanics 2
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
P24.03
DI: Event Mechanics 3
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
P24.04
DI: Event Mechanics 4
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 159 -
Parameters
P24.05
DI: Event Mechanics 5
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
P24.06
DI: Event Electricity 1
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
P24.07
DI: Event Electricity 2
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
P24.08
DI: Event Electricity 3
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.
P24.09
DO: Event Mechanics
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P24.10
Event: Mechanics
Event Group: IL
Default: W1
Number: 02
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P24.11
DO: Event Electricity
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 160 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P24.12 Event Group: IL
Event: Electricity
Default: W1
Number: 03
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P24.13
DO: Event Mechatronics 1
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P24.14
DO: Event Mechatronics 2
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P24.15 Event Group: IL
Event: Mechatronics
Default: W1
Number: 04
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P24.16
DO: Ready
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P24.17 Event Group: IL
Event: Not Ready
Default: W1
Number: 05
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P24.18
DO: Ready for Start
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 161 -
Parameters
P24.19
Event: Not Ready for Start
Event Group: IL
Default: W1
Number: 06
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Belt Load Controller The parameters of this group configure the ratio of the prefeeder to the equipment for measuring the flowthrough of bulk solids. P25.01
Belt Load Controller
Alternative:
NO ANALOG PULS Stepping
Default: NO
There is the possibility of controlling belt loading by means of a controlled material prefeeder. This process is used with weighfeeders that do not draw directly from a bin, in particular because the bulk solids are inclined to blast. This parameter defines the control process for the prefeeder. Alternatives: NO: no belt loading regulation ANALOG: Analog controller magnitude output for speed-controlled prefeeders or pneumatically controlled rotary gates with integrated position control. PULS: pulse/pause output for intermittently triggered prefeeders. Stepping: position-controlled prefeeders with P25.11 - P25.15 parameters Also refer to: - the controller's block circuit diagram is in the appendix - the loading controller using the second weighbridge - parameter block 2nd Weighbridge
P25.02 Min: 0.001 mA
Controller Magnitude Adaption
Default: 10 mA
Max: 20 mA
The speed bypass that is superimposed on the belt loading controller. This parameter is used to calibrate belt loading to the nominal value in volumetric operation.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 162 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P25.03 Min: 0 m
Blind Distance
Default: 5 m
Max: 100 m
The material running path from the material feed point of the prefeeder to the middle of the weighbridge. The controller automatically adjusts itself depending upon the blind distance, rated speed and load cell filter P10.01 LC Filter. Long ways produce a slow controller and vice versa. P25.03 = 0m : The controller is switched off and in the base position
P25.04 Min: -20 mA
Offset
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
The value of the controller magnitude to the prefeeder for a rated speed of 0 % or an opening on the position-controlled prefeeder without material discharge. P25.04 Offset = 0 mA is set at P25.01 Belt Load Controller = PULS
P25.05 Min: 0 mA
Lower Limit
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
The lower threshold value for the controller magnitude to the prefeeder. P25.05 Lower Limit = P25.04 Offset is normally set. P25.04 Offset = 0 mA is set at P25.01 Belt Load Controller = PULS
P25.06 Min: 0 mA
Upper Limit
Default: 20 mA
Max: 20 mA
Upper limit for the regulator actuating variable. This limit depends on the size of the setpoint with inputs smaller than 20 mA. To find the correlation with the setpoint in the appendix when describing the controller.
P25.07
Position at STOP
Alternative:
0 Lower Limit
Default: 0
The value of the controller magnitude to the prefeeder when the feeder scale is turned off. 0: controller magnitude = 0mA Lower Limit: controller magnitude = value in P25.05 Lower Limit
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 163 -
Parameters
P25.08
Store
Alternative:
NO YES YES-A
Default: NO
This parameter defines the storage property for the controller magnitude when resuming feeding after a standstill. 0: The controller magnitude reached before turning off is not stored YES: The integral component of the controller magnitude reached just before turning off is maintained at restart YES-A: Like YES, however setting the integral component to zero if feeding has been become inoperative due to an alarm The parameter only functions when using the main weighbridge to belt load regulation. The behavior is as with YES when using the second weighbridge.
P25.09
Controller Magnitude Prefeeder
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Only relevant to P25.01 = ANALOG Definition of the output channel for the controller magnitude to the material prefeeder.
P25.10 Min: 0 s
Pulse Length
Default: 1 s
Max: 60 s
Only relevant to P25.01 = PULS or ANALOG The length of the duty cycle of the prefeeder, with P25.01 = ANALOG in the lower feed rate zone. The pulse length remains constant and the pause is adapted by load regulation. An output on the main VCU (local bus address 1) should be selected with active belt load regulation of the P25.01 = PULS type.
P25.11 Min: 0 s/mA
S: P-Component
Default: 0.5 s/mA
Max: 1000 s/mA
Only relevant if P25.01 = "Stepping". The proportion of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder. Also refer to: P25.12 S: I-Component
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 164 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P25.12 Min: 0 s
S: I-Component
Default: 3 s
Max: 60000 s
Only relevant if P25.01 = "Stepping". The integral component of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder. Also refer to: P25.11 S: P-Component
P25.13 Min: 0 %
S: Threshold Response
Default: 0 %
Max: 1000 %
Only relevant if P25.01 = "Stepping". The minimum waiting periods between two adjustment steps. This parameter can be used to prevent continuous vibration of the prefeeder around the operating point.
P25.14
S: DO Open Flow Gate
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Only relevant if P25.01 = "Stepping". The definition of the output channels for opening the position-controlled prefeeder. With DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P25.15
S: DO Close Flow Gate
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Only relevant if P25.01 = "Stepping". The definition of the output channel for closing the position-controlled prefeeder. With DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P25.16
QA Setpoint Source
Alternative:
n/a FB AI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the load setpoint. The load setpoint = nominal belt loading (service value) is at P25.16 QA Setpoint Source = n/a Refer to the following when norming the input and adjusting AI: - P25.17 QA Setpoint Range - P25.18 QA Setpoint Offset
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 165 -
Parameters
P25.17 Min: 0 mA
QA Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Only relevant to P25.16 QA Setpoint Source = AI. Input flow for a load setpoint of 100 % of nominal belt loading (service value). Also refer to: - P25.16 QA Setpoint Source - P25.18 QA Setpoint Offset
P25.18
QA Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 0 mA
Only relevant to P25.16 QA Setpoint Source = AI. Input flow for a load setpoint of 0 %. Also refer to: - P25.16 QA Setpoint Source - P25.17 QA Setpoint Range
P25.19 Min: 0 %
QA-Vmin
Default: 0 %
Max: 100 %
The Qa target setpoint for belt load regulation is calculated so that it does not drop below the speed of QA-Vmin with target belt loading. This means that belt loading is reduced in a small operating range. The function is turned off at P25.19 = 0. Also refer to: P25.20 QA-Qmin
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 166 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P25.20 Min: 0 %
QA-Qmin
Default: 0 %
Max: 100 %
To prevent inaccurate measurements, the setpoint is limited to QA-Qmin for belt loading. P25.20 QA-Qmin has priority over P25.19 QA-Vmin. The function is turned off at P25.20 = 0. Note: Speed regulation for the feed belt to compensate belt loading fluctuations remains active in all cases. States a) flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) < P25.20 (operation with minimum belt loading): belt loading setpoint = P25.20 b) flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) > P25.20 and flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) < P25.19 (operation at reduced belt loading): belt loading setpoint = flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate / P25.19 c) flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) > P25.19 (normal operation): belt loading setpoint = P03.01 / P03.02 Examples of settings: A) flow rate regulation via belt loading at the rated speed of the feed belt The weighfeeder should be run at the operating point of the rated speed “independant of the conveying capacity setpoint”. P25.19: 100 % P25.20: 0 % B) like A), however at minimum belt loading The weighfeeder should be run at the rated speed “independant of the setpoint”. Belt loading should not drop below a lower limit, for instance of 30 % of nominal belt load. P25.19: 100 % P25.20: 30 % C) operation over an extremely large flow rate range The weighfeeder should be operated in a power range of 1:100. P25.19= 5 % (of course, a higher value such as 10 % can be set alternatively) P25.20 = 0 % It is run at nominal belt loading in the "upper" power range. The speed (operating point) is reduced to 5 %. This corresponds to a conventional weighfeeder at an adjustment range of 1:20. When an operating range setpoint < 5 % is specified, the setpoint for belt loading is reduced. There is no other reduction in the operating point of speed. D) minimum speed and minimum load The weighfeeder should run at at least 20 % of rated speed. It should not exceed a minimum 30 % belt loading. P25.19 = 20 % P25.20 = 30 %
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 167 -
Parameters
P25.21 Min: 0 mA
QA-Ypuls
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Pulses with the amplitude of P25.21 are issued in pulse-pause operation as the controller magnitude to the prefeeder. If the internal controller magnitude is in excess of the value P25.21, it switches over to (normal) continuous operation. Refer to P25.22 QA-Ymin for a description of the function Effective only when P25.01 Belt Load Controller = ANALOG.
P25.22 Min: 0 mA
QA-Ymin
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
If the internal controller magnitude drops below the value P25.22, it switches into (normal) continuous operation. P25.21 produces hysteresis for switching over the types of operation. P25.21 = 0 and P25.22 = 0 switches the function off. Description of the function of the pulse control unit The pulse control unit of the prefeeder allows a substantially greater adjustment range. The control system works continually in the upper power range. If the internal controller magnitude drops below the value of P25.22, the controller magnitude is clocked so that the drive of the prefeeder is not operated in a speed range that is too small. The prefeeder is switched on in clocked operation for at least the time selected in P25.10. The pause interval time is determined by the belt loading controller.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 168 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P25.23
QA Coeffizient Calculation
Alternative:
NO YES-1.WB YES-2.WB
Default: NO
The coefficient between the controller magnitude to the prefeeder and the resulting operating range can be automatically ascertained and used in regulation. This is particularly helpful when bulk solids are supposed to be fed with substantially differing bulk density. NO: The bulk density is assumed to be almost constant. The correlation between controller magnitude and the feed rate of the prefeeder is entered in P25.02 Controller Magnitude Adaption. YES-1.WB: This coefficient is ascertained with the aid of the belt load and feed rate ascertained via the main weighbridge. YES-2.WB: This coefficient is ascertained with the aid of the belt load and feed rate ascertained via weighbridge on the material feed. This process can ascertain the coefficient more quickly due to the lower amount of time between prefeeders and measuring point. Of course, this measuring point is generally less precise than the main weighbridge. This adjustment is used with long and slow-running feed belts and long scales. The prerequisite: The feeder scale has a second weighbridge. Refer to the 2nd Weighbridge group of parameters. The following is relevant to calculating the coefficient: - P25.24 Yz Dead Time - P25.25 QA Filter Coefficient You can find details in the block circuit diagram in the appendix.
P25.24 Min: 0 s
Yz Dead Time
Default: 0.5 s
Max: 600 s
The dead time between the prefeeder bin and feed point to the weigh belt with intermediate transport equipment at a fixed speed. P25.24 Yz Dead Time = 0s is set if the speed of the transport equipment is regulated synchronously to the prefeeder.
P25.25 Min: 0 m
QA Filter Coefficient
Default: 5 m
Max: 100 m
The mean value is formed for the coefficient between the controller magnitude and resulting operating range of the prefeeder over a route that corresponds to the belt length entered. Also refer to: P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 169 -
Parameters
P25.26 Min: 1 %
QA v-Adaption
Default: 80 %
Max: 100 %
Adapting the speed of the controller magnitude.
P25.27 Min: 1 % Y
QA Upper Limit relative
Default: 1000 % Y
Max: 100000 % Y
The limit of the prefeeder controller magnitude is dependant upon the weighfeeder controller magnitude. For example: P25.27 QA Upper Limit relative = 150 % Y The controller magnitude of the feed belt: 50 % => The maximum controller magnitude to the prefeeder: 75 %
P25.28 Min: 0 m
Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge
Default: 2 m
Max: 100 m
The route section on the belt between the bulk solids feed and 2nd weighbridge.
P25.29 Min: 0 m
QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge
Default: 5 m
Max: 100 m
The mean value is formed for the coefficient between the controller magnitude and resulting operating range of the prefeeder over a route that corresponds to the belt length entered at P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation = YES-2.WB. Also refer to: P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Bin Weigher In addition to the weighfeeder, the system supports weighing and bin level control of an additional hopper. This hopper is often a control hopper for the continuous weighfeeder.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 170 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P26.01
Bin Weigher Active
Alternative:
NO YES Simulation
Default: NO
The bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales. It has the following functions: 1. displaying the bin weight 2. registering and monitoring threshold values 3. regulating the (min/max) level 4. the check scale for the check system It can also be filled via menu. The continuous fill level can also be regulated via block Bin Level Controller. P26.01 = Simulation: Bin regulation and min/max regulation are simulated. The continuous scale draws off material and filling is done with 4 × P03.01.
P26.02
LC: Load Measurement
Alternative:
n/a LC FB AI
Default: n/a
Definition of the measuring channel If FB or AI are selected the external value will be converted to a value with mV/V units that corresponds to a measurement from a load cell. The following signal processing calculates weight in kg from the signal in mV/V and is identical for all input types. Also refer to: P26.02 LC: Load Measurement P26.03 LC Characteristic Value If AI is selected, refer also to: P26.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset P26.31 Bin Level analog Input Range
P26.03 Min: 0.01 mV/V
LC Characteristic Value
Default: 2 mV/V
Max: 10 mV/V
Transfer factor of the load cell as per the data sheet. All load cells have to have the same nominal value. Also refer to: P26.04 LC Rated Capacity
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 171 -
Parameters
P26.04 Min: 0.5 kg
LC Rated Capacity
Default: 1000 kg
Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the bin's load cell rated capacities. All load cells must have the same rated data. Special case of a partially-weighed bin: If a bin is only supported x % by load cells at WZnominal1 nominal load sum and is otherwise supported on non-weighed supports (fixed bearings), the load cell rated capacity to be entered is given by P26.04 = WZnominal1 × 100 % / x % If the percentage component x % on the load cell is not known a priori, the nominal value is determined by externally weighing one bin level. Also refer to: P26.03 LC Characteristic Value
P26.05 Min: 0.25 s
LC Filter
Default: 0.25 s
Max: 300 s
Time constant of the load cell filter. The load cell filter affects all measuring load related measuring values.
P26.06
Bipolar Measurement
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Switches the measuring range for the load cell amplifier. NO: measurement can be made in one load direction only YES: the load cell can measure both compression and tensile forces As there is generally always an initial load on the load cell it is usually sufficient to analyze the signal in the direction of compression only. The YES setting is needed in rare special cases only, e.g. if a measuring eye is used to record weight. Bipolar measurement reduces the resolution of the measuring signal.
P26.07
Event: Error LC Input (Bin)
Event Group: CA
Default: W1
Number: 03
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The load cell may be faulty. Steps to take : - check the cabling and the load cell - if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU Note: The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched on even after the error has been rectified.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 172 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P26.08
Event: LC Input > MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: W1
Number: 10
The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads. Measuring range end: 125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V 175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V Possible reasons: - force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell - incorrect cabling - faulty load cell
P26.09
Nominal Bin Load
Min: 0 % LC
Max: 1000 % LC
Default: 100 % LC
The nominal bin level is the reference value for threshold values and analog outputs. It is given as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P26.04 LC Rated Capacity).
P26.10
Display Format
Alternative:
------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg --.---- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t
Default: ---.--- t
Select the dimension and the decimal places for displays.
P26.11 Min: 0 s
Display Filter
Default: 3 s
Max: 600 s
Time constant of the filter for displaying the weight value. The filter applies to the display and to the analog or serial printout but not for threshold values or control contacts.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 173 -
Parameters
P26.12 Min: -10 %
Control Level MIN
Default: 60 %
Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using MIN and MAX levels (output P26.14 DO: Bin Filling). Switched on if the bin level underruns the MIN level and switched off again when the MAX level is reached. Reference value: P26.09 Nominal Bin Load See also: P26.13 Control Level MAX
P26.13 Min: -10 %
Control Level MAX
Default: 70 %
Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using the MIN and MAX control levels (output P26.14 DO: Bin Filling). If the fill level drops below MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again when it reaches MAX. Reference value: P26.09 Nominal Bin Load Also refer to: P26.12 Control Level MIN
P26.14
DO: Bin Filling
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output to start the filling procedure. The output is set to 'do not fill' each time a scales alarm is triggered. Also refer to: P26.12 Control Level MIN, P26.13 Control Level MAX
P26.15 Min: -200 %
Bin Level MIN
Default: 5 %
Max: 200 %
MIN threshold for the bin level. Reference value: P26.09 Nominal Bin Load Also refer to: P26.16 Event: Bin Level MIN, P26.17 DO: Bin Level MIN
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 174 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P26.16
Event: Bin Level MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: W1
Number: 11
The bin level has underrun the lower threshold. Possible cause: - refilling working incorrectly Also refer to: P26.15 Bin Level MIN
P26.17
DO: Bin Level MIN
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output signal 'bin level too low'. The output becomes active if the fill level underruns the lower threshold value. It operates independent of the event class of the corresponding event. Also refer to: P26.15 Bin Level MIN
P26.18 Min: -10 %
Bin Level MAX
Default: 120 %
Max: 200 %
Max threshold for the bin level. Reference value: P26.09 Nominal Bin Load Also refer to: P26.19 Event: Bin Level MAX, P26.20 DO: Bin Level MAX
P26.19
Event: Bin Level MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: W1
Number: 11
The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold. Possible cause: - refilling not switching off correctly Also refer to: P26.18 Bin Level MAX
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 175 -
Parameters
P26.20
DO: Bin Level MAX
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output in case the hopper fill level exceeds the upper threshold. The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event. Also refer to: P26.18 Bin Level MAX
P26.21
AO: Bin Load
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the hopper fill level. Also refer to: P26.22 AO: Offset, P26.23 AO: Range
P26.22
AO: Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Output current for a bin weight of 0 %. See also: P26.21 AO: Bin Load P26.23 AO: Range P26.09 Nominal Bin Load
P26.23 Min: 0 mA
AO: Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Output current for a fill weight of 100 %. Reference value: P26.09 Nominal Bin Load See also: P26.21 AO: Bin Load, P26.22 AO: Offset
P26.24 Min: 0.5
Range Correction
Default: 1
Max: 2
This parameter is used to correct the measuring result. It is set automatically by the calibration program CB: Weight Check'. The measuring result is corrected using the factor in P26.24.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 176 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P26.25 Min: 0 kg
Tare (Bin)
Default: 0 kg
Max: 220000000 kg
The tare is calculated automatically by the calibration program TW: Tare' and set into this parameter.
P26.26 Min: 0 kg
Calibration Weight
Default: 10 kg
Max: 220000000 kg
Used to enter the test weights used for the calibration program CB: Weight Check.
P26.27
Controller in OFF-Mode
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: YES
This parameter defines whether the filling weight control (P26.12 Control Level MIN, P26.13 Control Level MAX, P26.14 DO: Bin Filling) and bin regulation (block: bin level controller) are always active or only when the scale is switched on.
P26.28
DI: Bin Load Sensor
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Digital input for a bin load sensor. The probe has the function of keeping the bin from overflowing. If the sensor is activated, filling is discontinued for 60 seconds or is aborted. - output as per P26.14 DO: Bin Filling to OFF - output as per P27.04 DO: Feeder ON to OFF - controller magnitude (P27.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level) to 0 and controller in base position Filling is aborted regardless of the filling source (regulator, controller, manual) and the event class (P26.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor).
P26.29
Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor
Event Group: CO
Default: W1
Number: 04
The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper. Possible causes: - the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shutting off soon enough. - the refill equipment is not closing correctly. - the upper fill threshold level P26.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high. An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjustment of the calculation of the feed rate.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 177 -
Parameters
P26.30
Bin Level analog Input Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Raising the analog input for the bin fill level of the additional bin The input flow corresponding to a signal of 0 mV/V. Effective only when P26.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI... Also refer to: 'Appendix' chapter in the manual → Using alternative signals (such as analog and fieldbus) for DMS inputs' P26.02 LC: Load Measurement P26.31 Bin Level analog Input Range
P26.31 Min: 0 mA
Bin Level analog Input Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The sensitivity adjustment of the analog input for weighing the additional bin Converting the analog value into the voltage signal corresponding to a load cell: The measured value [mV/V] = (input flow – P26.30) / (P26.31 – P26.30) * P26.03 where: P26.30 = Bin Level analog Input Offset P26.31 = Bin Level analog Input Range P26.03 = LC Characteristic Value Effective only when P26.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI... Also refer to: 'Appendix' chapter in the manual → Using alternative signals (such as analog and fieldbus) for DMS inputs' P26.02 LC: Load Measurement P26.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Bin Level Controller This continuous controller keeps the fill level in the bin at the setpoint level. Precondition: weight measurement of the separate bin has been activated (P26.01 Bin Weigher Active = YES). Digital control of the separate bin filling can be found in the Bin Weigher block. Details on the controller and the controller block diagram can be found in the appendix. P27.01
Bin Controller ON
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Activates the continuous controller for the fill level of the additional bin. Also refer to: P26.01 Bin Weigher Active
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 178 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P27.02
Filling Type
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: YES
Defines the standard direction. YES: The controlled organ fills the bin. NO: The controlled organ empties the bin.
P27.03
AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Output signal for the fill level controller actuating variable.
P27.04
DO: Feeder ON
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Output channel for switching on the continuous feed element (control element). The output is set to off, the controller magnitude is set to 0 and the controller is put into the base position with every scale alarm. The automatic check system does the regulating during its measuring phase.
P27.05 Min: 0 kg
Setpoint Bin Level
Default: 0 kg
Max: 1000000 kg
Setpoint for the hopper in normal operation.
P27.06
Feeder Constant
Min: 0 (kg/h)/mA
Default: 0 (kg/h)/mA
Max: 1000000 (kg/h)/mA
Proportional constant of the conveyor element. The parameter designates the feed rate for a flow of 1 mA at the output P27.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level.
P27.07 Min: 0 s
Dead Time TT
Default: 3 s
Max: 60000 s
Transport times between the regulated conveyor element (control element) and the bin if the transporting feeder element has a fixed conveying speed.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 179 -
Parameters
P27.08
P-Component KP
Min: 0 mA/kg
Max: 10000 mA/kg
Default: 0 mA/kg
Proportional component of the fill level controller. An I controller results at KP = 0 that leads to a control circuit with an instable structure with this regulation. This setting should therefore be avoided.
P27.09 Min: 0 s
I-Component TN
Default: 0 s
Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the controller integral component for the bin fill level. The integral component reaches the same magnitude during this period as the proportion with a constant control deviation. The integral component is switched off at P27.09 I-Component TN = 0.
P27.10 Min: 0 s
D Portion TV
Default: 0 s
Max: 60000 s
Differential component of the bin fill level controller. The differential component is switched off if P27.10 D Portion TV = 0.
P27.11 Min: 0 s
D Filter TD
Default: 0 s
Max: 60000 s
Filter time constant for the differential component. This value should not be greater than the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3 * P27.10 is normal. Also refer to: P27.10 D Portion TV
P27.12 Min: 0 mA
Bypass
Default: 10 mA
Max: 20 mA
Constant for pilot control of the conveyor into a bin that is emptied by the continuous scale. This constant describes the current as a controller magnitude that produces a feed rate at the conveyor bin corresponding to the nominal feed rate (P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate) of the continuous scale. The bypass is adjusted so that the fill level of the bin is retained (outflow = inflow) if the controller is switched off (P27.08 P-Component KP, P27.09 I-Component TN, P27.10 D Portion TV = 0) and the scale is switched on. The bypass can be changed in small increments until the service value yBi oscillates around 0, even if the controller is active. (The designs with different signs apply correspondingly to P27.02 Filling Type = NO.)
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 180 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P27.13
Bypass D Portion
Min: 0 s
Default: 0 s
Max: 60000 s
In critical circumstances such as with a small hopper or long dead time, the D portion for the bypass can relieve the controller if there are large changes in weighfeeder setpoints. The control deviation time interval can be minimized. Recommendation: 0 under normal circumstances and approximately TT/2 (P27.07 Dead Time TT) under critical circumstances
P27.14
Controller Magnitude Offset
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Increase of the actuating variable for the conveyor element. In general parameters P27.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P27.15 Lower Limit are set to the same value.
P27.15
Lower Limit
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
Internal lower threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element. In general parameters P27.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P27.15 Lower Limit are set to the same value.
P27.16
Upper Limit
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 20 mA
Upper threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
P27.17 Min: 0 kg
Dead Band Deviation
Default: 0 kg
Max: 10000 kg
The effective control deviation Xd(w) at the controller input can be reduced by the factor of P27.18 Dead Band Factor within a range of ± P27.17 Dead Band Deviation. This can bring about more settled (slower) control in the stable state (near the setpoint) for the bin weight with malfunctions in the weight signal.
P27.18 Min: 0
Dead Band Factor
Default: 0
Max: 1
Factor for the control deviation for a fill level close to the setpoint. Also refer to: P27.17 Dead Band Deviation
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 181 -
Parameters
P27.19 Min: 0 s
Setpoint Filter
Default: 0.5 s
Max: 200 s
The setpoint filter for the fill level setpoint. This can prevent overshoot with setpoint changes effected by the check system (KME).
P27.20 Min: 0 s
Flow Rate Filter
Default: 0.5 s
Max: 200 s
Time constant for the filter in the fill level actual value. Rapid control reaction requires a low time constant. The value set is automatically taken into account by the calibration program BIN: Controller Optimization'.
P27.21
DI: Init. Controller
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Contact initializes all parts of the controller that store information. Bypass and increase only are active as long as this is applied.
P27.22
Bin Setpoint source
Alternative:
PARAMETER FB
Default: PARAMETER
This parameter defines whether the fill level setpoint is given by parameter P27.05 Setpoint Bin Level or by the fieldbus interface (ID: hex 0x0266 or dec 614).
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - 2nd Weighbridge The parameters of this group are only relevant if the feeder scale is designed with two weighing stations. This is where the parameters for the weighbridge are adjusted to bulk solids feed. The second weighbridge is used for improving belt load regulation. P28.01
2nd Weighbridge active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Activating the functions linked to the optional weighbridge in the area of the bulk solids feed onto the feed belt. In particular, the second weighbridge can be used with feeders that have upstream prefeeders and substantially improve belt load regulation there. The second weighbridge generally is less accurate than the first or main weighbridge. The second weighbridge is used: - on feeders with upstream prefeeders, - with a long transport route from bulk solids feed to the main weighbridge, and - slow-moving feed belts Also refer to: group of parameters Belt Load Controller
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 182 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P28.02
2nd Weighbridge
Alternative:
n/a LC AI FB
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the load on the second weighbridge. If LC is selected, refer also to: P28.03 LC Characteristic Value P28.04 LC Rated Capacity If AI is selected, refer also to: P28.22 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset P28.23 2nd Bridge analog Input Range
P28.03
LC Characteristic Value
Min: 0.01 mV/V
Default: 2 mV/V
Max: 10 mV/V
The transmission characteristic value for the load cell as per the nameplate.
P28.04 Min: 0.001 kg
LC Rated Capacity
Default: 200 kg
Max: 220000000 kg
The total of the rated loads of power intake on the second load cell. If several load cells are used for this measuring point, all have to have the same nominal data. Fixed bearings are counted as similar load cells.
P28.05
Effective Platform Length
Min: 0.001 m
Max: 100 m
Default: 0.18 m
Effective weigh bridge length. In systems with a weighing roller that rotates in the direction of belt travel, the active length is half of the distance between the non-weighing rollers on either side of the weighing roller.
P28.06 Min: 0.25 s
LC Filter
Default: 0.25 s
Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value should be left at the factory setting. Note: filtering the load cell signal has an impact on the control characteristics of belt load regulation.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 183 -
Parameters
P28.07
Event: Error LC Input (2nd Bridge)
Event Group: CA
Default: W1
Number: 04
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected at all or has been disconnected. The load cell may be faulty. Actions: - check the cabling and the load cell - check the load cell
P28.08 Min: -200 %
2nd Bridge MIN
Default: 5 %
Max: 200 %
The lower threshold value for the load on the second weighbridge in percent of rated load (service value).
P28.09
Event: 2nd Bridge MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: W2
Number: 12
The load on the second weighbridge has fallen below the threshold value. Possible causes: - no bulk solids - defect on the prefeeder - weighing station stuck - belt load regulation poorly adjusted - defect in load cell Actions: - make a visual check of the bulk solids on the belt - use a calibration weight to check the weighing station
P28.10
DO: 2nd Bridge MIN
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active if the belt load drops below the threshold value P28.08 2nd Bridge MIN. The output functions independent of the class of the associated event.
P28.11 Min: -10 %
2nd Bridge MAX
Default: 150 %
Max: 200 %
The upper limit for the load on the second weighbridge in percent of the rated load (service value).
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 184 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P28.12
Event: 2nd Bridge MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: W2
Number: 12
The load on the second weighbridge is in excess of the threshold value. Possible causes: - the belt is covered - defect on the prefeeder - weighing station stuck - belt load regulation poorly adjusted - defect in load cell Actions: - make a visual check of the bulk solids on the belt - use a calibration weight to check the weighing station
P28.13
DO: 2nd Bridge MAX
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active when the belt load is in excess of the threshold value P28.11 2nd Bridge MAX. The output functions independent of the class of the associated event.
P28.14
Range Correction (2nd Bridge)
Min: 0.2
Default: 1
Max: 5
The correction factor for measured value acquisition.
P28.15
Tare (2nd Bridge)
Min: 0 kg/m
Default: 0 kg/m
Max: 10000 kg/m
The measured load with an empty feed belt. This value is automatically ascertained and entered by the calibration program TW: Tare.
P28.16
Controller active
Alternative:
NO YES
P28.17
P-Component KP
Min: 0
Default: NO
Default: 0.5
Max: 100
The proportion of the controller for the belt load. Only relevant for P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation = NO
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 185 -
Parameters
P28.18 Min: 0 s
I-Component TN
Default: 10 s
Max: 1000 s
The reset time for the integral component of the controller for the belt load. Only relevant for P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation = NO
P28.19
Analog Output 2nd Bridge
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
The definition of the analog output channel for the load on the second weighbridge. Also refer to: P28.20 2nd Bridge Offset P28.21 2nd Bridge Range
P28.20
2nd Bridge Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The output current for the 0 % load on the second weighbridge Also refer to: P28.19 Analog Output 2nd Bridge P28.21 2nd Bridge Range
P28.21 Min: 0 mA
2nd Bridge Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output current for a load on the second weighbridge corresponding to nominal belt loading (service value). Also refer to: P28.20 2nd Bridge Offset P28.20 2nd Bridge Offset
P28.22
2nd Bridge analog Input Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The input flow for a load of 0 %. Only relevant if P28.02 2nd Weighbridge = AI Also refer to: P28.23 2nd Bridge analog Input Range
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 186 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P28.23 Min: 0 mA
2nd Bridge analog Input Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The input flow for a load of 0 % of the nominal belt load (service value). Only relevant if P28.02 2nd Weighbridge = AI Also refer to: P28.22 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset
7.4.2.29 7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - Check System The check system controls and corrects a continuous scales using the change in bin weight; the changes in weight result only from the bulk material passing over continuous scales. During measurement all other inand outflows must be stopped. A signals flow chart for control can be found in the appendix. P29.01
Type of Check System
Alternative:
NO Single Unit Separated Units Filling System Extern
Default: NO
Selects the control concept NO: No check system Single unit: The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin form a mechanical unit and are weighed together. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper. Separated Units: The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin are decoupled both mechanically and with regards to weighing. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper. Filling system: The continuous weighfeeder fills the control bin during the check. External: The control procedure is controlled by a higher-order system. The DISOCONT Tersus only supplies the relevant measured values. The following parameters only are effective: - P29.27 DO: Check Measurement Active - P29.30 Absolute Range - P29.31 Relative Range The following parameter description relates primarily to the 'single unit' and 'separated units' types. The appendix has a flow chart.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 187 -
Parameters
P29.02
Auto Correction
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Setting for the correction unit once measurement is finished. NO: Correction must be started manually YES: Correction is performed automatically if the correction result lies within the set thresholds (P29.30 Absolute Range, P29.31 Relative Range).
P29.03
Cyclic Auto Start
Alternative:
NO Tare Span
Default: NO
Automatic start of the check system. NO: No automatic start Tare: Automatic start for controlling and correcting tare or additive effects of errors. Span: Automatic start for controlling and correcting the proportionality factor between the measured value and actual feed rate. Correction of multiplicatively acting effects of errors. It starts after a pause preselected with the parameters P29.04 Cycle Time. It also makes sense to preselect automatic correction (P29.02 Auto Correction = YES).
P29.04 Min: 0.01 h
Cycle Time
Default: 0.5 h
Max: 100 h
With automatic start selected, the standby time between the end of one check and the start of the next. Also refer to: P29.03 Cyclic Auto Start
P29.05
Release Check System
Alternative:
n/a FB DI
Default: n/a
Defines the input that will activate a check by the system controller. If no active signal given: 1. no check will be started 2. a running check will be canceled. The setting 'n/a' makes the check system continuously active.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 188 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P29.06
Event: No Check Release
Event Group: CH
Default: W2
Number: 09
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized one. Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing authorization.
P29.07
Check Start Span
Alternative:
OP DI FB
Default: OP
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a range correction.
P29.08
Check Start Tare
Alternative:
OP DI FB
Default: OP
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a tare correction.
P29.09
Accept Correction
Alternative:
OP DI FB
Default: OP
Determine the signal source for correction of the continuous scales on the basis of the outcome of the check system. Once measurement has ended the check system moves to the acknowledgement phase and waits for the correcting command, when P29.02 Auto Correction = NO. Corrections can also by made manually if the tolerances P29.30 Absolute Range or P29.31 Relative Range have been exceeded. Correction is triggered by the input flank.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 189 -
Parameters
P29.10
Finish Check Measurement
Alternative:
OP DI FB
Default: OP
Determines the source of the signal for canceling a running check. The command acts in all phases of measurement. The calibration of the continuous scale is not changed by the cancellation. The input is flank-controlled. The check must be canceled if the measuring system is in acknowledgement phase and if the control outcome is not to be used to correct the continuous scales.
P29.11
Set: Quantity or Rotations
Alternative:
Quantity Circuits
Default: Quantity
Defining the condition for the length of the control measurement Quantity: The measurement is finished when the quantity of bulk solids given in P29.13 Check Quantity has been conveyed. Circuits: The measurement is finished when the belt has progressed the belt length given in P29.13 Check Quantity.
P29.12 Min: 0
Check Circuits
Default: 0
Max: 100
The length of belt progress measured in complete belt circuits after which the control measurement is finished. The value should be an integer, in particular if BIC has not been activated (P18.03 BIC Active = NO) . Only relevant if P29.11 Set: Quantity or Rotations = circuits
P29.13 Min: 0 kg
Check Quantity
Default: 0 kg
Max: 100000000 kg
The quantity of bulk solids that should be discharged as a check. The quantity selected should be large enough to minimize the effects of errors when determining the control quantity. By the same token the hopper should have sufficient capacity for the control quantity.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 190 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P29.14 Min: 0 kg
Storage Quantity
Default: 500 kg
Max: 100000000 kg
The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level for the start of a check. If needed, material will be filled to this level before measurement begins. Conditions: 1. The storage quantity must be smaller than the maximum control fill level: P29.14 < P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight. If this condition is not met, the check will end after starting with the message CH 03 (max. check fill level). 2. The storage quantity must be greater than the sum of the check quantity, the minimum check fill level and an excess allowance: P29.14 Storage Quantity > P29.13 Check Quantity + P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight + MT + MB If this condition is infringed the fill level will fall below the min. control fill level during the check. The measurement would then cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level). MT = losses caused by the settling time P29.21 Damping Time. MB = losses caused by the blind distance P29.22 Blind Distance (only with P29.01 Type of Check System = single unit).
P29.15 Min: 0 kg
Minimum Check Quantity
Default: 0 kg
Max: 10000 kg
The minimum quantity of bulk solids that has to be discharged to ensure that the result of the control measurement is seen as valid. Only relevant if P29.11 Set: Quantity or Rotations = circuits
P29.16
Event: Minimum Check Quantity
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 01
The event is identified when the control measurement was finished after the given number of belt circuits before the given minimum quantity of bulk solids has been discharged. Possible cause: The belt load is less than expected. The result of the check might be afflicted with an impermissibly large defect. Remedy: Increase the belt load
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 191 -
Parameters
P29.17 Min: 0 kg
Minimum Fill Weight
Default: 0 kg
Max: 100000000 kg
Bulk material buffer that must remain in the hopper during a check so that the flow characteristics and the material density at the feeding point do not change significantly. The measurement would cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level) if the material quantity falls below this amount. Reference value: P26.09 Nominal Bin Load
P29.18
Event: Minimum Fill Weight
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 02
The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight during a check. Possible cause: - bulk material density higher than specified - unfavorable settings in P29.13 Check Quantity or P29.12 Check Circuits, P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight or P29.14 Storage Quantity
P29.19 Min: 0 kg
Maximum Fill Weight
Default: 1000 kg
Max: 100000000 kg
The maximum check fill weight is the greatest fill level allowed during a check. The measuring period will not begin until the fill level falls below this value. The permissible operating range of the control measurement within the bin fill level is determined by the two threshold values Min P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight and Max P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight.
P29.20
Event: Maximum Fill Weight
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 03
The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is finished early. Possible cause: The storage quantity (P29.14 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts. In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 192 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P29.21 Min: 0 s
Damping Time
Default: 3 s
Max: 3600 s
The waiting period from switching off filling to starting the control measurement. The process variables should stabilize within this period. This time is also observed even if the bin was not filled shortly beforehand.
P29.22 Min: 0 %
Blind Distance
Default: 0 %
Max: 100 %
If P29.01 Type of Check System = single unit a) P17.01 VAP Active = NO blind distance from the center of the weighbridge to the material discharge as % of the overall belt length b) P17.01 = YES the blind distance is 0. Falls P29.01 Type of Check System = separated unit a) P17.01 VAP Active = NO blind distance from the material feed to the middle of the weighbridge. b) P17.01 = YES the route from the material feed to the material discharge.
P29.23
DO: Control Started
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the message 'control active'. The signal is active from the start of the control until successful correction or cancellation.
P29.24
Feeder Stopped
Alternative:
n/a FB DI
Default: n/a
The On/Off feedback from the filling element. The settling time (P29.21 Damping Time) starts with the Off signal when the check has started. The check will wait for the feedback signal (the P29.25 Event: Feeder Not Stopped event) before starting the settling time if filling is switched on. The check will be canceled without a response if the conveying element On feedback is received after starting settling time.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 193 -
Parameters
P29.25
Event: Feeder Not Stopped
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 08
The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped. Possible cause: - long time required to end filling - incorrect control sequence for bin filling
P29.26
Event: Prepare Check Measurement
Event Group: CH
Default: W2
Number: 10
The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than the maximum check fill level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight). For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
P29.27
DO: Check Measurement Active
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the message that the check system is in the measuring phase.
P29.28
Event: Expect Acceptance
Event Group: CH
Default: W2
Number: 11
At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator: a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales b) discard correction result and cancel If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded (P29.02 Auto Correction = YES). Step: Communicate decision about correction
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 194 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P29.29
DO:Expect Acceptance
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for the information that the check system is waiting for the operator's decision at the end. The output is independent of the event class. Also refer to: P29.28 Event: Expect Acceptance
P29.30 Min: 0 %
Absolute Range
Default: 10 %
Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the sum of all previous corrections. Correction will not be made automatically if the threshold would be exceeded by a check. An event will be identified in each case. See also: P29.32 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error P29.34 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
P29.31 Min: 0 %
Relative Range
Default: 3 %
Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the currently pending correction. Correction will not be made automatically if the error overshoots the threshold. An event will be identified in each case. See also: P29.33 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error P29.35 Event: Relative Span Correction Error
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 195 -
Parameters
P29.32
Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 04
The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the threshold value P29.30 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis. Cause of the event: - substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station) - defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects) Actions: - checking the weighing station of the feeder scale - taring the feeder scale - checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)
P29.33
Event: Relative Tare Correction Error Default: W1
Event Group: CH
Number: 05
The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value P29.31 Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. It is monitored and reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis. Cause of the event: - substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station) - defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects) Actions: - checking the weighing station of the feeder scale - taring the feeder scale - checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 196 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P29.34
Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 06
The threshold in P29.30 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for multiplicative errors. Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 % Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a % B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in continuous scales counter) K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.02 Range Correction
P29.35
Event: Relative Span Correction Error
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 07
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P29.31 Relative Range. Brel = (1 - B )× 100 Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a % B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in continuous scales counter)
P29.36 Min: 0
Correction Evaluation
Default: 1
Max: 1
The extent of the correction is determined by the factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation. There is no correction with P29.36 = 0 and the complete defect ascertained is corrected with P29.36 = 1. P29.36 = 1 is normally set for the first control measurement to make a basic setting. Subsequent corrections, in particular when checks are automatically started, are normally carried out with P29.36 < 1. This makes it possible to filter the control results and eliminate random measuring errors in the control measurement.
P29.37 Min: 0 s
Correction Speed
Default: 0 s
Max: 3600 s
To ensure that the correction does not bring about any feed rate jumps, it can be automatically carried out in small steps. If 0 is entered, it is corrected in one step. P29.37 defines the time between two steps of 0.1 % of the nominal load (at tare correction) or 0.1 % of P10.02 Range Correction (with range correction).
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 197 -
Parameters
P29.38
AO: Check Measurement Result
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Defines the analog output channel for the result of the control (loss in bin weight) / (advancement in continuous scales counter). Updating is made at the start of an acknowledgement phase. The output value is retained until the next acknowledgement phase. The correction quantification in P29.36 Correction Evaluation is disregarded at output. Signal scaling is linear between 4 ... 20 mA = 0.9 ... 1.1. Examples: 4 mA = 0.9 12 mA = 1 20 mA = 1.1
P29.39
DO: Check Gate
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P29.01 Type of Check System = Filling System). Procedure: the control gate will divert the material either through the normal conveyance path or into the control bin. The correct position of the control gate can be monitored by the digital input 'Echo Control Gate' (P29.40 Check Gate Feedback).
P29.40
Check Gate Feedback
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
This parameter only relates to the check by weight increase in the bin (P29.01 Type of Check System = filling system). Defines the input channel for the position return signal from the control gate. The return signal is not monitored with the setting 'n/a'. If there is no feedback from the control gate within the monitoring time (P29.41 Check Gate Time), the control gate error event is set and the KME is canceled. Also refer to: P29.39 DO: Check Gate, P29.42 Event: Check Gate Error
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 198 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P29.41 Min: 0 s
Check Gate Time
Default: 0 s
Max: 3600 s
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P29.01 Type of Check System = Filling System). Tolerated time allowed for the control gate to move between command and position return signal. Also refer to: P29.39 DO: Check Gate P29.40 Check Gate Feedback P29.42 Event: Check Gate Error
P29.42
Event: Check Gate Error
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 12
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P29.01 Type of Check System = Filling System). The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time. Possible cause: - gate has no power - gate is stuck Also refer to: P29.39 DO: Check Gate P29.40 Check Gate Feedback P29.41 Check Gate Time
P29.43 Min: 0 %
Limit Max. Bin Error
Default: 0 %
Max: 10000 %
The bin fill level is measured at the start and the end of the measuring phase. Both measuring points are monitored for disturbances in the measurement. If the malfunctions exceed the threshold value in P29.43, another attempt at measuring will be started after a time defined by P29.21 Damping Time. However, if this attempt also returns excessively high malfunctions, the check will be canceled, the result discarded and an event identified (P29.44 Event: Bin Error). Disturbances are not monitored if the setting is 0%. How to set: 1. set the threshold to 10,000 % 2. Monitor the service display 'KME Window' during the check procedure and note the max. value. 3. enter approximately 3 times the value in the parameter P29.43 Limit Max. Bin Error.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 199 -
Parameters
P29.44
Event: Bin Error
Event Group: CH
Default: W1
Number: 13
Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check. The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has been set to IG. Possible cause: - force bypasses at the control bin - pressure forces acting on the control bin - wind forces acting on the control bin Also refer to: P29.43 Limit Max. Bin Error
P29.45
DO: Correction Error
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for displaying an error condition of the control measurement. The output is set if one of the events CH 04 - CH 07 occurs (measuring result lies outside tolerance levels). The check is finished, although the correction has not been carried out.
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - Moisture For certain processes, other units than units of weight per time may be more relevant to the feeding process. One example is bulk material moisture. The relevant parameter is not the weight of the moist material but rather the weight of the dry material. The measuring system can correct bulk solid properties such as these. This requires that the disturbance variable, e.g. the moisture or ash content, be measured and the result sent to the system. The measuring system then calculates the bulk solid components relevant to the process and feeds it instead of the total weight. P30.01
Moisture Active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
The actual feed rate can be corrected with the moisture block. The corrected value will always be used for the controller input and the batch counter if moisture correction is active. The pulses for an external counter can be output configured with P30.14 Pulse Counter corrected, corrected or not corrected. NO: No correction YES: Weight signal is corrected The parameters relevant to moisture correction are visible only when correction is active.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 200 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P30.02
Moisture Select
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
With factory default value "n/a" , the correction is not active.
P30.03
AI: Moisture Measurement
Alternative:
n/a AI
Default: n/a
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture content. Also refer to: P30.04 Nominal Moisture P30.05 Moisture Offset P30.06 Moisture Range
P30.04 Min: 0 %
Nominal Moisture
Default: 20 %
Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight. Also refer to: P30.03 AI: Moisture Measurement P30.05 Moisture Offset P30.06 Moisture Range
P30.05
Moisture Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Current for a correction value of 0% Reference value: P30.04 Nominal Moisture Also refer to: P30.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P30.06 Moisture Range
P30.06 Min: 0 mA
Moisture Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Current for a correction value of 100% Reference value: P30.04 Nominal Moisture Also refer to: P30.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P30.05 Moisture Offset
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 201 -
Parameters
P30.07
DO: Moisture active
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Definition of the output channel for signal "Correction active". Also refer to: P30.02 Moisture Select
P30.08 Min: 0 %
Moisture MAX
Default: 10 %
Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall weight. Also refer to: P30.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P30.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P30.09
DO: Moisture MAX
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has exceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event. Also refer to: P30.08 Moisture MAX, P30.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P30.10
Event: Moisture MAX
Event Group: MF
Default: W1
Number: 05
The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise. Possible cause: - extremely damp bulk material - moisture measurement measuring error Also refer to: P30.08 Moisture MAX, P30.09 DO: Moisture MAX
P30.11
AO: Flow Rate corrected
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture). Also refer to: P30.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P30.13 AO: Flow Rate Range
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 202 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P30.12
AO: Flow Rate Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Output current for a performance of 0 %. Reference value: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
P30.13
AO: Flow Rate Range
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output current for a performance of 100 %. Reference value: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
P30.14
Pulse Counter corrected
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter. NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction factor, e.g. moisture.
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Dead Time The system allows the switch-on command and setpoints to be delayed. This is a useful function if several consecutive feeders operate as a collective system and the batch must be correct at all times. The first feeder receives the control commands instantaneously, the following feeder receives them after a delay corresponding to the transit time of the bulk material from the first feeder to the collection point (= dead time). P31.01
Dead Time Active
Alternative:
NO Setpoint + ON/OFF Setpoint ON/OFF
Default: NO
There is a dead time element for the setpoint and ON/OFF command each, each of which can be activated separately. NO: no dead time active Setpoint: dead time active for the setpoint only ON/OFF: dead time for ON/OFF only active Setpoint + ON/OF: dead time for setpoint and ON/OFF active
P31.02 Min: 0 s
Dead Time
Default: 0 s
Max: 600 s
The value for dead time is valid for start/stop commands and setpoint changes.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 203 -
Parameters
P31.03
Setpoint Select
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
Activates the setpoint delay. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with no delay.
P31.04
Setpoint Clock ON
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P31.05
ON/OFF Select
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
Activates the delay for start/stop commands. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with no delay.
P31.06
ON/OFF Clock ON
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P31.07
Time Elements Preassign
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
With this command the timing elements are preallocated with the current setpoint or the current ON/OFF command.
P31.08
Initialise Time Elements
Alternative:
n/a DI FB
Default: n/a
The setpoint element is preallocated with ZERO at initialization and the ON/OFF element is preallocated with OFF.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 204 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P31.09
DO: Dead Time Active
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint or active dead-time ON/OFF.
P31.10
DO: Setpoint Active
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint.
P31.11
DO: ON/OFF Active
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Digital output active dead-time ON/OFF.
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Linearization The parameters of this group define the characteristic curve of a non-linear external component and offset its effect. Measured value acquisition on weighfeeders is slightly non-linear dependant upon belt loading. 4 points along the characteristic curve are used for linearization. The points are determined from the actual (correct) value of the quantity of bulk solids conveyed over a period of time, ascertained by a separate check scale at the appropriate belt load, and the quantity of bulk solids added up by the weighfeeder over the period of the measurement. Another point of the characteristic curve is the origin (0% / 0%). The characteristic curve is continued at a continuous gradient above the highest point. The reference for all linearizing points is nominal belt loading (service value). P32.01
Linearization ON
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Load measuring can be linearized with this parameters. The 4 linearization points can be determined by calibration with calibration weights or using material. Not required or not measured points must be laid either outside the measuring range or must be interpolated. Consider the location of the linearization in the signal processing (--> appendix). Detailed calibration instructions are in the appendix.
P32.02 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization S1
Default: 25 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 1: Actual belt load, e.g. determined using calibration weights or by material measurement.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 205 -
Parameters
P32.03 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization I1
Default: 25 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 1: The load measured from the weighfeeder. Reference: nominal load (service value)
P32.04 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization S2
Default: 50 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 2. Otherwise as P32.02 Linearization S1
P32.05 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization I2
Default: 50 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 2. Refer to P32.03 Linearization I1 for a description
P32.06 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization S3
Default: 75 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 3. Otherwise as P32.02 Linearization S1
P32.07 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization I3
Default: 75 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 3. Refer to P32.03 Linearization I1 for a description
P32.08 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization S4
Default: 100 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 4. Otherwise as P32.02 Linearization S1
P32.09 Min: 0.01 % Q
Linearization I4
Default: 100 % Q
Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 4. Refer to P32.03 Linearization I1 for a description
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 206 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P32.10
Event: Linearization Error
Event Group: CA
Default: W2
Number: 05
Not a monotonically increasing curve. A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when: - linearization is switched on, - a parameter is altered
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Flow Gate The parameters of this group are only relevant if the prefeeder is designed as a position-regulated feed gate for the bulk solids to the feeder scale. P33.01
AI: Position Flow Gate
Alternative:
n/a AI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the feedback signal for the position of the prefeeder. Also refer to: P33.02 AI: Offset P33.03 AI: Range
P33.02
AI: Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The input flow at the "just closed" position of the feed gate.
P33.03 Min: 0 mA
AI: Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The input flow for the nominal position is 100 %. There should be a material flow of 100 % of the nominal operating range P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate at the nominal position under nominal conditions for the bulk solids.
P33.04
AO: Position Flow Gate
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
The definition of the analog output channel with the information on the position of the prefeeder to external equipment. Norming via P33.05 AO: Offset and P33.06 AO: Range
P33.05
AO: Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The output current for the 0 % prefeeder position is opened ('just closed').
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 207 -
Parameters
P33.06 Min: 0 mA
AO: Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The output current for the 100 % prefeeder position is opened ('just completely opened').
P33.07
Event: MIN Flow Gate
Event Group: CO
Default: W2
Number: 02
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the minimum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment. Possible causes: Defects in the prefeeder control unit Actions: Check the control unit.
P33.08
Position MIN Flow Gate
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the signal from the limit switch on the prefeeder for the minimum open position.
P33.09
Event: MAX Flow Gate
Event Group: CO
Default: W2
Number: 03
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maximum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment. Possible causes: Defects in the prefeeder control unit Actions: Check the control unit.
P33.10
Position MAX Flow Gate
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channels for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder for the maximum open position.
7.4.2.34 7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - 2-Sensor Slip The slippage of the feed belt can be ascertained either with a mark put into the belt or by measuring the speed at two different points. In general, one measuring point is mounted on the belt drive and the second
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 208 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
measuring point is mounted on a roll moved by the belt. Monitoring them ascertains the ratio of the two speeds and reports any deviations that indicate that the belt is slipping through or tearing. Slippage can be identified more quickly through the second sensor and the appendix contains details on evaluating it. P34.01
2-Sensor Slip active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Activating slippage identification over two speed sensors.
P34.02
Source Sensor 1
Alternative:
Speed DI
Default: Speed
Defining the signal that is supposed to be evaluated for the first speed measurement. Generally, the sensor on the drive motor is used. Speed: The speed sensor on the drive motor is used DI: A separate sensor is used. The input is defined for the sensor in P34.03 DI: Sensor 1.
P34.03
DI: Sensor 1
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the first sensor at P34.02 Source Sensor 1 = DI. The requirements made of the input are described in the appendix.
P34.04
Characteristic Value Sensor 1
Min: 0.01 I/m
Max: 1000000 I/m
Default: 100 I/m
The number of pulses of the first sensor per meter of the conveyor belt The parameter is only relevant to P34.02 Source Sensor 1 = DI
P34.05
DI: Sensor 2
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the second sensor. The requirements made of the input are described in the appendix.
P34.06
Characteristic Value Sensor 2
Min: 0.01 I/m
Max: 1000000 I/m
Default: 100 I/m
The number of pulses of the second sensor per meter of the conveyor belt
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 209 -
Parameters
P34.07 Min: 0 % LB
Slip Value 2
Default: 2 % LB
Max: 10 % LB
The threshold value for slippage per belt circuit in percent of a complete belt circuit.
P34.08
Event: Slip 2
Event Group: WM
Default: W1
Number: 05
The event is identified when the slippage exceeds the set threshold value. Possible causes: - contamination on the belt, the head pulley or the pulley with the second sensor - the belt slips on the head pulley (higher draw-off strength and bulk solids stuck in the inlet) - sluggish pulley with the second sensor Actions: - make a visual check of the bulk solids situation - check the drive motor and gear - check the second pulley
P34.09
DO: Slip 2
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active when the slippage is in excess of the threshold value in P34.07 Slip Value 2. The output functions independant of the event class set in P34.08 Event: Slip 2.
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Pressure Compensation Pressure compensation has the function of compensating the vertical forces resulting from pressures on the bin in the weight signal. The pressure is measured, the resulting force acting on the surface area affected by the applied pressure calculated and the bin weight value corrected additively. P35.01
Compensation Active
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Activates pressure compensation. If compensation is not activated, the associated parameters will not be displayed in EasyServe.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 210 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P35.02
Compensation Source
Alternative:
n/a AI LC
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the pressure signal. Also refer to: P35.03 Pressure Characteristic Value P35.04 Pressure Rated Cap. Also refer to the following when adjusting P35.02 = AI : P35.18 Compensation analog Input Offset P35.19 Compensation analog Input Range
P35.03
Pressure Characteristic Value
Min: 0.01 mV/V
Default: 2 mV/V
Max: 10 mV/V
Nominal sensitivity of the pressure sensors (nameplate).
P35.04
Pressure Rated Cap.
Min: 0.001 Bar
Default: 0.5 Bar
Max: 2000 Bar
Nominal capacity of the pressure sensors (nameplate).
P35.05 Min: 0.25 s
Filter Pressure Value DMS
Default: 0.25 s
Max: 300 s
The filter was adjusted for the input signal if P35.02 Compensation Source = LC.
P35.06
Event: DMS-Input
Event Group: CA
Default: A
Number: 07
The event is identified if there is a substantial defect in the signal of the pressure sensor and the pressure signal is read in through the VME interface. Possible causes: - defective sensor cable - sensor improperly connected
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 211 -
Parameters
P35.07
Event: DMS-Input > MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: A
Number: 14
This event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is over its nominal value. Possible causes: - overload on the pressure sensor - defective sensor
P35.08
Event: DMS-Input < MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: W1
Number: 10
The event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is substantially below zero. Possible causes: - sensor improperly connected - unexpected pressure conditions - defective sensor
P35.09
Zero
Min: -100 Bar
Max: 1000 Bar
Default: 0 Bar
The compensation of a potential offset of the pressure sensor Setting: P35.09 = 0 Read off the service value of the pressure with atmospheric pressure on the sensor Adjust the value read in P35.09 Finally, the service display should display the value 0 for pressure.
P35.10
Norming
Min: 0 kg/Bar
Max: 220000000 kg/Bar
Default: 0 kg/Bar
Adjusting the proportionality factor between pressure and the force resulting from pressure on the load cells of the bin. Setting: - initially adjust P35.09 - note the weight m0 of the bin at the pressure = 0 - impinge the bin with any (although constant) pressure - read the service value of the pressure (p1) - note the weight m1 of the bin - adjust P35.10 = (m1 - m0) / p1 The bin weight shown should now always be m0 regardless of the pressure.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 212 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P35.11 Min: -200 %
Pressure-MIN
Default: 0 %
Max: 200 %
The minimum threshold value for pressure monitoring. Reference value: P35.04
P35.12
Event: Pressure-MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: W2
Number: 16
The pressure in the bin has fallen below the lower threshold. Possible causes: - unexpected pressure conditions - soiled sensor - defective sensor
P35.13
DO: Pressure-MIN
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active when the measured pressure value is below the threshold value in P35.11 Pressure-MIN. The output functions independant of the selection of event class in P35.12 Event: PressureMIN.
P35.14 Min: -100 %
Pressure-MAX
Default: 105 %
Max: 200 %
The maximum threshold value for pressure monitoring. Reference value: P35.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
P35.15
Event: Pressure-MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: W2
Number: 16
The pressure in the bin has exceeded the upper threshold value. Possible causes: - unexpected pressure conditions - soiled sensor - defective sensor
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 213 -
Parameters
P35.16
DO: Pressure-MAX
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The output becomes active when the measured pressure value is above the threshold value in P35.14 Pressure-MAX. The output functions independant of the selection of event class in P35.15 Event: PressureMAX.
P35.17
DI: Switch On Compensation
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for activating pressure compensation. Compensation is always active with P35.17 DI: Switch On Compensation = n/a .
P35.18
Compensation analog Input Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
The input flow for pressure zero. Only relevant if P35.02 Compensation Source = AI
P35.19 Min: 0 mA
Compensation analog Input Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
The input flow for nominal pressure adjusted in P35.04 Pressure Rated Cap.. Only relevant if P35.02 Compensation Source = AI
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - FCB analog outputs The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical analog outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs by parameters in this block. Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC. P36.01
FCB_AO 01
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P36.02
Offset FCB_AO 1
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Output current for a PLC signal of 0.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 214 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P36.03
Range FCB_AO 1
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Output current for a PLC signal of 100% Reference value: P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1 See also: P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.04 Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 1
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output. Also refer to: P36.01 FCB_AO 01, P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P36.05
FCB_AO 02
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.06
Offset FCB_AO 2
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.07
Range FCB_AO 2
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.08 Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 2
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 215 -
Parameters
P36.09
FCB_AO 03
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.10
Offset FCB_AO 3
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.11
Range FCB_AO 3
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.12 Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 3
Default: 10000
Max: 1000000
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.13
FCB_AO 04
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.14
Offset FCB_AO 4
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 216 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P36.15
Range FCB_AO 4
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.16 Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 4
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.17
FCB_AO 05
Alternative:
n/a AO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.18
Offset FCB_AO 5
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.19 Min: 0 mA
Range FCB_AO 5
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 217 -
Parameters
P36.20 Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 5
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see: P36.01 FCB_AO 01 P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P36.21
FCB Variant
Default: Empty
Name of the required function block link. This name is automatically transferred to the parameter when a new link is loaded. When the system is started after turning on the voltage, it checks to see whether the name of the function block link loaded is the same as the name entered in the parameter. Event P36.22 Event: FCB-Error is identified if the names are different. This check serves as a control if a replacement part is used.
P36.22
Event: FCB-Error
Event Group: IL
Default: A
Number: 10
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link stored in the parameter. Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states may arise. Possible causes: - it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU. - the name in the parameter was changed manually. Steps to be taken: - load the function block link with the correct name.
7.4.2.37 Parameter Block 37 - FCB digital outputs The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical binary outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs by parameters in this block. Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC. P37.01
FCB_DO 01
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 218 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P37.02
FCB_DO 02
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.03
FCB_DO 03
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.04
FCB_DO 04
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.05
FCB_DO 05
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.06
FCB_DO 06
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.07
FCB_DO 07
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.08
FCB_DO 08
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 219 -
Parameters
P37.09
FCB_DO 09
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.10
FCB_DO 10
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.11
FCB_DO 11
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.12
FCB_DO 12
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.13
FCB_DO 13
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.14
FCB_DO 14
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.15
FCB_DO 15
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 220 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P37.16
FCB_DO 16
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.17
FCB_DO 17
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.18
FCB_DO 18
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.19
FCB_DO 19
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P37.20
FCB_DO 20
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
7.4.2.38 Parameter Block 38 - Data Logging The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage. P38.01 Min: -1 min
Hourly Total Time
Default: 0 min
Max: 59 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a full hour.
P38.02 Min: -1 min
Daily Total Time
Default: 0 min
Max: 1439 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a day.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 221 -
Parameters
P38.03 Min: 1 min
Logger cycle time
Default: 1 min
Max: 1439 min
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P38.04 ... P38.13.
P38.04
Data Log Value 1
Default: 752
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in the data communication manual. Also refer to: P38.03 Logger cycle time These manuals: DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448 INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474 DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P38.05
Data Log Value 2
Default: 755
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
P38.06
Data Log Value 3
Default: 1894
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
P38.07
Data Log Value 4
Default: 1872
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
P38.08
Data Log Value 5
Default: 1904
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
P38.09
Data Log Value 6
Default: 1880
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 222 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P38.10
Data Log Value 7
Default: 1874
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
P38.11
Data Log Value 8
Default: 1890
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
P38.12
Data Log Value 9
Default: 0
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
P38.13
Data Log Value 10
Default: 0
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1
7.4.2.39 Parameter Block 39 - Configuration HMI Values The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the operating panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus. On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key. EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation map in the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel. You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data communication: DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448 INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474 DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468 P39.01
HMI Value 01
Default: 1996
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.02
HMI Value 02
Default: 1944
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 223 -
Parameters
P39.03
HMI Value 03
Default: 1942
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.04
HMI Value 04
Default: 1960
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.05
HMI Value 05
Default: 1904
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.06
HMI Value 06
Default: 1952
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.07
HMI Value 07
Default: 1950
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.08
HMI Value 08
Default: 2158
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.09
HMI Value 09
Default: 0
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P39.10
HMI Value 10
Default: 0
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 224 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
7.4.2.40 Parameter Block 40 - Local Mode (Speed) The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs. This block contains the parameters for continually functioning drives, feed gates (rollers) with built-in position control or valves. Each VMO can control as many as 5 drives. The parameters for these drives are marked with block numbers 1 ... 5 in this group of parameters. You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix. Note: Communication to the VMO has to be activated via parameters P01.12 to P01.15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2. Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the parameters in the VCU. This is generally done at the manufacturer's.
P40.01
Motor Select (Block 1)
Alternative:
VMO1 Motor1 VMO1 Motor2 VMO1 Motor3 VMO1 Motor4 VMO1 Motor5 VMO2 Motor1 VMO2 Motor2 VMO2 Motor3 VMO2 Motor4 VMO2 Motor5 not active
Default: VMO1 Motor1
Selecting the drives in VMO that is assigned to parameter block 1. It is then operated in VMO with the appropriate line. VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P40.02
ON in Remote (Block 1)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
The signal running through the selected output channel is linked with the ON command for the drive. When the output becomes active, the drive is shown in VMO as running. The drive can be switched on and off via VMO in local operation . n/a: The drive in VMO is not linked with any signal. This motor should be deactivated in VMO.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 225 -
Parameters
P40.03
Controller Magnitude (Block 1)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
The signal running over the selected output channel is linked to the controller magnitude for the drive. The value of the controller magnitude is shown in VMO and can be specified in VMO in local operation. n/a: The drive is not linked to any signal. This setting is selected when the drive is operated at a constant speed.
P40.04 Min: 0 mA
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) Default: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
The controller magnitude flow where the motor stops right out of rotating operation so that it no longer conveys bulk solids.
P40.05
JOG enable (Block 1)
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Activating switching on the drive even with a defect. NO: The drive cannot be switched on with an alarm. YES: When there is an alarm, the motor can still be started in local operation of VMO. However, it only runs until the start button is pressed. This operating mode only makes sense with belt drives that have to be started with belt drift to move the belt into normal position again.
P40.06
Release local Start (Block 1)
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The VMO can only be switched in local operation when this signal is on. This input makes it possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the host computer. n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time. Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to be set in VMO.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 226 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P40.07
DI: External Error 1 (Block 1)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal. Exception: Refer to P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1) The malfunction inputs P40.07, P40.08 and P40.09 work at the same priority. The drive cannot be switched on in local operation if there is one of these malfunctions.
P40.08
DI: External Error 2 (Block 1)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal. Exception: Refer to P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1) The malfunction inputs P40.07, P40.08 and P40.09 work at the same priority. The drive cannot be switched on in local operation if there is one of these malfunctions.
P40.09
DI: External Error 3 (Block 1)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal. Exception: Refer to P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1) The malfunction inputs P40.07, P40.08 and P40.09 work at the same priority. The drive cannot be switched on in local operation if there is one of these malfunctions.
P40.10
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for the drive is running signal. The output is active precisely when the output defined via P40.02 ON in Remote (Block 1) is also active.
P40.11
Motor Select (Block 2)
Alternative:
VMO1 Motor1 VMO1 Motor2 VMO1 Motor3 VMO1 Motor4 VMO1 Motor5 VMO2 Motor1 VMO2 Motor2 VMO2 Motor3 VMO2 Motor4 VMO2 Motor5 not active
Default: VMO1 Motor2
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 227 -
Parameters
P40.12
ON in Remote (Block 2)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.13
Controller Magnitude (Block 2)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.14 Min: 0 mA
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 2) Default: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.15
JOG enable (Block 2)
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.16
Release local Start (Block 2)
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.17
DI: External Error 1 (Block 2)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 228 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P40.18
DI: External Error 2 (Block 2)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.19
DI: External Error 3 (Block 2)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.20
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 2)
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.21
Motor Select (Block 3)
Alternative:
VMO1 Motor1 VMO1 Motor2 VMO1 Motor3 VMO1 Motor4 VMO1 Motor5 VMO2 Motor1 VMO2 Motor2 VMO2 Motor3 VMO2 Motor4 VMO2 Motor5 not active
Default: not active
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.22
ON in Remote (Block 3)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 229 -
Parameters
P40.23
Controller Magnitude (Block 3)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.24 Min: 0 mA
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 3) Default: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.25
JOG enable (Block 3)
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.26
Release local Start (Block 3)
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.27
DI: External Error 1 (Block 3)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.28
DI: External Error 2 (Block 3)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 230 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P40.29
DI: External Error 3 (Block 3)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.30
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 3)
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.31
Motor Select (Block 4)
Alternative:
VMO1 Motor1 VMO1 Motor2 VMO1 Motor3 VMO1 Motor4 VMO1 Motor5 VMO2 Motor1 VMO2 Motor2 VMO2 Motor3 VMO2 Motor4 VMO2 Motor5 not active
Default: not active
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.32
ON in Remote (Block 4)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.33
Controller Magnitude (Block 4)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 231 -
Parameters
P40.34 Min: 0 mA
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 4) Default: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.35
JOG enable (Block 4)
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.36
Release local Start (Block 4)
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.37
DI: External Error 1 (Block 4)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.38
DI: External Error 2 (Block 4)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.39
DI: External Error 3 (Block 4)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 232 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
P40.40
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 4)
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.41
Motor Select (Block 5)
Alternative:
VMO1 Motor1 VMO1 Motor2 VMO1 Motor3 VMO1 Motor4 VMO1 Motor5 VMO2 Motor1 VMO2 Motor2 VMO2 Motor3 VMO2 Motor4 VMO2 Motor5 not active
Default: not active
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.42
ON in Remote (Block 5)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.43
Controller Magnitude (Block 5)
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.44 Min: 0 mA
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 5) Default: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 233 -
Parameters
P40.45
JOG enable (Block 5)
Alternative:
NO YES
Default: NO
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.46
Release local Start (Block 5)
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.47
DI: External Error 1 (Block 5)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.48
DI: External Error 2 (Block 5)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.49
DI: External Error 3 (Block 5)
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
P40.50
DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 5)
Alternative:
n/a DO
Default: n/a
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.
7.4.2.41 Parameter Block 41 - Local Mode (Gate) The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs. This block contains the parameters for position-controlled prefeeders that are controlled by the VCU with the
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 234 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Parameters
Open and Closed signals. You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix. Note: Communication to the VMO has to be activated via parameters P01.12 to P01.15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2. Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the parameters in the VCU. This is generally done at the manufacturer's.
P41.01
Motor Select
Alternative:
VMO1 Motor1 VMO1 Motor2 VMO1 Motor3 VMO1 Motor4 VMO1 Motor5 VMO2 Motor1 VMO2 Motor2 VMO2 Motor3 VMO2 Motor4 VMO2 Motor5 not active
Default: VMO1 Motor5
Select the drive in VMO that is assigned the parameter block. It is then operated in VMO with the appropriate line. VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P41.02
OPEN in Remote
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
The definition of the output channels for the open feed gate signal.
P41.03
DI: Limit Switch OPEN
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the feed gate open in end position signal. The limit switch stops the further operation of the slide gate in the OPEN direction to protect the mechanical equipment.
P41.04
CLOSE in Remote
Alternative:
n/a LS
Default: n/a
The definition of the output channels for the close feed gate signal.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 235 -
Parameters
P41.05
DI: Limit Switch CLOSE
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the feed gate is closed in end position signal. The limit switch stops the further operation of the slide gate in the CLOSED direction to protect the mechanical equipment.
P41.06
Release local Start
Alternative:
n/a DI LS
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The VMO can only be switched in local operation when this signal is on. This input makes it possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the host computer. n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time. Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to be set in VMO.
P41.07
DI: External Error 1
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal. Exception: Refer to P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1) The malfunction inputs P41.07, P41.08 and P41.09 work at the same priority.
P41.08
DI: External Error 2
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal. Exception: Refer to P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1) The malfunction inputs P41.07, P41.08 and P41.09 work at the same priority.
P41.09
DI: External Error 3
Alternative:
n/a DI
Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal. Exception: Refer to P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1) The malfunction inputs P41.07, P41.08 and P41.09 work at the same priority.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 236 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
8 Event Messages DANGER Events register abnormal states, e.g. malfunctions or exceeded threshold values. A running feeder can be a hazard to people or to property. The cause of event messages must be corrected before events are acknowledged! Event messages are grouped together. Group Identifier
Event Domain
SY
Internally monitoring the control system
SC
Irregularities in operator control or peripheral control
WE
Fault in the external power electronics
WM
Fault in the mechanical system
MF
Fault in the bulk material flow
IL
Messages from interlocking with system control
CO
Internal controller malfunction message
CA
Adjustment fault
HI
Threshold value exceeded upwards
LO
Threshold value exceeded downwards
Tab. 38 : Event groups
Note: In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
8.1
Events Details
8.1.1
Event Group: Calibration
CA01
Event: Error LC Input
(P07.04)
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The load cell may be faulty. Measures: - check the cabling and the load cell - check the load cell Note: The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switched on even after the error has been rectified.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 237 -
Event Messages
CA02
Event: Tachometer Input
(P07.03)
The signals at the feeder drive's impulse speedometer input are outside of the specified range. Possible causes: - there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wiring) - the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
CA03
Event: Error LC Input (Bin)
(P26.07)
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The load cell may be faulty. Steps to take : - check the cabling and the load cell - if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU Note: The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched on even after the error has been rectified.
CA04
Event: Error LC Input (2nd Bridge)
(P28.07)
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected at all or has been disconnected. The load cell may be faulty. Actions: - check the cabling and the load cell - check the load cell
CA05
Event: Linearization Error
(P32.10)
Not a monotonically increasing curve. A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when: - linearization is switched on, - a parameter is altered
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 238 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
CA06
Event: Tare Correction
(P06.13)
This event is identified if the change in tare identified by the automatic zeroing system exceeds the threshold value in P06.12 Zeroing Limit. Possible causes: - low quantities of bulk material on the belt - error in the weighing mechanics Actions: - visual inspection of the belt and the weighing system. - run the base tare adjustment program - check weight measuring using test weights
CA07
Event: DMS-Input
(P35.06)
The event is identified if there is a substantial defect in the signal of the pressure sensor and the pressure signal is read in through the VME interface. Possible causes: - defective sensor cable - sensor improperly connected
8.1.2 CH01
Event Group: Check Measurement Event: Minimum Check Quantity
(P29.16)
The event is identified when the control measurement was finished after the given number of belt circuits before the given minimum quantity of bulk solids has been discharged. Possible cause: The belt load is less than expected. The result of the check might be afflicted with an impermissibly large defect. Remedy: Increase the belt load
CH02
Event: Minimum Fill Weight
(P29.18)
The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight during a check. Possible cause: - bulk material density higher than specified - unfavorable settings in P29.13 Check Quantity or P29.12 Check Circuits, P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight or P29.14 Storage Quantity
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 239 -
Event Messages
CH03
Event: Maximum Fill Weight
(P29.20)
The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is finished early. Possible cause: The storage quantity (P29.14 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts. In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
CH04
Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
(P29.32)
The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the threshold value P29.30 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis. Cause of the event: - substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station) - defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects) Actions: - checking the weighing station of the feeder scale - taring the feeder scale - checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)
CH05
Event: Relative Tare Correction Error
(P29.33)
The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value P29.31 Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. It is monitored and reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis. Cause of the event: - substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station) - defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects) Actions: - checking the weighing station of the feeder scale - taring the feeder scale - checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 240 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
CH06
Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
(P29.34)
The threshold in P29.30 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for multiplicative errors. Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 % Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a % B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in continuous scales counter) K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.02 Range Correction
CH07
Event: Relative Span Correction Error
(P29.35)
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P29.31 Relative Range. Brel = (1 - B )× 100 Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a % B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in continuous scales counter)
CH08
Event: Feeder Not Stopped
(P29.25)
The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped. Possible cause: - long time required to end filling - incorrect control sequence for bin filling
CH09
Event: No Check Release
(P29.06)
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized one. Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing authorization.
CH10
Event: Prepare Check Measurement
(P29.26)
The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than the maximum check fill level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight). For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 241 -
Event Messages
CH11
Event: Expect Acceptance
(P29.28)
At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator: a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales b) discard correction result and cancel If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded (P29.02 Auto Correction = YES). Step: Communicate decision about correction
CH12
Event: Check Gate Error
(P29.42)
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P29.01 Type of Check System = Filling System). The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time. Possible cause: - gate has no power - gate is stuck Also refer to: P29.39 DO: Check Gate P29.40 Check Gate Feedback P29.41 Check Gate Time
CH13
Event: Bin Error
(P29.44)
Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check. The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has been set to IG. Possible cause: - force bypasses at the control bin - pressure forces acting on the control bin - wind forces acting on the control bin Also refer to: P29.43 Limit Max. Bin Error
8.1.3 CO01
Event Group: Controller Event: Controller Limited
(P11.10)
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response threshold. After a time message HI05 (P11.09) will be output. 1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular. 2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set. Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service value Y). At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 242 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
CO02
Event: MIN Flow Gate
(P33.07)
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the minimum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment. Possible causes: Defects in the prefeeder control unit Actions: Check the control unit.
CO03
Event: MAX Flow Gate
(P33.09)
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maximum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment. Possible causes: Defects in the prefeeder control unit Actions: Check the control unit.
CO04
Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor
(P26.29)
The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper. Possible causes: - the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shutting off soon enough. - the refill equipment is not closing correctly. - the upper fill threshold level P26.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high. An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjustment of the calculation of the feed rate.
CO05
Event: Volum. caused by LC-error
(P06.17)
This event is identified when the scale has switched to volumetric operation because of a defect in measured value acquisition. This defect is only identified when two weighing channels are used for main measured value acquisition and the measured values of both channels depart from one another by more than 13 %. Possible causes: - blocked material in the weighing range - non-symmetrical belt loading Only relevant if P06.16 Volum on LC failure = YES
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 243 -
Event Messages
8.1.4 WE01
Event Group: Electrical System Event: Power Failure
(P07.08)
This event is identified once the power supply is restored. The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event must first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales will restart.
WE02
Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6
(P13.13)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
WE03
Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7
(P13.14)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
WE04
Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6
(P13.15)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
WE05
Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI7
(P13.16)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 244 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
WE06
Event: NAMUR Error VCU3-DI6
(P13.17)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
WE07
Event: NAMUR Error VCU3-DI7
(P13.18)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
WE08
Event: Analog Input < Offset
(P07.12)
One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set. A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input signal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
WE13
Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7
(P13.24)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
WE14
Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7
(P13.25)
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level. Possible cause: - cable to the sensor is broken - the sensor is faulty - there is a short circuit in the cable connection - an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 245 -
Event Messages
8.1.5
Event Group: Interlock
IL01
Event: Run Disabled
(P04.04)
No release signal from the source determined by P04.03 Source Run Enable. If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched on.
IL02
Event: Mechanics
(P24.10)
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
IL03
Event: Electricity
(P24.12)
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
IL04
Event: Mechatronics
(P24.15)
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
IL05
Event: Not Ready
(P24.17)
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
IL06
Event: Not Ready for Start
(P24.19)
Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
IL10
Event: FCB-Error
(P36.22)
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link stored in the parameter. Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states may arise. Possible causes: - it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU. - the name in the parameter was changed manually. Steps to be taken: - load the function block link with the correct name.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 246 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
8.1.6 MF05
Event Group: Material Flow Event: Moisture MAX
(P30.10)
The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise. Possible cause: - extremely damp bulk material - moisture measurement measuring error Also refer to: P30.08 Moisture MAX, P30.09 DO: Moisture MAX
MF06
Event: Out of Tolerance
(P15.15)
The batch result is outside the tolerance range. Possible causes: - highly erratic material flow - altered feeder discharge behavior - error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces
MF07
Event: Batch setpoint Limit
(P15.19)
Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible upper limit in P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit. Possible causes: - incorrect entry - incorrect upper threshold Also refer to: P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit
8.1.7 HI01
Event Group: MAX Event: LC Input > MAX
(P07.06)
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of the load cells. Measuring range end: 125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V 175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V Possible causes: - Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading - incorrect cabling - faulty load cell
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 247 -
Event Messages
HI02
Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX
(P09.04)
Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Possible causes: - bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment - feed rate setpoint too large
HI03
Event: Load MAX
(P09.08)
The belt load is greater than the maximum value set in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX Possible causes: - bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
HI04
Event: Speed MAX
(P09.12)
The belt speed is greater than the maximum value set in P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX
HI05
Event: Deviation
(P11.09)
Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the setpoint over too long a period of time. Possible causes: - material has been incorrectly handled: - the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily - arching in the feed hopper - there is a backup on the discharge side - a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder - the controller has at times come against its limits - error in the electronics - check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output regulator settings (current limiting, speed range) - calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical value that minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable operation. Also refer to: P11.08 Deviation abs. max., P11.07 Factor Deviation, P11.06 Threshold Deviation, P11.05 Time Deviation
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 248 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
HI10
Event: LC Input > MAX
(P26.08)
The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads. Measuring range end: 125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V 175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V Possible reasons: - force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell - incorrect cabling - faulty load cell
HI11
Event: Bin Level MAX
(P26.19)
The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold. Possible cause: - refilling not switching off correctly Also refer to: P26.18 Bin Level MAX
HI12
Event: 2nd Bridge MAX
(P28.12)
The load on the second weighbridge is in excess of the threshold value. Possible causes: - the belt is covered - defect on the prefeeder - weighing station stuck - belt load regulation poorly adjusted - defect in load cell Actions: - make a visual check of the bulk solids on the belt - use a calibration weight to check the weighing station
HI14
Event: DMS-Input > MAX
(P35.07)
This event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is over its nominal value. Possible causes: - overload on the pressure sensor - defective sensor
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 249 -
Event Messages
HI16
Event: Pressure-MAX
(P35.15)
The pressure in the bin has exceeded the upper threshold value. Possible causes: - unexpected pressure conditions - soiled sensor - defective sensor
8.1.8 WM01
Event Group: Mechanic Event: Limit Switch
(P13.22)
The event is identified when the belt limit switch has responded. Possible causes: - extreme belt off-center run - contaminated limit switch - defect on automatic belt tracking - defect on the belt Actions: - make a visual check of the belt run - correct the belt run with the belt tightening equipment - check the belt tightening and automatic belt tracking
WM02
Event: Slip
(P18.12)
This event is identified if the belt motion does not correspond to that predicted by the motor revolutions. Possible causes: - belt is slipping at the drive pulley - withdrawal forces are too high - gearing is defective - belt or drive pulley heavily soiled Steps: - visual inspection of the belt and the bulk material flow
WM03
Event: Belt Skew
(P18.10)
Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable. Action: See Event: Belt Drift Related threshold: Belt Skew
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 250 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
WM04
Event: Belt Drift
(P18.08)
The belt has exceeded the tolerance levels set. Steps: 1. Remove any soiling to the tail and drive pulleys 2. Align the belt Monitoring may also be subject to error. Therefore: keep an eye on the service value for the belt motion sensor and correct any errors that may arise. Related threshold value: Belt Drift
WM05
Event: Slip 2
(P34.08)
The event is identified when the slippage exceeds the set threshold value. Possible causes: - contamination on the belt, the head pulley or the pulley with the second sensor - the belt slips on the head pulley (higher draw-off strength and bulk solids stuck in the inlet) - sluggish pulley with the second sensor Actions: - make a visual check of the bulk solids situation - check the drive motor and gear - check the second pulley
WM06
Event: Chain Motion Monitor
(P06.10)
This event is identified when the cleaning equipment was switched on below the feeder scale, although there are not any feedback impulses over a time longer than the tolerance period. Possible cause: - the cleaning equipment is blocked - the supply voltage is lacking for the equipment - there is a defect on the impulse sensor Steps to be taken: Check the cleaning equipment mechanically and electrically
8.1.9 LO01
Event Group: MIN Event: LC Input < MIN
(P07.05)
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads. Possible causes: - force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell - incorrect cabling - faulty load cell
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 251 -
Event Messages
LO02
Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN
(P09.02)
The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN. Possible causes: - no bulk material - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment - feed rate setpoint too low
LO03
Event: Load MIN
(P09.06)
The belt load is less than the minimum value set in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN Possible causes: - no bulk material - disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
LO04
Event: Speed MIN
(P09.10)
The belt speed is less than the minimum value set in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
LO10
Event: DMS-Input < MIN
(P35.08)
The event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is substantially below zero. Possible causes: - sensor improperly connected - unexpected pressure conditions - defective sensor
LO11
Event: Bin Level MIN
(P26.16)
The bin level has underrun the lower threshold. Possible cause: - refilling working incorrectly Also refer to: P26.15 Bin Level MIN
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 252 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
LO12
Event: 2nd Bridge MIN
(P28.09)
The load on the second weighbridge has fallen below the threshold value. Possible causes: - no bulk solids - defect on the prefeeder - weighing station stuck - belt load regulation poorly adjusted - defect in load cell Actions: - make a visual check of the bulk solids on the belt - use a calibration weight to check the weighing station
LO16
Event: Pressure-MIN
(P35.12)
The pressure in the bin has fallen below the lower threshold. Possible causes: - unexpected pressure conditions - soiled sensor - defective sensor
8.1.10 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring SC01
Event: Setpoint Limited
(P07.07)
Cause of the event: Depending on the respective mode of operation: a) The setpoint is limited to P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation. b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in volumetric operation.
SC02
Event: Stand-By
(P07.01)
Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed outwards. This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling. Actions: Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 253 -
Event Messages
SC03
Event: Maint.Feeder Run
(P16.04)
The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run. A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work required.
SC04
Event: Maint. Electric
(P16.02)
The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P16.01 Maintenance Electric. A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work required.
SC05
Event: External Event 1
(P13.01)
External interference signal at fault input 1. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive
SC06
Event: External Event 2
(P13.03)
External interference signal at fault input 2. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
SC11
Event: External Event 3
(P13.05)
External interference signal at fault input 3. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
SC12
Event: External Event 4
(P13.07)
External interference signal at fault input 4. Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
8.1.11 Event Group: System Message SY01
Event: Memory
(P07.09)
The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during that. The scales will no longer function correctly. Steps to take: - load the factory settings - Normally the hardware has to be replaced.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 254 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Event Messages
SY02
Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2
(P01.06)
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY03
Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3
(P01.10)
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY04
Event: Communication HMI 1
(P02.06)
Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel. Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s. To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
SY05
Event: Communication HMI 2
(P02.08)
Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console. Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s. To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
SY06
Event: Communication HMI 3
(P02.10)
Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel. Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s. To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
SY07
Event: Communication VHM serial
(P02.11)
This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operating panel is interrupted. Causes of this event: Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period Steps: - check cable connection - check that operating console is correctly functioning - check the operating console settings - check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 255 -
Event Messages
SY08
Event: Cyclic Communication
(P20.03)
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P20.02. To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10
Event: Acyclic Communication
(P20.04)
Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer. Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
SY15
Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1
(P01.13)
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.
SY16
Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2
(P01.15)
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 256 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
9 Appendix Details of special functions are described in this chapter.
9.1
Setpoint and switch switch--on sources
Setpoint can be set and feed on and off commands can come from different sources.
Fig. 21: Setpoint and switch-on sources
The sources are preselected with parameters in the 'Control Sources' group. You can use the OP Mode function to switch back and forth between the pre-selected sources and the keyboard (Keyboard Mode ON/OFF [➙ 30]). Parameters
Function
Source
P04.01
Feeder Start
OP = keyboard FB = fieldbus DI = contact
P04.02
Feedrate Setpoint
OP = keyboard FB = fieldbus AI = analog input (A/D)
P04.05
Source Relative Setpoint Setpoint with a percentage quantifier
n/a = not assigned OP = keyboard AI = Analog input
The effective setpoint is displayed on the operating panel. The setpoint input field is only available if the inputs from the operating panel are allowed by parameter. A new window for entering the relative component will open when the setpoint field is touched if the relative setpoint qualifier was pre-selected with the operating panel.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 257 -
Appendix
Setpoint Synchronization: The external setpoint will be taken if the source of the setpoint is switched from an external source to the keyboard (OP). The external source will take effect in the opposite direction. On / Off Synchronization: The on/off switch status is retained when switching from an external source to the keyboard (OP). The external source will take effect in the opposite direction. Mains Power OFF: The keyboard setpoints are stored. The flow chart of the start and stop sequence
Fig. 22: The start and stop sequence
Time
Condition
1
Feeding does not begin with the on command since the all-clear signal has not been given.
2
To start, the scale requires the rising slope of a start command.
3
Feeding is started with the rising slope.
4
Flow rate control will operate in volumetric operation (also refer to: Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation [➙ 30]) during the start up time defined by T1 = P11.15.
5
Changing over in normal gravimetrically controlled feeding operation (assuming gravimetric mode was previously selected). Control stays in volumetric mode (assuming it was previously selected by the operator).
6
Feeding will be switched off if there is no all-clear signal (or if the switch on command was removed).
7
Flow rate recording continues over the time set by T2 = P06.01 to capture trickling bulk solids. Afterwards, the flow rate is no longer calculated; the counter stays at the level already achieved.
Tab. 39 : States and points in time in the flow chart
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 258 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Parameters
Function
P11.15
Duration of the volumetric T1 start up period
P06.01
Continuation of totalizing after turning off T2 feeding (afterflow totalizer)
P04.01
Source of the on signal
P04.03
Source of the all-clear signal
P14.02
Scales signal output switched on
Tab. 40 : Relevant parameters
What to do if there is an alarm: The feeder drive is switched off immediately if an alarm is triggered. The flow rate will continue to be recorded even past the time set in P06.01 Afterflow Totalizer. Measurement and displays: The measuring load will always be calculated and displayed. The flow rate will only be calculated with the feeder switched on and during the Afterflow Totalizer (P06.01).
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 259 -
Appendix
9.2
Measuring the flow rate (M)
Fig. 23: The module for measuring the belt load, belt velocity and flow rate
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 260 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
F1 Load on load cell 1 F2 Load on load cell 2 f Tachometer 1
P05.02 LC Characteristic Value P05.03 LC Rated Capacity
RAW1 Loadcell 1
P05.04 Effective Platform Length
RAW2 Loadcell 2 (only VWF software)
P05.05 Lever Ratio
v Belt Speed
P05.07 Speed Measurement
I Rate
P05.08 Source Load Cell
UBAL! Event: Significantly uneven load on load cells 1 and 2 (refer to controller operating modes for instructions).
P05.09 Source Load Cell 2
Q Belt Load TA Basic (Cal1) or TW: Tare calibration program LP filter Low-pass filter BIC Belt Influence Compensation: Belt Influence Compensation
P10.01 LC Filter P08.01 Filter: Actual Flow Rate P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
ZDO Zero Drop Out: Suppressing tare errors when operating without bulk solids MOIST Moisture correction Refer to separate chapter CTRL Flow rate controller (only VWF software) Refer to separate chapter
P08.04 Filter: Belt Speed P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
HI03 Event: Load MAX
P09.05 Limit: Load MIN
HI04 Event: Speed MAX
P09.07 Limit: Load MAX
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN
P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
LO03 Event: Load MIN
P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX
LO04 Event: Speed MIN
P05.01 Pulses per length
S1 Totalizer 1
P10.05 Basic Tare
S2 Totalizer 2
P17.02 Platform Dis.Length
S3 Totalizer 3 TC CW: Span Calibration set-up program (TC: weight control) VAP Feeding with reference to the feeder's discharge point
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 261 -
Appendix
9.3
Flow rate controller
The controller is selected for a velocity-regulated weighfeeder via P11.01 = STANDARD. It is streamlined for a controller structure as per Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity [➙ 10].
Fig. 24: Standard flow rate controller
Generally, an excellent control quality is achieved by preset parameters. The controller structure is extended in the setting via P11.01 = UNIVERS as per the following figure. It can be used to achieve the The beltweigher with feed control [➙ 12] and Beltweigher with a constant load [➙ 13] control structures.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 262 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Fig. 25: Universal flow rate controller
Gravimetric
The measured belt load Q is used to ascertain the corresponding setpoint speed. The setpoint is restricted to the value in P03.01.
Volumetric Mode
The setpoint speed develops under the assumption of the rated belt load. The setpoint is restricted to three times the value in P03.01.
Volumetric Synchronous
The most recently measured belt load Qa is used to ascertain the appropriate setpoint speed. The setpoint is limited to three times the value in P03.01.
Tab. 41 : Controller Modes
The controller operating mode is displayed on the operating panel by VOL and GRAV.
NOTE:
The speed controller is active in all controller operating modes. If a controller magnitude that is independant of the actual speed is supposed to be given for test purposes, this can be done with the increase in P11.13 for flow rate setpoint = 0.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 263 -
Appendix
Volumetric Start-Up
The operating mode for starting up an empty belt. The duration is determined by the P06.04, P09.05 and P11.15 parameters. The load set in P09.05 for P06.04 = FAST is used to ascertain the correct setpoint speed. Otherwise, the rated belt load is used. The switch-on command immediately sets the prefeeder and drive outputs to ON. The belt velocity is controlled proportional to the setpoint. After the start up period, it automatically switches to the measured value of the belt load, which means that the flow rate is controlled.
Volumetric Clearance The prefeeder is immediately switched off when the switch-off command is given, although the belt continues to run in the Volumetric Synchronous operating mode for the belt route given in P11.16 to transport the rest of the bulk solids from the belt. A switch-on command when running empty triggers a new start up period while alarms turn the belt drive off immediately. P07.01
The external controller is turned off after 3 s at a controller magnitude below the boundary defined by P07.02 to protect the drive motor and external flow rate controller from excess temperaturs where the feeder scale continues to indicate running feeding to the control system provided by customer. It is switched back into normal operation instantaneously. Stored portions in the controller behave in the same fashion as when feeding is switched off. Set P07.02 = 0 for permanent operation (even at a lower controller magnitude).
Tab. 42 : Special operating modes
Controller parameters The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the following diagram.
Fig. 26: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0
The abbreviations are as follows: Controller parameters
Meaning
KP
P-portion of the feed rate controller related to the nominal feed rate as a % / % or a dimensionless P-portion of the speed controller.
TN
Reset time in seconds.
Tab. 43 : Controller parameters
Parameter value
Special case
KP = 0
I-controller: KI = 1/TN in % / (mA/s)
TN = 0
P-controller: I-portion will be deleted
KP=TN=0
Controller output = controller increase
Tab. 44 : Special cases of controller parameter setting
Monitoring control deviation The control deviation is displayed and monitored in gravimetric operation only. The display, but not the monitoring system input, is filtered by parameter P11.04. Event message 'P11.05' will be triggered if the value of the error signal Xd exceeds the limit value S1 for a BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 264 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
duration defined in parameter Event: Deviation. Monitoring will restart if the error signal falls below the threshold during this time. At the same time, the control deviation value is filtered (filter time in parameter P11.05) and the filter output is monitored. Event 'Event: Deviation' will be identified if the filter output exceeds the threshold value S2. Threshold values S1 and S2 can be adapted to the current feed rate setpoint by means of the following formulas: S1 = P11.06 * [P11.07 + (1 - P11.07) * Feed rate setpoint / P03.01] S2 = P11.08 * [P11.07 + (1 - P11.07) * Feed rate setpoint / P03.01] The following diagram illustrates the relationship using with examples for threshold value S1.
P LIM
Feed rate setpoint
V
Limit value S1 or S2
Limit Value in P11.06 or. P11.08
F
Influence Factor P11.07
The upper limit of the controller magnitude can be reduced to prevent excess feeding of hazardous substances at a low target feed rate.
Fig. 27: Upper controller magnitude limit
. MX
The value of the P11.12 Upper Limit parameter
P%
The target feed rate in % of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
Y-MAX
The limit for the controller magnitude
This figure shows an example of the correlation for three selected settings of the MX parameter.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 265 -
Appendix
Number
Name
Effect
P11.19
Store
The behavior of the integral component when turning off: NO: do not save. Starting up with integral component = 0 YES: Starting up begins with the integral component saved before turning off. YES-A: Only save when feeding has not become inoperative due to an alarm.
P11.21
Bypass
Additive pre-control of the controller magnitude by the setpoint (bypass). The controller magnitude stated in the parameter is given for 100 % setpoint. The controller magnitude is not synchronized when changing the setpoint bypass. The bypass should only be changed in small steps or when the scale is off to avoid larger jumps in feeding.
P11.20
Volumetric Mode
Determining the behavior in volumetric operation: Qconst: as the Volumetric Mode controller operating mode of the standard controller Yconst: the controller is switched off. Only bypass is working. This operating mode is suited for the belt scale with prefeeder control.
P11.22
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord
The filter is supposed to simulate the temporal behavior of a simple external controlled loop. The time constant should be set in accordance with the external route so that there are not any major control differences Xd occurring (service value) with setpoint jumps during the signal's transit time. Furthermore, stored portions are reset when the network is connected.
P11.23
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord
The filter is supposed to simulate the temporal behavior of a more complex external controlled loop. Setting the time constant in accordance with P11.22.
P11.24
Set/Act Sources
Selecting the process variables to be controlled: I: Controlling the actual flow rate ( constant flow rate). The operating personnel can specify the setpoint. Q: controlling the actual belt load ( constant belt load). The setpoint is specified by parameters.
P11.25
Adaptation 1
Adapting the controller with the setpoint. Adaptation adapts the control velocity and stored integral component to the setpoint. Adaptation has few merits if P11.21 is set appropriately. It is not synchronized when changing adaptation. Adaptation should only be changed when the scale is switched off to avoid greater feeding jumps.
→ →
Tab. 45 : The effect of selected parameters of the universal controller
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 266 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
9.4
Batch Operation Control
The following figure shows the batching operation process.
Fig. 28: Batching flow chart without setpoint ramp 0-5 Transitions in state (see table) m The fed mass
T3 The duration of the adaptation period (P15.03) PB Batching setpoint in kg
T2 P06.01 Afterflow Totalizer
Measu Recording the actual flow rate and calculating the re totalizing counter
PR Effective flow rate setpoint
Feed The switch-on command to the feeder's discharge organ
Main_ The command for feeding in full feed Spd
Dbl_S The command for feeding in dribble feed pd B_On The batch running output signal
ON Output signal active
NOTE:
OFF Output signal passive
The most important settings for batching are made in the Batch Mode block of parameters.
State Transitions During Feeding as per the Flow Chart Diagram No.
Transition in states
0
Start the batch by switching on the scales. First of all, the batch setpoint has to have been entered since the batch setpoint cannot be changed once the batch is running.
1
Interrupt operation by turning off the scales. The totalizing counter still measures for the time entered in T2 = P06.01 Afterflow Totalizer.
2
Resume batch by turning on the scales. This can also be done during the Afterflow Totalizer.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 267 -
Appendix
No.
Transition in states
3
The flow rate setpoint is reduced to zero (but only with controlling systems) and the P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed and P15.10 DO: Full Feed signals swap levels. The switching time is before the calculated batch end time by the period defined in P15.03 (batch setpoint reached).
4
A batch is ended if the setpoint minus the 'Correction Amount' defined in P15.04 has been reached or if the effective setpoint in cases A1 and A2 becomes zero. In case B, a batch is ended at the latest after three times the adaptation time (P15.03) has elapsed. With a measuring scales, the dribble feed quantity (pre-contact) results from the adaptation time set multiplied by the dribble feed starting value.
5
The flow of bulk solids is recorded for the time entered in T2 = P06.01. That also includes the remaining trickle of bulk solids in the measured value. A new batch can only be started after the afterflow time has elapsed.
Tab. 46 : Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder
Adaptation With adaptation, a corrective quantity K is calculated from the error quantity (batch actual weight - weight setpoint) after each completed batch and stored in the P15.04 parameter. This automatically shifts items 3 to 5 of the diagram with the next batch. K(new) = K(old) + P15.05 * error K(new) = new corrective quantity Error = actual batch weight – batch setpoint Errors greater than the batching tolerance set by P15.14 are restricted to the set tolerance value. Shortfalls that are smaller than the smallest display digit are not corrected. P15.05 acts as a filter parameter to ensure that P15.04 contains a mean for the bulk material overrun with. Behavior if Alarm Triggered If an alarm is triggered, the batch is interrupted as if feeding were switched off. The batch can be resumed once the cause has been rectified and the event message acknowledged. Threshold values The P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN event message is suppressed during the rundown time. This does not apply to the digital output. Feed controller in standby mode The scales can enter standby mode during rundown time (P07.02). The corresponding message is suppressed.
9.5
Belt slip identification
9.5.1
Belt Slippage with Belt Marking
When using a belt with a marking, it can be used to help measure belt motion with a sensor mounted on the frame. Comparing the belt motion expected from the drive pulley motion with the interval between two consecutive sensor signals of the beltmark lets you calculate slip very accurately. This method also allows errors in the belt velocity to be identified that result from soiling of the drive idler.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 268 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
However, this method can only produce results after one complete belt circuit. A different method must be used if more rapid identification is required. In order to harness this method, the belt drift monitoring, the belt slip threshold (in P18.11) and the reaction to the event (in P18.12 and P18.15) must be set.
9.5.2
2-sensor slip monitoring
Belt slip on the head pulley can be ascertained and monitored with a second sensor on a carrying idler driven by the belt.
Fig. 29: 2-sensor slip identification S1 Sensor 1, for instance on the head pulley S2 Sensor 2, for instance on the tail pulley M The drive motor of the belt T Impulse tachometer on the drive motor P:S1 Selecting the source of signal 1. Relevant parameters: P34.02 'Source Sensor 1' If P34.02 = velocity: P05.07 'Speed Measurement' If P34.02 = DI: P34.03 'DI: Sensor 1' vs or S1C is selected depending upon the signal source selected. P:S2 Selecting the source of signal 2: P34.05 'DI: Sensor 2' S1C Impulses per length of sensor 1: P34.04 S2C Impulses per length of sensor 2: P34.06 vs Impulses per length on the main tachometer: P05.01
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 269 -
Appendix
P_U Impulses per belt circuit: P10.07 SLP Slip service display '2-Sensor Slip' WM05 Event: Slip 2 MAX P34.07 'Slip Value 2'
The smallest measurable slip S_MIN is the larger of the values A and B: A = 2 * 100 * vs / (P_U * S1C) B = 2 * 100 * vs / (P_U * S2C) Example vs = 10,000 P_U = 30,000 S1C = S2C = 100 S_MIN = 0.667 % If P34.07 < S_MIN: S_MIN has an effect.
NOTE:
9.6
The impulses and pauses between impulses to S1 and S2 have to be at least 1.2 s long. The impulse and pause have to be at least 0.2 s long if digital inputs are used on the first VCU of a scale.
Local operation
For service work, it is often necessary to turn on specific drives individually and without interlocking with other plant components. Service operation is not intended for running the feeder operationally.
WARNING There is danger from moving machine parts and flowing bulk solids
Interlocking can be suspended with lowering equipment and a start up warning depending upon settings and cabling. Special protective measures should be complied with in this operating mode! It can either be operated in local operation with a VLG model control unit or a VMO model control unit (with a display).
9.6.1
Controlling with VLG
The VLG control unit is switched on electrically between VCU and the drives. Drives can be switched on and off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocking the operating mode).
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 270 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Fig. 30: Local operation with VLG
You can find details on the design forms, connections and functionality of the VLG in the BV-H 2406 system manual.
9.6.2
Controlling with VMO
The VMO motor control unit communicates with the VCU through a serial interface (local bus). Drives can be switched on and off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocked operating mode) and the speed can be specified for controlled drives. You can find technical data and operating instructions for the VMO in the BV-H2488 manual. When using the VMO 20100, it continues to be electrically connected to the drives directly from the VCU. The VMO acts as an input and operating unit in local operation.
Fig. 31: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100
As an alternative, the VMO control unit can also be equipped with its own interface and be switched between VCU and the drive.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 271 -
Appendix
Plant Control
Optional: DISOCONT Tersus VCU 20100
Gravimetric Operator Panel VHM 201xx
Local Machine Operator Panel VMO 20101
24VDC Supply
Actuators/Sensors (Motors/Valves)
Fig. 32: VMO 20101 with VCU
In this case, the VCU can operate the interface of the VMO in automatic operation. It is autonomously controled via VMO in manual operation. In this case, the parameters have to be adjusted in the VMO for local operation in a way that matches the parameters of the VCU. In both cases, the logic is wired for local operation in signal engineering between the automatic control via VCU and the software interface to the drives.
Fig. 33: Inserted local operation logic AUTO ACT
Control in automatic operation Actuators: such as motors, valves and feed gates, ...
LOC
Control in local operation
A
Automatic Mode
L
Local Operation
The local operation logic is correspondingly notified what output signal is responsible for a drive. The appropriate parameters are in the Local Mode (Speed) block for drives controlled by velocity with an external controller or drives controlled by position as well as for valves or in the Local Mode (Gate) block for feed gates with the open and close drive circuit.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 272 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
The LS signal source designates the logical signal issued at an output in normal (automatic) operation. Then the local operation logic drives the appropriate output in local operation. The monitoring inputs for local operation are taken in parallel from the inputs for automatic operation.
9.6.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves
Fig. 34: Local operation logic for rotating drives Signal
Meaning
An example of main drive and local control block 1 Parameters
DO DOx: Start Digital output for starting the drive adjusted as for normal operation per parameter.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
P14.01
Name DO: Scale Start
Value DO-VCU1DO1
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 273 -
Appendix
Doubling the signal for reporting Drive is Running
P14.02
DO: Feeder Started
DO-VCU1DO6
LS DOx: Run
Input for the switch-on command in automatic operation. This signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic operation: Start. This parameter links the local operation logic with normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive is supposed to be switched in local operation.
P40.02
ON in Remote (Block 1)
LS-VCU1DO1
Enable jog
The parameter that defines whether the drive can be started for set-up mode even if a malfunction is pending.
P40.05
JOG enable (Block 1)
DO DOy: start(2)
Loc Start
Start command triggered by the start button of VMO
Local Mode
VMO is in Local Mode signal. The conditions for being able to switch VMO into local mode depend on the configuration of VMO.
VMO exists
The parameter that stipulates whether there is a VMO and if it is linked to the drive.
YES
Button on VMO The state in VMO
P01.12 P01.14 P40.01
VMO20100Unit 1 VMO20100Unit 2 Motor Select (Block 1)
YES NO VMO1 motor 1
VMO OK
The Fault-Free Communication to the VMO signal
-
Enable Loc Start
The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in local operation
P40.06
Release local Start (Block 1)
DIx: Error1 DIx: Error1 DIx: Error1
The drive's error signal. The drive cannot be started locally if there is an error.
P40.07 P40.08 P40.09
DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1 Error 1 (Block n/a 1) n/a DI: External Error 2 (Block 1) DI: External Error 3 (Block 1)
Loc Active
Local operation is active. The signal may also switch the controller magnitude for controlled drives to local input from VMO.
-
AO AOx
The analog output for specifying the speed to the drive, set as for normal operation per parameter.
P12.16
AO: Motor Speed Control
AO-VCU1AO1
LS AOx
The input for specifying speed in automatic operation. The signal is passed onto AO AOx in automatic operation. The parameter connects local operation logic to normal operation logic, thus stipulating which controller magnitude is assigned to the drive in local operation.
P40.03
Controller Magnitude (Block 1)
LS-VCU1AO1
LOC Seed
Specifying the controller magnitude in local operation on the VMO
VMO input
Tab. 47 : Continuous signals
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 274 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
9.6.2.2 The logic for positionposition-controlled feed feed gates
Fig. 35: The logic for position-controlled drives Signal
Meaning
An example of feed gates and local control block 1 Parameters
Name
Value
DO DOx: Open Digital output for opening the feed gate, set as for normal operation per parameter.
P25.14
S: DO Open Flow Gate
DO-VCU1DO1
DO DOx: Close Digital output for closing the feed gate, set as for normal operation per parameter.
P25.15
S: DO Close Flow Gate
DO-VCU1DO2
LS DOx: Open The input for the Open command in automatic operation. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic operation: Start. This parameter links the local operation logic with normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive is supposed to be switched in local operation.
P41.02
OPEN in Remote
LS-VCU1DO1
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 275 -
Appendix
LS DOx: Close The input for the Open command in automatic operation. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic operation: Start. This parameter links the local operation logic with normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive is supposed to be switched in local operation.
P41.04
CLOSE in Remote
Loc Open
The command for opening the valve, triggered by the button of VMO
Button on VMO
Loc Close
The command for closing the valve, triggered by the button of VMO
Button on VMO
Local Mode
VMO is in Local Mode signal. The conditions for being able to switch VMO into local mode depend on the configuration of VMO.
VMO exists
The parameter that stipulates whether there is a VMO and if it is linked to the drive.
LS-VCU1DO2
The state in VMO
P01.12 P01.14 P40.01
VMO20100Unit 1 VMO20100Unit 2 Motor Select (Block 1)
YES NO VMO1 motor 1
VMO OK
The Fault-Free Communication to the VMO signal
Enable Loc Start
The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in local operation
P40.06
Release local Start (Block 1)
DIx: Error1 DIx: Error1 DIx: Error1
The drive's error signal The drive cannot be started locally if there is an error.
P40.07 P40.08 P40.09
DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1 Error 1 (Block n/a 1) n/a DI: External Error 2 (Block 1) DI: External Error 3 (Block 1)
Loc Active
Local operation is active
9.7
-
-
Belt load regulation of the velocityvelocity-controlled weighfeeder
When the bulk solids of the weighfeeder are not directly drawn from a bin and are instead distributed onto the belt from conveyor equipment (i.e., a prefeeder), this prefeeder's flow performance should be controlled in accordance with weighfeeder performance so that the belt load remains approximately constant. Any remaining fluctuations in the belt load are balanced out by the weighfeeder's velocity regulation (Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity [➙ 10]). DISOCONT Tersus also has an additional means of control for the belt load beyond the controller for the flow rate. A second weighbridge can be installed in the area of the transfer point for the bulk solids on scales with a long transit time from bulk solids transfer to the main weighbridge to improve the time response of transfer control. Controller for P25.23 = NO:
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 276 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Fig. 36: Prefeeder control weighfeeder M The Measuring the Belt Load module Q1 Loading the main weighbridge AR Position-controlled prefeeder
CPF Continuous conveyor with continually controllable prefeeder performance Q2 Loading the second weighbridge (optional) PPM Pulse-pause modulator for prefeeders with a fixed speed
Refer to the parameter list for setting the parameters:
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 277 -
Appendix
Fig. 37: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., a weighbridge)
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 278 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Fig. 38: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., two weighbridges)
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 279 -
Appendix
Fig. 39: Setpoint calculation for loading
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 280 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Fig. 40: Loading setpoint optimization (OPT) and resulting feed belt velocity
9.8
Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit
Fig. 41: Scaling fill level measurement and limits
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 281 -
Appendix
The normal scales applies in normal operation. The fill level is regulated by the metering hopper. In intermittent operation the metering hopper is activated when the fill level F-Min is underrun and is deactivated as soon as the F-Max level is exceeded. If the metering hopper is continuously active (P27.01 = YES), the fill level is regulated to the fill level setpoint F-Set by means of the changes in the metering hopper flow rate. The check measurement takes over the fill regulation when a check is started. Wherever necessary, it is filled until there are sufficient bulk solids in the bin (fill level > C-Check + C-Min). The check starts when the fill level falls below F-Max and is stopped when the fill level falls below C-Min.
9.9
Continuous bin fill level control
Fig. 42: Bin fill level control
Setup Notes
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 282 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
P27.12 can be determined in a stationary state once the transient oscillations have subsided. In this state, the value is calculated as follows: P27.12 = (yB - P27.14 ) × P03.01 / flow rate setpoint We recommend calling up the Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation [➙ 46] adjustment program for the control parameter after entering input the P27.07 and P27.12 parameters.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 283 -
Appendix
9.10
Details and flow chart control measurement (KME)
Fig. 43: Flow chart control measurement
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 284 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
9.11
Linearization
The belt loading does not usually need to be linearized. It only makes sense with major belt load fluctuations. Calibration with calibration weights: 1. Apply calibration weight Q1, start the scale and call up the zero setting program 2. Note the final result of the zero setting program and enter later in the Linearization I1 parameter 3. Cancel the program and do not overwrite the results 4. Put the results of the formula q1 = Q1 / L * 100 % / q0 into the Linearization S1 parameter Where: Q1: calibration weight in kg L: P05.04 Effective Platform Length q0: Nominal Belt Load (service value) Repeat work processes 1 ... 3 with increasingly large calibration weights for the other linearization points. Calibration using material: 1. Run material inspection with a belt load of q1 2. Read the mean of belt load q1(a) on the unit and enter into the Linearization I1 parameter 3. Key in the results of the formula q1(s) = q1(a) * Ms / Ma in Linearization S1 parameters Where: Ms: conveyed quantity of material in kg Ma: quantity of material read on the equipment in kg Repeat work processes 1 ... 3 with increasingly large calibration weights for the other linearization points.
9.12
Correction of the foreign substance portion (moisture)
The group of Moisture parameters can be used to activate a correction in the actual value used for controlling the flow rate. The proportion of foreign matter (such as water) in the bulk solids fed is ascertained externally and communicated to the weighing system. This is the basis the system uses to recalculate the weight ascertained (including foreign substance) onto the net value of the portion relevant to the subsequent step in the process by subtracting the quantity of foreign substance. The mass flow is gravimetrically controlled based on the net value, which means that the quantity equalling the weight of the foreign substance is also fed. The total integration of the gross or corrected net value can be selected as the signal source for the impulse output.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 285 -
Appendix
Fig. 44: Simplified signal flow diagram
9.13
Correction with a known quantity
In special applications with batch systems, the continuous scale records both an already known quantity of bulk solids A and an unknown quantity of bulk solids B to be measured.
Fig. 45: System architecture and signal processing A
Bin with bulk solids A
B
Bin with bulk solids B
MA
The measuring unit for the flow of bulk solids A
MC
The measuring unit for the flow of bulk solids C = A + B
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 286 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
I-cor
The configuration of the correction value. Relevant parameters: P04.08 Difference Flow Rate P04.09 Difference Flow Rate Range P04.10 Difference Flow Rate Offset P04.11 Difference Function
IA
The measured actual flow rate of bulk solids A
IC
The measured actual flow rate of bulk solids C = A + B
IB
The calculated actual flow rate of bulk solids B
R
Optional controller (only with controlled systems)
yA, yB
Optional controller magnitude to the prefeeder for the components (only with controlled systems)
Tab. 48 : Legend
The P04.11 parameter decides on whether the correction to the shown actual flow rate and quantity integration derived from that or/and to the input signal of the optional controller has an impact. This makes it possible to easily control the bulk solids component B even in this architecture.
9.14
Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking'
Fig. 46: Logic diagram of the links between events and ready messages
Explanations: All signal levels can be inverted by setting the associated source parameter (also refer to Configuring the Interfaces [➙ 66]). The factory default is given in the diagram.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 287 -
Appendix ▪ ▪
LOW: closed contact in standby, i.e. power is on. The contact is open if the signal is active (functions as opener). HIGH: open contact in standby, i.e. power is not on. The contact is closed if the signal is active (functions as closer).
E: event message DI: digital input DO: digital output
Legend
Parameters
Alarm
Signal Name All event messages of event class ALARM
DI E 1
P24.06
DI: Event Electricity 1
DI E 2
P24.07
DI: Event Electricity 2
DI E 3
P24.08
DI: Event Electricity 3
DI EE 1
P13.02
DI: External Event 1
DI EE 2
P13.04
DI: External Event 2
DI EE 3
P13.06
DI: External Event 3
DI EE 4
P13.08
DI: External Event 4
DI M 1
P24.01
DI: Event Mechanics 1
DI M 2
P24.02
DI: Event Mechanics 2
DI M 3
P24.03
DI: Event Mechanics 3
DI M 4
P24.04
DI: Event Mechanics 4
DI M 5
P24.05
DI: Event Mechanics 5
DO E
P24.11
DO: Event Electricity
DO M
P24.09
DO: Event Mechanics
DO MT 1
P24.13
DO: Event Mechatronics 1
DO MT 2
P24.14
DO: Event Mechatronics 2
DO R
P24.16
DO: Ready
DO RS
P24.18
DO: Ready for Start
IL-2
P24.10
Event: Mechanics
IL-3
P24.12
Event: Electricity
IL-4
P24.15
Event: Mechatronics
IL-5
P24.17
Event: Not Ready
IL-6
P24.19
Event: Not Ready for Start
Int. alarm
Internal alarm resulting from event messages CA01, CA02, WM01, WM02, WM03, WM04
NO S
No service mode: no keyboard mode, no local mode, no simulation mode
Release
P04.03
Source Run Enable
SC-5
P13.01
Event: External Event 1
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 288 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Legend
Parameters
Signal Name
SC-6
P13.03
Event: External Event 2
SC-11
P13.06
DI: External Event 3
SC-12
P13.08
DI: External Event 4
NOTE:
9.15
When an input source parameter accepts the value n/a, the signal is internally assumed to be True.
Weighing Platforms Platforms
9.15.1 Effective Weighing Platform Length The effective weighing platform length "L" is an important value for calibration. It is determined by the design of the weighing platform and can usually be found in the technical data sheets. However, it is always expedient to measure the length manually and to enter the exact value as a parameter. The hatched area shows the load distribution on the weighing platform. Single-Idler Platform The load on the weighing platform is conducted via a weighing idler into the load cell. This can be done by means of a lever system or without levers by means of a parallel leaf-spring system.
In this case, L is computed as:
Multiple-Idler Platform Several weighing idlers are combined into one mechanical unit, the measuring bridge.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 289 -
Appendix
Buckled Platform The weighing platform consists of two parts. The force is conducted centrally into the load cell. A split measuring table can also be used in place of the weighing idlers.
Mounting for entire belt on one side only
Lg = Distance to the center of the material cone
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 290 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
9.15.2 Calibration Weight The calibration weight simulates a certain belt load and serves to control the weighing system. It can have a direct effect on the weighing platform or via a lever system. The weight acting on the weighing platform, and not the actual weight, must be entered into parameter P10.04. The effective calibration weight QPRF is the weighing platform load in kg simulated by the calibration weight. Single-idler platform Parallel leaf-spring bearing The calibration weight can theoretically be mounted at any point on the weighing platform mechanical equipment. The effective load is always the applied weight QP. QPRF = QP
Pivot joint bearing (e.g. crossed flexure strip)
α
tan( )» 0.018 * a
α=0:K=0 α Angle = neg : K = neg Angle
Multiple-idler platform
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 291 -
Appendix
Entire platform supported on load cells QPRF = QP Pivot joint bearing See single-idler platform
Buckled platform The calibration weight usually has an effect in the center. QPRF = QP The following applies if the entire belt is supported on one side only:
If the belts are inclined, the extension or shortening of the calibration lever corresponding to the single-idler platform must be taken into account. Chain Calibration Weights: If a chain curtain is placed over the weighing platform area, the effective calibration weight then becomes the total weight of the chain in the weighing area. QPRF = n * Lg * s n = Number of chains Lg = Overall weighing platform length in m s = Weight of chain per m in kg/m
9.15.3 Belt inclination In certain cases, the belt inclination must be entered as a parameter. The orientation of the load cell at installation is decisive. At right angles to the belt conveyor The angle
α must be entered as the parameters. The load acting on the load cell is N = Q * cos α.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 292 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Vertical to the belt conveyor
α. The full force Q acts on the load cells.
0° must be entered as angle
9.16
Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters
DISOCONT Tersus has three internal totalizing integrators (=totalizing counters). The results of the counters can be transferred to an external counter by means of one of the following ways: ▪ Via the electronic impulse output (open collector) DO8 of the VCU at a frequency < 10 Hz for external electronic counters. This is the most preferable method. ▪ Via a DO1 ... DO7 of the VCU. The minimum impulse length is 1 s. The life cycle of the output relay is guaranteed for 20 million switches only. Of course, the counter readings can be read more simply via the fieldbus or in the web server. The relevant parameters are: P03.05 Pulse Length Total P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter P03.09 Totalizer Increment
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter
P03.05 Pulse Length Total 0 ... 9 ms
10 ms … 1 s
>1s
DO8
No pulse
10 ms … 1 s
>1s
DO1 … DO7
No pulse
1s
>1s
Tab. 49 : Long counting pulse
P03.09 Totalizer Increment 0 kg > 0 kg
Counting pulse weight determined by: No pulse P03.09 Totalizer Increment
Tab. 50 : Counting pulse weight
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 293 -
Appendix
9.17
Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs
It is usual for some signals to be read in through sensors with strain gauges (DMS) such as weight, force or pressure signals. In special cases, these signals are recorded with other types of sensors or reshaped externally so that they are available in the form of standard signals (such as 4 ... 20 mA). DISOCONT Tersus provides the option of reading in some sources of input signals via standard signals. The standard signal is read in through an analog VAI 20100 interface and reshaped to make it correspond to the signal of a DMS sensor. The remaining signal processing is identical for the DMS signal and standard signal. Some measuring signals can also be read in by fieldbus to prevent faults on the transmission path. These are also processed like DMS signals after appropriate conversion.
Fig. 47: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin LC DMS load cell output voltage FB:kg The weight value in kg transmitted from the fieldbus Adjust Handing over the signal to the set-up program LC_0 The rated load cell load in P26.04 X0 Offset analog input in P26.30 V Transmission factor of the load cell in P26.03
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 294 -
0-20 mA Input current from the external sensor [mV/V] A signal with the dimension mV/V LC [mV/V] The service value of the load in the dimension mV/V LC [%] The service value of the load in percent of LC_0 Xn Range characteristic value in P26.31 x, y Input and output values of the calculating blocks
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Error Error signal if the physical signal is out of range Corr Multiplicative correction of the transmission factor in P26.24
Source Selecting the source for the signal in P26.02 Tare Zero signal in P26.25 such as determined by the setup program
L The load for further use of the application software
This figure uses recording the weight of an additional bin as an example of the form the signals of sources other than DMS load cells are processed in. The set-up programs and service displays (including the parameters for tare and correcting sensitivity) remain in manual override, even though they show some values such as for the DMS load cells. The figure applies accordingly to other signals such as force or pressure. The corresponding parameters are in the group that also contains the parameter for selecting the signal source.
NOTE:
9.18
Please bear the fact in mind that the value resolution of a value read in through the standard signal is reduced by the resolution of the external transmitter and the VAI 20100 interface assembly in relation to the input for DMS via interface VME0120 (VME0120: 24 bits and VAI 20100: 16 bits). In addition, there can also be a temporal offset of the signal due to scanning. There can be additional errors in particular when forming the difference of signals (such as differentiating) or a compensator (such as pressure compensation).
PLC Functionality (Optional)
As with a PLC, you can expand its functionality for additional simple jobs by linking signals and using function blocks. The function block links can only be configured using EasyServe. Any configuration created can be loaded into or read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately after being loaded. All signals that can are available via fieldbus can be used as input signals for the function blocks. The output signals are integrated into the standard signal processing of DISOCONT Tersus with the parameters of the FCB analog outputs and FCB digital outputs groups. A loaded and active link is shown on the operator panel with the information for the program by pressing the Help button. The Empty link designates the factory default without added links.
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 295 -
Appendix
Fig. 48: Example of a function block link
In this example, a binary input signal (for instance, an input contact of DISOCONT Tersus) is being read in through the GP-Din 1 input block and the Delay 1 delay while an inverter is given to the And1-4 AND gate. The other inputs are linked with the constant 1 and a Cycle 1 frequency generator. This provides the output with a cyclical signal when the waiting period has elapsed after setting the input. The output of the AND gate is linked to an output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The physical output requires connecting the signal with a digital output through P37.01 FCB_DO 01.
9.18.1 Handling the Function Blocks Condition: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN (VPL 20430) must be installed on the PC. Function blocks can be edited and linked in EasyServe Expert Mode only. For this DISOPLAN must be started with administrator rights from EasyServe as follows: ▪ Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Blocks', or ▪ Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Variants/parameters' Supplementary documentation: ▪ BV-H2185 EasyServe operating manual ▪ BV-H2461 DISOPLAN operating manual A detailed description of the function block editor can be found in a separate manual (BVH2317)
CAUTION: Creating and modifying links is reserved solely to Schenck Process personnel.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 296 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Configurations can be read out of and loaded into the control. They can be filed on the hard disk of PCs and called up from there. Links have to be given a name. The empty link (as a factory default) has the name Empty and should not be used for other links.
WARNING Possible loss of function when exchanging the VCU. Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded, it will be necessary to store it separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is exchanged, both the parameters and the function block link have to be loaded separately to restore full functionality. Alternatively, you can use the additionally installed tool DISOPLAN (that contains both the parameters and the function block links) to make a complete backup. However, this backup can then no longer be used for setting a more recent version of the program in the scale. It is not necessary with a system with the Empty link (refer to Cleaning the Screen and Information [➙ 41]) to reload the link after exchanging the VCU since there is no expansion to the functions from the function blocks. Loading the function software or loading default settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have any impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is retained. Any loaded link cannot be deleted; it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be overwritten with a new link that has to contain at least one block. A loaded link does not have any effect on scales operation as long as the outputs for the link are not coupled to the scales software with the corresponding parameters P36.01 to P37.20.
9.18.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals The following function blocks are available.
Fig. 49: Binary function blocks
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 297 -
Appendix
No.
Type
quantity
Parameters
Function
1
Binary inputs 'GP-DIn'
20
2
Binary output 'GP-Dout'
20
3
Clock generator 'Cycle'
2
4
Bin 0 Bin 1
1 1
-
5
Pulse generator 'Time'
1
Time for the pulse
6
AND 'And'
6
-
And-link of two input signals
AND 'And 4'
4
-
And-link of four input signals
OR 'Or'
6
-
Or-link of two input signals
OR 'Or 4'
8
-
Or-link of four input signals
8
Negation 'Not'
10
-
Invert the signal
9
Delay 'Delay'
8
7
Process variable as per the deConnection between the function scription of the fieldbus data inter- block logic and the function of the face standard program -
Makes output signals available. Connect using the parameter in the 'FCB digital outputs' block. All outputs are available as status information in the fieldbus interface.
Periodic time
Signal generator for a periodic signal
Generator for the binary constants 1 = True and 0 = False The timer has three outputs that supply an pulse of 0.1 seconds duration at the time set.
Delay time in seconds
Delays the input signal by the specified time
Tab. 51 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
9.18.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals Analog signals can be processed with the following function block.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 298 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Appendix
Fig. 50: Analog function blocks No. Type
Quantity Parameter
Function
1
Analog input 'GP-AIn'
20
Process variable as per Input for a variable with a continuous value. the description of the fieldbus interface
2
Analog output 'GP-Aout'
20
3
Comparator 'Comparator'
6
Upper and lower comparative value
Supplies the value 'True' if the input signal lies outside of the threshold values.
4
'Limit'
10
Upper and lower threshold value
Limits the input signal and becomes True when the limiter arises.
5
Multiplicator 'Multiplicator'
5
-
Supplies the product of the input values at the output
6
Memory 'Memory'
2
-
The input value at MemInp is tied to Acquire with the increasing slope. It is available at the output. At the same time, the Hold output indicates that a value has been stored. The memory can be cleared with Reset.
7
Addition 'Add'
5
-
Makes the sum of the input values available at the output.
8
Subtraction 'Subtract'
5
-
Makes the difference of the input values available at the output
9
Counter
6
-
Start value
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Makes output signals available. Connecting via parameters in the FCB analog outputs block. Only 5 FKB outputs can be configured to physical outputs. All outputs are available as measured values in the fieldbus interface.
Supplies the counted input impulses at the output
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 299 -
Appendix
No. Type
Quantity Parameter
Function
'Counter' 10
Switch 'Analog switch'
1
-
Switches one of the three inputs to the output
11
Multiplication 'Factor'
20
Dividend Divisor
Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor
12
Constant 'Constant'
5
Value of the constants
Supplies the numerical value at the output
13
Offset 'Offset'
10
Dividend Divisor
9.19
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation
Most of the function errors are indicated by event messages. A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently wrong despite correct parameterization. A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating voltage supply to the load cells. A test connector can narrow down any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
Fig. 51: Test Connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus instead of the load cell cable. Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electronics. It must have the following value: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V ± 3 %. Note: The raw measured data can be calculated according to the formula: raw measured data ~ 500 * R2 / R1 [mV/V] if other resistance values should be used in the test connector The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range. The measured load display in kg depends on the way the scale's rated data are set.
BV-H2407GB, 1238 - 300 -
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
Index
Index 2. Password ..................................................................................................................................................................... 99 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset....................................................................................................................................... 186 2nd Bridge analog Input Range...................................................................................................................................... 187 2nd Bridge MAX ............................................................................................................................................................. 184 2nd Bridge MIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 184 2nd Bridge Offset ........................................................................................................................................................... 186 2nd Bridge Range .......................................................................................................................................................... 186 2nd Weighbridge ............................................................................................................................................................ 183 2nd Weighbridge ............................................................................................................................................................ 182 2nd Weighbridge active .................................................................................................................................................. 182 2-Sensor Slip.................................................................................................................................................................. 209 2-Sensor Slip active ....................................................................................................................................................... 209 2-sensor slip monitoring ................................................................................................................................................. 269 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................................... 66 About This Manual ............................................................................................................................................................. 1 Absolute Range.............................................................................................................................................................. 195 Accept Correction ........................................................................................................................................................... 189 Access Rights Limitation FB........................................................................................................................................... 153 Access Rights Limitation HMI........................................................................................................................................... 97 Access to Special Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 27 Accessing the Configuration............................................................................................................................................. 37 Acknowledging Event Messages...................................................................................................................................... 29 Activating belt influence compensation (BIC) ................................................................................................................... 58 Activating measurement and feeding with reference to the discharge point (VAP) .......................................................... 58 Adaptation 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 128 Adaptation Factor ........................................................................................................................................................... 140 Adaptation Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 140 Additional Bin Weighers ................................................................................................................................................... 15 additional containers ........................................................................................................................................................ 15 Address .................................................................................................................................................................. 151, 152 Adjusting the external flow rate controller......................................................................................................................... 55 Adjusting the feeding controller ........................................................................................................................................ 56 Afterflow Totalizer .......................................................................................................................................................... 109 AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................................. 201 AI Offset ........................................................................................................................................................................ 207 AI Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................... 207 AI Range ....................................................................................................................................................................... 207 Analog Channel A10 ........................................................................................................................................................ 93 Analog Channel A11 ........................................................................................................................................................ 94 Analog Output 2nd Bridge .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Analog Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 128 Analog Setpoint Relat..................................................................................................................................................... 141 Angle .............................................................................................................................................................................. 107 AO Actual Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................... 128 AO Belt Load ................................................................................................................................................................. 129 AO Bin Load .................................................................................................................................................................. 176 AO Check Measurement Result .................................................................................................................................... 198 AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level ............................................................................................................................... 179 AO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 130 AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................................ 202 AO Flow Rate Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 203 AO Flow Rate Range .................................................................................................................................................... 203 AO Motor Speed Control ............................................................................................................................................... 131 AO Offset .............................................................................................................................................................. 176, 207 AO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 159 AO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 159 AO Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 207 AO Range ............................................................................................................................................................. 176, 208 AO Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................................... 128 AO Speed...................................................................................................................................................................... 129 Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................................ 257 Assembling the Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................ 54 Authorization for Control Commands ............................................................................................................................... 26
Index Auto Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 188 Auto Zero Active ............................................................................................................................................................. 112 Automatic control measurement unit (KME) ..................................................................................................................... 47 Basic Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 27 Basic Tare ...................................................................................................................................................................... 121 Batch Automatic Record................................................................................................................................................. 140 Batch behaviour after power down ................................................................................................................................. 143 Batch control .................................................................................................................................................................. 100 Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 139 Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 139 Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................................................. 267 Batch Setpoint Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 142 Batch Setpoint Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 141 Batch Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................... 141 Batch Setpoint Source.................................................................................................................................................... 139 Batch Tolerance ............................................................................................................................................................. 142 Batching ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Baud rate................................................................................................................................................................ 151, 152 Baud Rate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 148 Behavior after Connecting the Power ............................................................................................................................... 17 Belt Circuit No. ............................................................................................................................................................... 121 Belt Circuit Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 121 Belt Drift ......................................................................................................................................................................... 146 Belt inclination ................................................................................................................................................................ 292 Belt Influence Compensation BIC .................................................................................................................................... 13 Belt Limit Switch ............................................................................................................................................................. 135 Belt Load Controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 162 Belt Load Controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 162 Belt Load Offset ............................................................................................................................................................. 129 Belt Load Range ............................................................................................................................................................ 129 Belt load regulation of the velocity-controlled weighfeeder............................................................................................. 276 Belt Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................... 144 Belt Sensor Active .......................................................................................................................................................... 145 Belt Skew ....................................................................................................................................................................... 146 Belt slip identification ...................................................................................................................................................... 268 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ...................................................................................................................................... 268 Belt Velocity Check .......................................................................................................................................................... 59 Beltweigher with a constant load ...................................................................................................................................... 13 BIC Active ...................................................................................................................................................................... 145 Bin Controller ON ........................................................................................................................................................... 178 Bin Level analog Input Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 178 Bin Level analog Input Range ........................................................................................................................................ 178 Bin Level Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 178 Bin Level MAX................................................................................................................................................................ 175 Bin Level MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 174 Bin Setpoint source ........................................................................................................................................................ 182 Bin Weigher.................................................................................................................................................................... 170 Bin Weigher Active ......................................................................................................................................................... 171 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation ................................................................................................................................ 34 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit ....................................................................................................................................... 281 Bin weight control ............................................................................................................................................................. 46 Bipolar Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 172 Blind Distance ........................................................................................................................................................ 163, 193 Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge ....................................................................................................................................... 170 Bypass ................................................................................................................................................................... 127, 180 Bypass D Portion ........................................................................................................................................................... 181 Byte Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................... 151 CA01 Event Error LC Input........................................................................................................................................... 237 CA02 Event Tachometer Input ..................................................................................................................................... 238 CA03 Event Error LC Input (Bin) .................................................................................................................................. 238 CA04 Event Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) ...................................................................................................................... 238 CA05 Event Linearization Error .................................................................................................................................... 238 CA06 Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................ 239 CA07 Event DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................ 239 Calibrating bin weighing ................................................................................................................................................... 61 Calibrating the Touchscreen ............................................................................................................................................ 40
Index Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 237 Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 120 Calibration programs ........................................................................................................................................................ 41 Calibration Weight .......................................................................................................................................... 121, 177, 291 CH01 Event Minimum Check Quantity ......................................................................................................................... 239 CH02 Event Minimum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................. 239 CH03 Event Maximum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................ 240 CH04 Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 240 CH05 Event Relative Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................. 240 CH06 Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................... 241 CH07 Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 241 CH08 Event Feeder Not Stopped ................................................................................................................................. 241 CH09 Event No Check Release ................................................................................................................................... 241 CH10 Event Prepare Check Measurement .................................................................................................................. 241 CH11 Event Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................. 242 CH12 Event Check Gate Error ..................................................................................................................................... 242 CH13 Event Bin Error ................................................................................................................................................... 242 Chain Motion Delay ........................................................................................................................................................ 111 Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 209 Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 209 Check Circuits ................................................................................................................................................................ 190 Check Gate Feedback.................................................................................................................................................... 198 Check Gate Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 199 Check in Keyboard Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 150 Check Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 239 Check Quantity............................................................................................................................................................... 190 Check Start Span ........................................................................................................................................................... 189 Check Start Tare ............................................................................................................................................................ 189 Check System ................................................................................................................................................................ 187 Check with bulk solids ...................................................................................................................................................... 60 Checking the continuous scale with a calibration weight .................................................................................................. 43 Checking the scale with calibration weights ..................................................................................................................... 59 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation...................................................................................................... 300 Cleaning and Testing the Display..................................................................................................................................... 33 Cleaning the Screen and Information ............................................................................................................................... 41 CleanOut OFF Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 111 CleanOut ON Time ......................................................................................................................................................... 111 CLOSE in Remote .......................................................................................................................................................... 235 CO01 Event Controller Limited ..................................................................................................................................... 242 CO02 Event MIN Flow Gate ......................................................................................................................................... 243 CO03 Event MAX Flow Gate........................................................................................................................................ 243 CO04 Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 243 CO05 Event Volum. caused by LC-error ...................................................................................................................... 243 Command and Edit Keys.................................................................................................................................................. 26 Communication EasyServe ............................................................................................................................................ 148 Communication Fieldbus ................................................................................................................................................ 149 Compatibility DISOCONT Master ................................................................................................................................... 150 Compensation Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 210 Compensation analog Input Offset ................................................................................................................................. 214 Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................................ 214 Compensation Source .................................................................................................................................................... 211 Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 151 Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................................................................................. 223 Configuring Event Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 68 Configuring the Communication Path (Com) .................................................................................................................... 39 Configuring the Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 66 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ............................................................................................................................. 37 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ............................................................................... 18 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 19 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 21 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) ................................................................................................................................ 41 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 18, 20 Connection via Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................... 19 Connection via Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................... 18 Connection via RS-232 .................................................................................................................................................... 20 Connection via RS485...................................................................................................................................................... 19
Index Connection via WLAN ...................................................................................................................................................... 20 Continuous bin fill level control ....................................................................................................................................... 282 Continuous scale zero setting .......................................................................................................................................... 44 Control Level MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 174 Control Level MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 174 Control operating modes .................................................................................................................................................. 10 Control Sources ............................................................................................................................................................. 103 Control strategies ............................................................................................................................................................. 10 Controller........................................................................................................................................................................ 242 Controller active ............................................................................................................................................................. 185 Controller in OFF-Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 177 Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ....................................................................................................................................... 226 Controller Magnitude (Block 2) ....................................................................................................................................... 228 Controller Magnitude (Block 3) ....................................................................................................................................... 230 Controller Magnitude (Block 4) ....................................................................................................................................... 231 Controller Magnitude (Block 5) ....................................................................................................................................... 233 Controller Magnitude Adaption ....................................................................................................................................... 162 Controller Magnitude Offset ................................................................................................................................... 125, 181 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) ............................................................................................................................ 226 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 2) ............................................................................................................................ 228 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 3) ............................................................................................................................ 230 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 4) ............................................................................................................................ 232 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 5) ............................................................................................................................ 233 Controller Magnitude Prefeeder ..................................................................................................................................... 164 Controlling with VLG ...................................................................................................................................................... 270 Controlling with VMO...................................................................................................................................................... 271 Correction Amount ......................................................................................................................................................... 140 Correction Evaluation ..................................................................................................................................................... 197 Correction of the foreign substance portion (moisture) .................................................................................................. 285 Correction Speed ........................................................................................................................................................... 197 Correction with a known quantity ................................................................................................................................... 286 Counter 1 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 102 Counter 2 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 103 Counter 3 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 103 Cycle Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 188 Cyclic Auto Start............................................................................................................................................................. 188 D Filter TD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 180 D Portion TV................................................................................................................................................................... 180 Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 221 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ..................................................................................................................... 6 Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 193 Data Format ................................................................................................................................................................... 152 Data Log ON/OFF .......................................................................................................................................................... 101 Data Log Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222 Data Log Value 10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 223 Data Log Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222 Data Log Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222 Data Log Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222 Data Log Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222 Data Log Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222 Data Log Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 223 Data Log Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 223 Data Log Value 9 ........................................................................................................................................................... 223 Data Logging .................................................................................................................................................................. 221 Dead Band Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 181 Dead Band Factor .......................................................................................................................................................... 181 Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 203 Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 203 Dead Time Active ........................................................................................................................................................... 203 Dead Time TT ................................................................................................................................................................ 179 Detail Selection ................................................................................................................................................................ 26 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ....................................................................................................... 284 Determining the duration of a belt circuit .......................................................................................................................... 41 Deviation abs. max......................................................................................................................................................... 123 Deviation Offset.............................................................................................................................................................. 130 Deviation Range............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Index DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................................ 133 DI Batch Terminate ....................................................................................................................................................... 140 DI BIC freeze................................................................................................................................................................. 148 DI Bin Load Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 177 DI Chain Motion Monitor................................................................................................................................................ 111 DI Event Electricity 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 160 DI Event Electricity 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 160 DI Event Electricity 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 160 DI Event Mechanics 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 159 DI Event Mechanics 2 ................................................................................................................................................... 159 DI Event Mechanics 3 ................................................................................................................................................... 159 DI Event Mechanics 4 ................................................................................................................................................... 159 DI Event Mechanics 5 ................................................................................................................................................... 160 DI External Error 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 236 DI External Error 1 (Block 1) ......................................................................................................................................... 227 DI External Error 1 (Block 2) ......................................................................................................................................... 228 DI External Error 1 (Block 3) ......................................................................................................................................... 230 DI External Error 1 (Block 4) ......................................................................................................................................... 232 DI External Error 1 (Block 5) ......................................................................................................................................... 234 DI External Error 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 236 DI External Error 2 (Block 1) ......................................................................................................................................... 227 DI External Error 2 (Block 2) ......................................................................................................................................... 229 DI External Error 2 (Block 3) ......................................................................................................................................... 230 DI External Error 2 (Block 4) ......................................................................................................................................... 232 DI External Error 2 (Block 5) ......................................................................................................................................... 234 DI External Error 3 ........................................................................................................................................................ 236 DI External Error 3 (Block 1) ......................................................................................................................................... 227 DI External Error 3 (Block 2) ......................................................................................................................................... 229 DI External Error 3 (Block 3) ......................................................................................................................................... 231 DI External Error 3 (Block 4) ......................................................................................................................................... 232 DI External Error 3 (Block 5) ......................................................................................................................................... 234 DI External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 131 DI External Event 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 132 DI External Event 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... 132 DI External Event 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 132 DI Init. Controller ........................................................................................................................................................... 182 DI Limit Switch CLOSE ................................................................................................................................................. 236 DI Limit Switch OPEN ................................................................................................................................................... 235 DI Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 133 DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1).......................................................................................................................................... 227 DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 2).......................................................................................................................................... 229 DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 3).......................................................................................................................................... 231 DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 4).......................................................................................................................................... 233 DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 5).......................................................................................................................................... 234 DI Reset Totalizer 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 135 DI Reset Totalizer 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 135 DI Sensor 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 209 DI Sensor 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 209 DI Source Belt Sensor ................................................................................................................................................... 145 DI Switch On Compensation ......................................................................................................................................... 214 DI Volumetric Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 133 DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................................. 133 DI Zero Set .................................................................................................................................................................... 136 Dialog Behaviour .............................................................................................................................................................. 96 Difference Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................................... 105 Difference Flow Rate Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 106 Difference Flow Rate Range .......................................................................................................................................... 106 Difference Function ........................................................................................................................................................ 106 Digital Inputs .................................................................................................................................................................. 131 Digital Outputs................................................................................................................................................................ 136 Display and Operation Fields ........................................................................................................................................... 24 Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 173 Display Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 173 Display Parameter Alterations .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Display Stored Counter Readings .................................................................................................................................... 34 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ........................................................................................................................ 34
Index Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. .............................................................................................................. 34 DO 2nd Bridge MAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 185 DO 2nd Bridge MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 184 DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 137 DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 137 DO ALARM ................................................................................................................................................................... 137 DO Batch Running ........................................................................................................................................................ 141 DO Belt Drift .................................................................................................................................................................. 147 DO Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................................ 147 DO Belt Slip................................................................................................................................................................... 148 DO Bin Filling ................................................................................................................................................................ 174 DO Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 176 DO Bin Level MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 175 DO Check Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 198 DO Check Measurement Active .................................................................................................................................... 194 DO CleanOut Timer ...................................................................................................................................................... 110 DO Control Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 193 DO Correction Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 200 DO Dead Time Active.................................................................................................................................................... 205 DO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 137 DO Dribble Feed ........................................................................................................................................................... 141 DO Event Electricity ...................................................................................................................................................... 160 DO Event Mechanics..................................................................................................................................................... 160 DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 161 DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 161 DO Feeder ON .............................................................................................................................................................. 179 DO Feeder Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 136 DO Full Feed ................................................................................................................................................................. 141 DO Keyboard Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 139 DO Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................................... 138 DO Load MIN ................................................................................................................................................................ 138 DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 138 DO Moisture active ........................................................................................................................................................ 202 DO Moisture MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 202 DO ON/OFF Active ....................................................................................................................................................... 205 DO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 157 DO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158 DO PLC 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158 DO PLC 4 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158 DO PLC 5 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158 DO PLC 6 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158 DO PLC 7 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158 DO PLC 8 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158 DO Pre-cut-off ............................................................................................................................................................... 142 DO Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 214 DO Pressure-MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 213 DO Pulse Counter ......................................................................................................................................................... 103 DO Ready ..................................................................................................................................................................... 161 DO Ready for Start........................................................................................................................................................ 161 DO Scale Start .............................................................................................................................................................. 136 DO Setpoint Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 205 DO Slip 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 210 DO Speed MAX............................................................................................................................................................. 138 DO Speed MIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 138 DO Start Prefeeder ....................................................................................................................................................... 137 DO Volumetric Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 138 DO WARNING .............................................................................................................................................................. 139 DO Zero Set OK ............................................................................................................................................................ 139 DO Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................................. 195 Effective Platform Length ....................................................................................................................................... 107, 183 Effective Weighing Platform Length ............................................................................................................................... 289 Electrical Connections ...................................................................................................................................................... 54 Electrical System............................................................................................................................................................ 244 Emergency Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................... 117 Entering Basic parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 54 Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Index Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event
2nd Bridge MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 185, 249 2nd Bridge MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 184, 253 Absolute Span Correction Error .................................................................................................................. 197, 241 Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 196, 240 Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................ 119, 248 Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................. 118, 252 Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................... 150, 256 Analog Input < Offset .................................................................................................................................. 117, 245 Batch setpoint Limit ..................................................................................................................................... 143, 247 Belt Drift ...................................................................................................................................................... 146, 251 Belt Skew .................................................................................................................................................... 146, 250 Bin Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 200, 242 Bin Level MAX............................................................................................................................................. 175, 249 Bin Level MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 175, 252 Bin Load MAX Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 177, 243 Chain Motion Monitor .................................................................................................................................. 112, 251 Check Gate Error ........................................................................................................................................ 199, 242 Communication HMI 1................................................................................................................................... 98, 255 Communication HMI 2................................................................................................................................... 98, 255 Communication HMI 3................................................................................................................................... 99, 255 Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ................................................................................................................ 94, 255 Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ................................................................................................................ 95, 255 Communication VHM serial ........................................................................................................................... 99, 255 Communication VMO20100-Unit 1................................................................................................................ 96, 256 Communication VMO20100-Unit 2................................................................................................................ 96, 256 Controller Limited ........................................................................................................................................ 124, 242 Cyclic Communication................................................................................................................................. 150, 256 Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 124, 248 DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................... 211, 239 DMS-Input < MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 212, 252 DMS-Input > MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 212, 249 Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 161, 246 Error LC Input ............................................................................................................................................. 115, 237 Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) ......................................................................................................................... 184, 238 Error LC Input (Bin) ..................................................................................................................................... 172, 238 Expect Acceptance ..................................................................................................................................... 194, 242 External Event 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 131, 254 External Event 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 131, 254 External Event 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 132, 254 External Event 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 132, 254 FCB-Error.................................................................................................................................................... 218, 246 Feeder Not Stopped .................................................................................................................................... 194, 241 LC Input < MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 115, 251 LC Input > MAX........................................................................................................................... 116, 173, 247, 249 Limit Switch ................................................................................................................................................. 135, 250 Linearization Error ....................................................................................................................................... 207, 238 Load MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 119, 248 Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................... 119, 252 Maint. Electric.............................................................................................................................................. 143, 254 Maint.Feeder Run ....................................................................................................................................... 144, 254 MAX Flow Gate ........................................................................................................................................... 208, 243 Maximum Fill Weight ................................................................................................................................... 192, 240 Mechanics ................................................................................................................................................... 160, 246 Mechatronics ............................................................................................................................................... 161, 246 Memory ....................................................................................................................................................... 116, 254 MIN Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 208, 243 Minimum Check Quantity ............................................................................................................................ 191, 239 Minimum Fill Weight .................................................................................................................................... 192, 239 Moisture MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 202, 247 NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ............................................................................................................................. 133, 244 NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 ............................................................................................................................. 134, 244 NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 ............................................................................................................................. 134, 244 NAMUR Error VCU2-DI7 ............................................................................................................................. 134, 244 NAMUR Error VCU3-DI6 ............................................................................................................................. 134, 245 NAMUR Error VCU3-DI7 ............................................................................................................................. 135, 245 NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ............................................................................................................................ 136, 245
Index Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ............................................................................................................................ 136, 245 Event No Check Release ...................................................................................................................................... 189, 241 Event Not Ready ................................................................................................................................................... 161, 246 Event Not Ready for Start ..................................................................................................................................... 162, 246 Event Out of Tolerance ......................................................................................................................................... 142, 247 Event Power Failure .............................................................................................................................................. 116, 244 Event Prepare Check Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 194, 241 Event Pressure-MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 213, 250 Event Pressure-MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 213, 253 Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 197, 241 Event Relative Tare Correction Error .................................................................................................................... 196, 240 Event Run Disabled .............................................................................................................................................. 104, 246 Event Setpoint Limited .......................................................................................................................................... 116, 253 Event Slip .............................................................................................................................................................. 147, 250 Event Slip 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 210, 251 Event Speed MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 120, 248 Event Speed MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 120, 252 Event Stand-By ..................................................................................................................................................... 114, 253 Event Tachometer Input ........................................................................................................................................ 115, 238 Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................... 113, 239 Event Volum. caused by LC-error ......................................................................................................................... 114, 243 Event Group: Calibration ................................................................................................................................................ 237 Event Group: Check Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 239 Event Group: Controller.................................................................................................................................................. 242 Event Group: Electrical System ...................................................................................................................................... 244 Event Group: Interlock.................................................................................................................................................... 246 Event Group: Material Flow ............................................................................................................................................ 247 Event Group: MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 247 Event Group: Mechanic .................................................................................................................................................. 250 Event Group: MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 251 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 253 Event Group: System Message ...................................................................................................................................... 254 Event messages ............................................................................................................................................................... 24 Event Messages ............................................................................................................................................................. 237 Events Details ................................................................................................................................................................ 237 Exit Scale ....................................................................................................................................................................... 101 External Control Type....................................................................................................................................................... 50 Factor Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................. 123 FCB analog outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 214 FCB digital outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 218 FCB Variant.................................................................................................................................................................... 218 FCB_AO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 214 FCB_AO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 215 FCB_AO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 216 FCB_AO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 216 FCB_AO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 217 FCB_DO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 218 FCB_DO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219 FCB_DO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219 FCB_DO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219 FCB_DO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219 FCB_DO 06 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219 FCB_DO 07 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219 FCB_DO 08 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219 FCB_DO 09 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220 FCB_DO 10 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220 FCB_DO 11 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220 FCB_DO 12 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220 FCB_DO 13 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220 FCB_DO 14 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220 FCB_DO 15 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220 FCB_DO 16 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221 FCB_DO 17 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221 FCB_DO 18 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221 FCB_DO 19 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221 FCB_DO 20 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221
Index Feeder Constant ............................................................................................................................................................ 179 Feeder control ................................................................................................................................................................ 109 Feeder Definition ............................................................................................................................................................ 101 Feeder Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 114 Feeder Start ................................................................................................................................................................... 104 Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................................. 193 Feedrate Setpoint........................................................................................................................................................... 104 Fig. 01: The measuring principle for the beltweigher and weighfeeder .............................................................................. 9 Fig. 02: Weighfeeder control principle .............................................................................................................................. 11 Fig. 03: Weighfeeder with feed control as the control principle ........................................................................................ 11 Fig. 04: The belt scale with feed control as the control principle ...................................................................................... 12 Fig. 05: Constant belt load control principle ..................................................................................................................... 13 Fig. 06: Load curve over belt circuits ................................................................................................................................ 13 Fig. 07: The weighfeeder control principle with BIC and VAP .......................................................................................... 14 Fig. 08: Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................... 15 Fig. 09: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display ............................................................................................... 23 Fig. 10: Lines configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 32 Fig. 11: Selection dialog for process values ..................................................................................................................... 33 Fig. 12: Single Unit KME Model ....................................................................................................................................... 48 Fig. 13: Separated Units Control Type ............................................................................................................................. 49 Fig. 14: Filling System KME Type .................................................................................................................................... 49 Fig. 15: External KME Type ............................................................................................................................................. 50 Fig. 16: Weighbridge ........................................................................................................................................................ 53 Fig. 17: Belt scale alignment points: A for troughed belts, B for flat belts ......................................................................... 53 Fig. 18: Belt run measurement and belt slip measurement .............................................................................................. 57 Fig. 19: Arrangement for verification with bulk material .................................................................................................... 60 Fig. 20: Parameter sets .................................................................................................................................................... 65 Fig. 21: Setpoint and switch-on sources......................................................................................................................... 257 Fig. 22: The start and stop sequence ............................................................................................................................. 258 Fig. 23: The module for measuring the belt load, belt velocity and flow rate .................................................................. 260 Fig. 24: Standard flow rate controller ............................................................................................................................. 262 Fig. 25: Universal flow rate controller ............................................................................................................................. 263 Fig. 26: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0........ 264 Fig. 27: Upper controller magnitude limit ........................................................................................................................ 265 Fig. 28: Batching flow chart without setpoint ramp ......................................................................................................... 267 Fig. 29: 2-sensor slip identification ................................................................................................................................. 269 Fig. 30: Local operation with VLG .................................................................................................................................. 271 Fig. 31: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100 ............................................................................................................................ 271 Fig. 32: VMO 20101 with VCU ....................................................................................................................................... 272 Fig. 33: Inserted local operation logic ............................................................................................................................. 272 Fig. 34: Local operation logic for rotating drives ............................................................................................................. 273 Fig. 35: The logic for position-controlled drives .............................................................................................................. 275 Fig. 36: Prefeeder control weighfeeder .......................................................................................................................... 277 Fig. 37: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., a weighbridge).................................................................... 278 Fig. 38: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., two weighbridges) .............................................................. 279 Fig. 39: Setpoint calculation for loading ......................................................................................................................... 280 Fig. 40: Loading setpoint optimization (OPT) and resulting feed belt velocity ................................................................ 281 Fig. 41: Scaling fill level measurement and limits ........................................................................................................... 281 Fig. 42: Bin fill level control............................................................................................................................................. 282 Fig. 43: Flow chart control measurement ....................................................................................................................... 284 Fig. 44: Simplified signal flow diagram ........................................................................................................................... 286 Fig. 45: System architecture and signal processing ....................................................................................................... 286 Fig. 46: Logic diagram of the links between events and ready messages ..................................................................... 287 Fig. 47: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin .................................................... 294 Fig. 48: Example of a function block link ........................................................................................................................ 296 Fig. 49: Binary function blocks ....................................................................................................................................... 297 Fig. 50: Analog function blocks ...................................................................................................................................... 299 Fig. 51: Test Connector .................................................................................................................................................. 300 Filling control bin weigher ............................................................................................................................................... 100 Filling System Control Type ............................................................................................................................................. 49 Filling Type ..................................................................................................................................................................... 179 Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................. 117 Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ...................................................................................................................................... 117 Filter Belt Load .............................................................................................................................................................. 118 Filter Belt Speed ............................................................................................................................................................ 118 Filter Deviation .............................................................................................................................................................. 122
Index Filter Pressure Value DMS ............................................................................................................................................. 211 Filters ............................................................................................................................................................................. 117 Finish Check Measurement............................................................................................................................................ 190 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering........................................................................................................................ 6 Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 154 FLOAT-Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 152 Flow Gate ....................................................................................................................................................................... 207 Flow rate controller......................................................................................................................................................... 262 Flow Rate Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 182 Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................ 129 Flow Rate Range ........................................................................................................................................................... 129 Flow Rate Units .............................................................................................................................................................. 102 Format Data ................................................................................................................................................................... 148 Function Blocks for Analog Signals ................................................................................................................................ 298 Function Blocks for Binary Signals ................................................................................................................................. 297 Function Check ................................................................................................................................................................ 59 Gateway ......................................................................................................................................................................... 157 General Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Gravimetric Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 10 Handling the Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 296 Hardware Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 93 HI01 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 247 HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................... 248 HI03 Event Load MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 248 HI04 Event Speed MAX ............................................................................................................................................... 248 HI05 Event Deviation.................................................................................................................................................... 248 HI10 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 249 HI11 Event Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 249 HI12 Event 2nd Bridge MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 249 HI14 Event DMS-Input > MAX...................................................................................................................................... 249 HI16 Event Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 250 HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................................. 223 HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................................. 223 HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224 Hourly Total Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 221 I-Component TN............................................................................................................................................. 122, 180, 186 ID Preset Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154 ID Preset Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154 ID Preset Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154 ID Preset Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154 ID Preset Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154 ID Preset Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154 ID Preset Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154 ID Preset Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 155 ID Read Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155 ID Read Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156 ID Read Value 11 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156 ID Read Value 12 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156 ID Read Value 13 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156 ID Read Value 14 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156 ID Read Value 15 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156 ID Read Value 16 ........................................................................................................................................................... 157 ID Read Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155 ID Read Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155 ID Read Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155 ID Read Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155 ID Read Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155 ID Read Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155 ID Read Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................. 156
Index ID Read Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................................. 156 IL01 Event Run Disabled.............................................................................................................................................. 246 IL02 Event Mechanics .................................................................................................................................................. 246 IL03 Event Electricity .................................................................................................................................................... 246 IL04 Event Mechatronics .............................................................................................................................................. 246 IL05 Event Not Ready .................................................................................................................................................. 246 IL06 Event Not Ready for Start .................................................................................................................................... 246 IL10 Event FCB-Error ................................................................................................................................................... 246 Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................................. 204 Interlock.......................................................................................................................................................................... 246 Interlocking ..................................................................................................................................................................... 159 IP Address...................................................................................................................................................................... 157 JOG enable (Block 1) ..................................................................................................................................................... 226 JOG enable (Block 2) ..................................................................................................................................................... 228 JOG enable (Block 3) ..................................................................................................................................................... 230 JOG enable (Block 4) ..................................................................................................................................................... 232 JOG enable (Block 5) ..................................................................................................................................................... 234 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ................................................................................................................................................. 30 Language ......................................................................................................................................................................... 96 LC Load Measurement .................................................................................................................................................. 171 LC Characteristic Value.................................................................................................................................. 106, 171, 183 LC Filter.......................................................................................................................................................... 120, 172, 183 LC Rated Capacity ......................................................................................................................................... 107, 172, 183 Lever Ratio ..................................................................................................................................................................... 107 Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 118 Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 118 Limit Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................................. 119 Limit Load MIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 119 Limit Speed MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 120 Limit Speed MIN............................................................................................................................................................ 120 Limit Max. Bin Error ........................................................................................................................................................ 199 Limit Value Difference .................................................................................................................................................... 113 Limit Values.................................................................................................................................................................... 118 Linearization ................................................................................................................................................................... 285 Linearization ................................................................................................................................................................... 205 Linearization I1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206 Linearization I2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206 Linearization I3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206 Linearization I4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206 Linearization ON ............................................................................................................................................................ 205 Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 205 Linearization S2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206 Linearization S3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206 Linearization S4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ..................................................................................................................... 287 LO01 Event LC Input < MIN ......................................................................................................................................... 251 LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 252 LO03 Event Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 252 LO04 Event Speed MIN ............................................................................................................................................... 252 LO10 Event DMS-Input < MIN...................................................................................................................................... 252 LO11 Event Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 252 LO12 Event 2nd Bridge MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 253 LO16 Event Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 253 Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset ...................................................................................................................................... 108 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ..................................................................................................................................... 109 Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset ...................................................................................................................................... 109 Load Cell 2 analog Input Range ..................................................................................................................................... 109 Local Mode (Gate) ......................................................................................................................................................... 235 Local Mode (Speed) ....................................................................................................................................................... 225 Local operation............................................................................................................................................................... 270 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves........................................................................................................ 273 Logger cycle time ........................................................................................................................................................... 222 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) ........................................................................................................................ 40 Lower Limit ..................................................................................................................................................... 124, 163, 181 Maintenance and Recalibration ........................................................................................................................................ 63 Maintenance Electric ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
Index Maintenance Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................... 144 Maintenance interval ...................................................................................................................................................... 143 Material Flow .................................................................................................................................................................. 247 MAX ............................................................................................................................................................................... 247 Maximum Fill Weight ...................................................................................................................................................... 192 Mean Limit Value ........................................................................................................................................................... 113 Measured Values and Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 26 Measuring and Feeding at the Discharge Point (VAP) ..................................................................................................... 14 Measuring principle ............................................................................................................................................................ 8 Measuring the flow rate (M)............................................................................................................................................ 260 Mechanic ........................................................................................................................................................................ 250 Mechanical Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 53 MF05 Event Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 247 MF06 Event Out of Tolerance ...................................................................................................................................... 247 MF07 Event Batch setpoint Limit .................................................................................................................................. 247 MIN................................................................................................................................................................................. 251 Minimum Check Quantity ............................................................................................................................................... 191 Minimum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................................... 192 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation.................................................................................... 26 Moisture ......................................................................................................................................................................... 200 Moisture Active............................................................................................................................................................... 200 Moisture MAX................................................................................................................................................................. 202 Moisture Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 201 Moisture Range .............................................................................................................................................................. 201 Moisture Select .............................................................................................................................................................. 201 Motor Select ................................................................................................................................................................... 235 Motor Select (Block 1) .................................................................................................................................................... 225 Motor Select (Block 2) .................................................................................................................................................... 227 Motor Select (Block 3) .................................................................................................................................................... 229 Motor Select (Block 4) .................................................................................................................................................... 231 Motor Select (Block 5) .................................................................................................................................................... 233 Name of the Device .......................................................................................................................................................... 24 Net Mask ........................................................................................................................................................................ 157 Nominal Bin Load ........................................................................................................................................................... 173 Nominal Flow Rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 101 Nominal Moisture ........................................................................................................................................................... 201 Nominal Speed............................................................................................................................................................... 101 Norming.......................................................................................................................................................................... 212 Offset.............................................................................................................................................................................. 163 Offset FCB_AO 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 214 Offset FCB_AO 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 215 Offset FCB_AO 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 216 Offset FCB_AO 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 216 Offset FCB_AO 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 217 ON in Remote (Block 1) ................................................................................................................................................. 225 ON in Remote (Block 2) ................................................................................................................................................. 228 ON in Remote (Block 3) ................................................................................................................................................. 229 ON in Remote (Block 4) ................................................................................................................................................. 231 ON in Remote (Block 5) ................................................................................................................................................. 233 ON/OFF Clock ON ......................................................................................................................................................... 204 On/Off Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 25 ON/OFF Select............................................................................................................................................................... 204 OPEN in Remote ............................................................................................................................................................ 235 Operating and Control Access ......................................................................................................................................... 17 Operating the calibration functions ................................................................................................................................... 37 Operating the control measurement (KME) ...................................................................................................................... 50 Operation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17 Optimize Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 122 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .......................................................................................................................... 46 Own Address.................................................................................................................................................................. 148 P01 - Hardware Modules.................................................................................................................................................. 93 P01.01 - Analog Channel A10 .......................................................................................................................................... 93 P01.02 - Analog Channel A11 .......................................................................................................................................... 94 P01.03 - VCU20100-Unit 2............................................................................................................................................... 94 P01.04 - VCU2 Analog Channel A10 .............................................................................................................................. 94 P01.05 - VCU2 Analog Channel A11 .............................................................................................................................. 94
Index P01.06 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 .......................................................................................................... 94 P01.07 - VCU20100-Unit 3............................................................................................................................................... 95 P01.08 - VCU3 Analog Channel A10 .............................................................................................................................. 95 P01.09 - VCU3 Analog Channel A11 .............................................................................................................................. 95 P01.10 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 .......................................................................................................... 95 P01.11 - VHM RS485 Address......................................................................................................................................... 95 P01.12 - VMO20100-Unit 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 96 P01.13 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ......................................................................................................... 96 P01.14 - VMO20100-Unit 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 96 P01.15 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ......................................................................................................... 96 P02 - Dialog Behaviour .................................................................................................................................................... 96 P02.01 - Language ........................................................................................................................................................... 96 P02.02 - Units .................................................................................................................................................................. 97 P02.03 - Scale Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 97 P02.04 - Access Rights Limitation HMI ............................................................................................................................ 97 P02.05 - Remote IP Address HMI 1 ................................................................................................................................. 97 P02.06 - Event Communication HMI 1 ............................................................................................................................ 98 P02.07 - Remote IP Address HMI 2 ................................................................................................................................. 98 P02.08 - Event Communication HMI 2 ............................................................................................................................ 98 P02.09 - Remote IP Address HMI 3 ................................................................................................................................. 98 P02.10 - Event Communication HMI 3 ............................................................................................................................ 99 P02.11 - Event Communication VHM serial .................................................................................................................... 99 P02.12 - Password ........................................................................................................................................................... 99 P02.13 - 2. Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 99 P02.14 - Reset Counter 1............................................................................................................................................... 100 P02.15 - Reset Counter 2............................................................................................................................................... 100 P02.16 - Batch control .................................................................................................................................................... 100 P02.17 - Switch Grav./Vol. command ............................................................................................................................ 100 P02.18 - Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ...................................................................................................................... 100 P02.19 - Filling control bin weigher ................................................................................................................................ 100 P02.20 - Data Log ON/OFF............................................................................................................................................ 101 P02.21 - Exit Scale ......................................................................................................................................................... 101 P03 - Feeder Definition .................................................................................................................................................. 101 P03.01 - Nominal Flow Rate .......................................................................................................................................... 101 P03.02 - Nominal Speed ................................................................................................................................................ 101 P03.03 - Flow Rate Units ............................................................................................................................................... 102 P03.04 - Counter 1 Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 102 P03.05 - Pulse Length Total ........................................................................................................................................... 102 P03.06 - Counter 2 Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 103 P03.07 - Counter 3 Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 103 P03.08 - DO Pulse Counter........................................................................................................................................... 103 P03.09 - Totalizer Increment .......................................................................................................................................... 103 P04 - Control Sources .................................................................................................................................................... 103 P04.01 - Feeder Start ..................................................................................................................................................... 104 P04.02 - Feedrate Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................ 104 P04.03 - Source Run Enable.......................................................................................................................................... 104 P04.04 - Event Run Disabled ........................................................................................................................................ 104 P04.05 - Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................. 105 P04.06 - Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................. 105 P04.07 - Relative Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................... 105 P04.08 - Difference Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................................... 105 P04.09 - Difference Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................ 106 P04.10 - Difference Flow Rate Offset............................................................................................................................. 106 P04.11 - Difference Function.......................................................................................................................................... 106 P05 - Rated Data ........................................................................................................................................................... 106 P05.01 - Pulses per length ............................................................................................................................................. 106 P05.02 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 106 P05.03 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 107 P05.04 - Effective Platform Length ................................................................................................................................. 107 P05.05 - Lever Ratio ...................................................................................................................................................... 107 P05.06 - Angle ............................................................................................................................................................... 107 P05.07 - Speed Measurement ....................................................................................................................................... 107 P05.08 - Source Load Cell ............................................................................................................................................. 108 P05.09 - Source Load Cell 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 108 P05.10 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset ....................................................................................................................... 108 P05.11 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ...................................................................................................................... 109
Index P05.12 - Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset ....................................................................................................................... 109 P05.13 - Load Cell 2 analog Input Range ...................................................................................................................... 109 P06 - Feeder control ...................................................................................................................................................... 109 P06.01 - Afterflow Totalizer ............................................................................................................................................ 109 P06.02 - Zero Drop-Out Active ....................................................................................................................................... 109 P06.03 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 110 P06.04 - Start-Up Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 110 P06.05 - DO CleanOut Timer ........................................................................................................................................ 110 P06.06 - CleanOut ON Time .......................................................................................................................................... 111 P06.07 - CleanOut OFF Time ........................................................................................................................................ 111 P06.08 - DI Chain Motion Monitor ................................................................................................................................. 111 P06.09 - Chain Motion Delay ......................................................................................................................................... 111 P06.10 - Event Chain Motion Monitor ........................................................................................................................... 112 P06.11 - Auto Zero Active .............................................................................................................................................. 112 P06.12 - Zeroing Limit .................................................................................................................................................... 112 P06.13 - Event Tare Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 113 P06.14 - Limit Value Difference ...................................................................................................................................... 113 P06.15 - Mean Limit Value ............................................................................................................................................. 113 P06.16 - Volum on LC failure ......................................................................................................................................... 114 P06.17 - Event Volum. caused by LC-error ................................................................................................................... 114 P07 - Feeder Monitoring................................................................................................................................................. 114 P07.01 - Event Stand-By ............................................................................................................................................... 114 P07.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ....................................................................................................................................... 115 P07.03 - Event Tachometer Input ................................................................................................................................. 115 P07.04 - Event Error LC Input ....................................................................................................................................... 115 P07.05 - Event LC Input < MIN ..................................................................................................................................... 115 P07.06 - Event LC Input > MAX .................................................................................................................................... 116 P07.07 - Event Setpoint Limited .................................................................................................................................... 116 P07.08 - Event Power Failure ....................................................................................................................................... 116 P07.09 - Event Memory................................................................................................................................................. 116 P07.10 - Source Emergency Setpoint ............................................................................................................................ 117 P07.11 - Emergency Setpoint ........................................................................................................................................ 117 P07.12 - Event Analog Input < Offset ............................................................................................................................ 117 P08 - Filters .................................................................................................................................................................... 117 P08.01 - Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................... 117 P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ........................................................................................................................ 117 P08.03 - Filter Belt Load................................................................................................................................................ 118 P08.04 - Filter Belt Speed ............................................................................................................................................. 118 P09 - Limit Values .......................................................................................................................................................... 118 P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................ 118 P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ........................................................................................................................... 118 P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ........................................................................................................................... 118 P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX .......................................................................................................................... 119 P09.05 - Limit Load MIN................................................................................................................................................ 119 P09.06 - Event Load MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 119 P09.07 - Limit Load MAX .............................................................................................................................................. 119 P09.08 - Event Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 119 P09.09 - Limit Speed MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 120 P09.10 - Event Speed MIN............................................................................................................................................ 120 P09.11 - Limit Speed MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 120 P09.12 - Event Speed MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 120 P10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................................................................................... 120 P10.01 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 120 P10.02 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................. 120 P10.03 - Belt Circuit Time .............................................................................................................................................. 121 P10.04 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 121 P10.05 - Basic Tare ....................................................................................................................................................... 121 P10.06 - Tare Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 121 P10.07 - Belt Circuit No. ................................................................................................................................................. 121 P11 - Rate controller ...................................................................................................................................................... 121 P11.01 - Optimize Controller .......................................................................................................................................... 122 P11.02 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 122 P11.03 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 122 P11.04 - Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................ 122 P11.05 - Time Deviation ................................................................................................................................................. 123 P11.06 - Threshold Deviation ......................................................................................................................................... 123
Index P11.07 - Factor Deviation............................................................................................................................................... 123 P11.08 - Deviation abs. max. ......................................................................................................................................... 123 P11.09 - Event Deviation............................................................................................................................................... 124 P11.10 - Event Controller Limited ................................................................................................................................. 124 P11.11 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 124 P11.12 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 125 P11.13 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 125 P11.14 - Position at STOP ............................................................................................................................................. 125 P11.15 - Volumetric Start-Up ......................................................................................................................................... 125 P11.16 - Volumetric Clearance ...................................................................................................................................... 126 P11.17 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 126 P11.18 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................ 126 P11.19 - Store ................................................................................................................................................................ 126 P11.20 - Volumetric Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 126 P11.21 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 127 P11.22 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ...................................................................................................................................... 127 P11.23 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ..................................................................................................................................... 127 P11.24 - Set/Act Sources ............................................................................................................................................... 127 P11.25 - Adaptation 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 128 P12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 128 P12.01 - AO Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................... 128 P12.02 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 128 P12.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................ 128 P12.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................... 128 P12.05 - Flow Rate Offset .............................................................................................................................................. 129 P12.06 - Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................. 129 P12.07 - AO Belt Load .................................................................................................................................................. 129 P12.08 - Belt Load Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 129 P12.09 - Belt Load Range .............................................................................................................................................. 129 P12.10 - AO Speed ....................................................................................................................................................... 129 P12.11 - Speed Offset .................................................................................................................................................... 130 P12.12 - Speed Range ................................................................................................................................................... 130 P12.13 - AO Deviation................................................................................................................................................... 130 P12.14 - Deviation Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 130 P12.15 - Deviation Range .............................................................................................................................................. 130 P12.16 - AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................ 131 P13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 131 P13.01 - Event External Event 1 ................................................................................................................................... 131 P13.02 - DI External Event 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 131 P13.03 - Event External Event 2 ................................................................................................................................... 131 P13.04 - DI External Event 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 132 P13.05 - Event External Event 3 ................................................................................................................................... 132 P13.06 - DI External Event 3 ......................................................................................................................................... 132 P13.07 - Event External Event 4 ................................................................................................................................... 132 P13.08 - DI External Event 4 ......................................................................................................................................... 132 P13.09 - DI Acknowledge Events .................................................................................................................................. 133 P13.10 - DI Local Mode................................................................................................................................................. 133 P13.11 - DI Volumetric Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 133 P13.12 - DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................... 133 P13.13 - Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ...................................................................................................................... 133 P13.14 - Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 ...................................................................................................................... 134 P13.15 - Event NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 ...................................................................................................................... 134 P13.16 - Event NAMUR Error VCU2-DI7 ...................................................................................................................... 134 P13.17 - Event NAMUR Error VCU3-DI6 ...................................................................................................................... 134 P13.18 - Event NAMUR Error VCU3-DI7 ...................................................................................................................... 135 P13.19 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 135 P13.20 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 135 P13.21 - Belt Limit Switch .............................................................................................................................................. 135 P13.22 - Event Limit Switch .......................................................................................................................................... 135 P13.23 - DI Zero Set ..................................................................................................................................................... 136 P13.24 - Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7...................................................................................................................... 136 P13.25 - Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7...................................................................................................................... 136 P14 - Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 136 P14.01 - DO Scale Start ................................................................................................................................................ 136 P14.02 - DO Feeder Started ......................................................................................................................................... 136 P14.03 - DO Start Prefeeder ......................................................................................................................................... 137
Index P14.04 - DO ALARM ..................................................................................................................................................... 137 P14.05 - DO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................. 137 P14.06 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 137 P14.07 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 137 P14.08 - DO Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 138 P14.09 - DO Load MAX................................................................................................................................................. 138 P14.10 - DO Speed MIN ............................................................................................................................................... 138 P14.11 - DO Speed MAX .............................................................................................................................................. 138 P14.12 - DO Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 138 P14.13 - DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 138 P14.14 - DO WARNING ................................................................................................................................................ 139 P14.15 - DO Keyboard Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 139 P14.16 - DO Zero Set OK ............................................................................................................................................. 139 P15 - Batch Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 139 P15.01 - Batch Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 139 P15.02 - Batch Setpoint Source ..................................................................................................................................... 139 P15.03 - Adaptation Time............................................................................................................................................... 140 P15.04 - Correction Amount ........................................................................................................................................... 140 P15.05 - Adaptation Factor ............................................................................................................................................ 140 P15.06 - Batch Automatic Record .................................................................................................................................. 140 P15.07 - DI Batch Terminate ......................................................................................................................................... 140 P15.08 - DO Batch Running .......................................................................................................................................... 141 P15.09 - DO Dribble Feed ............................................................................................................................................. 141 P15.10 - DO Full Feed .................................................................................................................................................. 141 P15.11 - Analog Setpoint Relat. ..................................................................................................................................... 141 P15.12 - Batch Setpoint Range ...................................................................................................................................... 141 P15.13 - Batch Setpoint Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 141 P15.14 - Batch Tolerance............................................................................................................................................... 142 P15.15 - Event Out of Tolerance ................................................................................................................................... 142 P15.16 - Pre-cut-off Amount........................................................................................................................................... 142 P15.17 - DO Pre-cut-off................................................................................................................................................. 142 P15.18 - Batch Setpoint Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 142 P15.19 - Event Batch setpoint Limit .............................................................................................................................. 143 P15.20 - Batch behaviour after power down .................................................................................................................. 143 P16 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................................. 143 P16.01 - Maintenance Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 143 P16.02 - Event Maint. Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 143 P16.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................ 144 P16.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................. 144 P17 - VAP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 144 P17.01 - VAP Active ....................................................................................................................................................... 144 P17.02 - Platform Dis.Length ......................................................................................................................................... 144 P18 - Belt Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 144 P18.01 - Belt Sensor Active ........................................................................................................................................... 145 P18.02 - DI Source Belt Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 145 P18.03 - BIC Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 145 P18.04 - Sensor Length ................................................................................................................................................. 145 P18.05 - Sensor Width ................................................................................................................................................... 146 P18.06 - Sensor Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 146 P18.07 - Belt Drift ........................................................................................................................................................... 146 P18.08 - Event Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................ 146 P18.09 - Belt Skew......................................................................................................................................................... 146 P18.10 - Event Belt Skew.............................................................................................................................................. 146 P18.11 - Slip Value ........................................................................................................................................................ 147 P18.12 - Event Slip ....................................................................................................................................................... 147 P18.13 - DO Belt Drift.................................................................................................................................................... 147 P18.14 - DO Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................. 147 P18.15 - DO Belt Slip .................................................................................................................................................... 148 P18.16 - DI BIC freeze .................................................................................................................................................. 148 P19 - Communication EasyServe .................................................................................................................................. 148 P19.01 - Own Address ................................................................................................................................................... 148 P19.02 - Baud Rate ........................................................................................................................................................ 148 P19.03 - Format Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 148 P20 - Communication Fieldbus ...................................................................................................................................... 149 P20.01 - Protocol Type................................................................................................................................................... 149 P20.02 - Timeout Host ................................................................................................................................................... 149
Index P20.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .......................................................................................................................... 150 P20.04 - Event Acyclic Communication......................................................................................................................... 150 P20.05 - Check in Keyboard Mode ................................................................................................................................ 150 P20.06 - Compatibility DISOCONT Master .................................................................................................................... 150 P20.07 - Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................... 150 P20.08 - Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 151 P20.09 - Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 151 P20.10 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 151 P20.11 - Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 151 P20.12 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 151 P20.13 - Data Format ..................................................................................................................................................... 152 P20.14 - Physics ............................................................................................................................................................ 152 P20.15 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 152 P20.16 - FLOAT-Format................................................................................................................................................. 152 P20.17 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 152 P20.18 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 152 P20.19 - Parameter ........................................................................................................................................................ 153 P20.20 - Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................... 153 P20.21 - READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................... 153 P20.22 - Access Rights Limitation FB ............................................................................................................................ 153 P20.23 - Remote IP Address FB .................................................................................................................................... 153 P21 - Fixed mode configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 154 P21.01 - ID Preset Value 1............................................................................................................................................. 154 P21.02 - ID Preset Value 2............................................................................................................................................. 154 P21.03 - ID Preset Value 3............................................................................................................................................. 154 P21.04 - ID Preset Value 4............................................................................................................................................. 154 P21.05 - ID Preset Value 5............................................................................................................................................. 154 P21.06 - ID Preset Value 6............................................................................................................................................. 154 P21.07 - ID Preset Value 7............................................................................................................................................. 154 P21.08 - ID Preset Value 8............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.09 - ID Read Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.10 - ID Read Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.11 - ID Read Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.12 - ID Read Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.13 - ID Read Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.14 - ID Read Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.15 - ID Read Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 155 P21.16 - ID Read Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................. 156 P21.17 - ID Read Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................. 156 P21.18 - ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................ 156 P21.19 - ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................ 156 P21.20 - ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................ 156 P21.21 - ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................ 156 P21.22 - ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................ 156 P21.23 - ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................ 156 P21.24 - ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................ 157 P22 - Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................................ 157 P22.01 - IP Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 157 P22.02 - Net Mask ......................................................................................................................................................... 157 P22.03 - Gateway .......................................................................................................................................................... 157 P23 - PLC Outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 157 P23.01 - DO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 157 P23.02 - DO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158 P23.03 - DO PLC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158 P23.04 - DO PLC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158 P23.05 - DO PLC 5 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158 P23.06 - DO PLC 6 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158 P23.07 - DO PLC 7 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158 P23.08 - DO PLC 8 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158 P23.09 - AO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 159 P23.10 - AO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 159 P24 - Interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................... 159 P24.01 - DI Event Mechanics 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 159 P24.02 - DI Event Mechanics 2 ..................................................................................................................................... 159 P24.03 - DI Event Mechanics 3 ..................................................................................................................................... 159 P24.04 - DI Event Mechanics 4 ..................................................................................................................................... 159
Index P24.05 - DI Event Mechanics 5 ..................................................................................................................................... 160 P24.06 - DI Event Electricity 1....................................................................................................................................... 160 P24.07 - DI Event Electricity 2....................................................................................................................................... 160 P24.08 - DI Event Electricity 3....................................................................................................................................... 160 P24.09 - DO Event Mechanics ...................................................................................................................................... 160 P24.10 - Event Mechanics ............................................................................................................................................ 160 P24.11 - DO Event Electricity ........................................................................................................................................ 160 P24.12 - Event Electricity .............................................................................................................................................. 161 P24.13 - DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................... 161 P24.14 - DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................... 161 P24.15 - Event Mechatronics ........................................................................................................................................ 161 P24.16 - DO Ready ....................................................................................................................................................... 161 P24.17 - Event Not Ready............................................................................................................................................. 161 P24.18 - DO Ready for Start ......................................................................................................................................... 161 P24.19 - Event Not Ready for Start ............................................................................................................................... 162 P25 - Belt Load Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 162 P25.01 - Belt Load Controller ......................................................................................................................................... 162 P25.02 - Controller Magnitude Adaption ........................................................................................................................ 162 P25.03 - Blind Distance .................................................................................................................................................. 163 P25.04 - Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 163 P25.05 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 163 P25.06 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 163 P25.07 - Position at STOP ............................................................................................................................................. 163 P25.08 - Store ................................................................................................................................................................ 164 P25.09 - Controller Magnitude Prefeeder ....................................................................................................................... 164 P25.10 - Pulse Length .................................................................................................................................................... 164 P25.11 - S P-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 164 P25.12 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................ 165 P25.13 - S Threshold Response ................................................................................................................................... 165 P25.14 - S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 165 P25.15 - S DO Close Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 165 P25.16 - QA Setpoint Source ......................................................................................................................................... 165 P25.17 - QA Setpoint Range .......................................................................................................................................... 166 P25.18 - QA Setpoint Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 166 P25.19 - QA-Vmin .......................................................................................................................................................... 166 P25.20 - QA-Qmin .......................................................................................................................................................... 167 P25.21 - QA-Ypuls ......................................................................................................................................................... 168 P25.22 - QA-Ymin .......................................................................................................................................................... 168 P25.23 - QA Coeffizient Calculation ............................................................................................................................... 169 P25.24 - Yz Dead Time .................................................................................................................................................. 169 P25.25 - QA Filter Coefficient......................................................................................................................................... 169 P25.26 - QA v-Adaption ................................................................................................................................................. 170 P25.27 - QA Upper Limit relative .................................................................................................................................... 170 P25.28 - Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge ......................................................................................................................... 170 P25.29 - QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge ........................................................................................................................... 170 P26 - Bin Weigher .......................................................................................................................................................... 170 P26.01 - Bin Weigher Active .......................................................................................................................................... 171 P26.02 - LC Load Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 171 P26.03 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 171 P26.04 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 172 P26.05 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 172 P26.06 - Bipolar Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 172 P26.07 - Event Error LC Input (Bin) .............................................................................................................................. 172 P26.08 - Event LC Input > MAX .................................................................................................................................... 173 P26.09 - Nominal Bin Load ............................................................................................................................................ 173 P26.10 - Display Format................................................................................................................................................. 173 P26.11 - Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................... 173 P26.12 - Control Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 174 P26.13 - Control Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 174 P26.14 - DO Bin Filling .................................................................................................................................................. 174 P26.15 - Bin Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 174 P26.16 - Event Bin Level MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 175 P26.17 - DO Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 175 P26.18 - Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 175 P26.19 - Event Bin Level MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 175 P26.20 - DO Bin Level MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 176
Index P26.21 - AO Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................... 176 P26.22 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 176 P26.23 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 176 P26.24 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................. 176 P26.25 - Tare (Bin)......................................................................................................................................................... 177 P26.26 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 177 P26.27 - Controller in OFF-Mode ................................................................................................................................... 177 P26.28 - DI Bin Load Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 177 P26.29 - Event Bin Load MAX Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 177 P26.30 - Bin Level analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................... 178 P26.31 - Bin Level analog Input Range .......................................................................................................................... 178 P27 - Bin Level Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 178 P27.01 - Bin Controller ON............................................................................................................................................. 178 P27.02 - Filling Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 179 P27.03 - AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level................................................................................................................. 179 P27.04 - DO Feeder ON................................................................................................................................................ 179 P27.05 - Setpoint Bin Level ............................................................................................................................................ 179 P27.06 - Feeder Constant .............................................................................................................................................. 179 P27.07 - Dead Time TT .................................................................................................................................................. 179 P27.08 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 180 P27.09 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 180 P27.10 - D Portion TV .................................................................................................................................................... 180 P27.11 - D Filter TD ....................................................................................................................................................... 180 P27.12 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 180 P27.13 - Bypass D Portion ............................................................................................................................................. 181 P27.14 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 181 P27.15 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 181 P27.16 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 181 P27.17 - Dead Band Deviation ....................................................................................................................................... 181 P27.18 - Dead Band Factor............................................................................................................................................ 181 P27.19 - Setpoint Filter................................................................................................................................................... 182 P27.20 - Flow Rate Filter................................................................................................................................................ 182 P27.21 - DI Init. Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 182 P27.22 - Bin Setpoint source.......................................................................................................................................... 182 P28 - 2nd Weighbridge................................................................................................................................................... 182 P28.01 - 2nd Weighbridge active ................................................................................................................................... 182 P28.02 - 2nd Weighbridge.............................................................................................................................................. 183 P28.03 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 183 P28.04 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 183 P28.05 - Effective Platform Length ................................................................................................................................. 183 P28.06 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 183 P28.07 - Event Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) .................................................................................................................. 184 P28.08 - 2nd Bridge MIN ................................................................................................................................................ 184 P28.09 - Event 2nd Bridge MIN..................................................................................................................................... 184 P28.10 - DO 2nd Bridge MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 184 P28.11 - 2nd Bridge MAX............................................................................................................................................... 184 P28.12 - Event 2nd Bridge MAX ................................................................................................................................... 185 P28.13 - DO 2nd Bridge MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 185 P28.14 - Range Correction (2nd Bridge) ........................................................................................................................ 185 P28.15 - Tare (2nd Bridge)............................................................................................................................................. 185 P28.16 - Controller active ............................................................................................................................................... 185 P28.17 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 185 P28.18 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 186 P28.19 - Analog Output 2nd Bridge ............................................................................................................................... 186 P28.20 - 2nd Bridge Offset ............................................................................................................................................. 186 P28.21 - 2nd Bridge Range ............................................................................................................................................ 186 P28.22 - 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................ 186 P28.23 - 2nd Bridge analog Input Range ....................................................................................................................... 187 P29 - Check System ...................................................................................................................................................... 187 P29.01 - Type of Check System ..................................................................................................................................... 187 P29.02 - Auto Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 188 P29.03 - Cyclic Auto Start .............................................................................................................................................. 188 P29.04 - Cycle Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 188 P29.05 - Release Check System ................................................................................................................................... 188 P29.06 - Event No Check Release................................................................................................................................ 189 P29.07 - Check Start Span............................................................................................................................................. 189
Index P29.08 - Check Start Tare.............................................................................................................................................. 189 P29.09 - Accept Correction ............................................................................................................................................ 189 P29.10 - Finish Check Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 190 P29.11 - Set Quantity or Rotations ................................................................................................................................ 190 P29.12 - Check Circuits.................................................................................................................................................. 190 P29.13 - Check Quantity ................................................................................................................................................ 190 P29.14 - Storage Quantity .............................................................................................................................................. 191 P29.15 - Minimum Check Quantity................................................................................................................................. 191 P29.16 - Event Minimum Check Quantity...................................................................................................................... 191 P29.17 - Minimum Fill Weight ........................................................................................................................................ 192 P29.18 - Event Minimum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................. 192 P29.19 - Maximum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................... 192 P29.20 - Event Maximum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................ 192 P29.21 - Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................. 193 P29.22 - Blind Distance .................................................................................................................................................. 193 P29.23 - DO Control Started ......................................................................................................................................... 193 P29.24 - Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................... 193 P29.25 - Event Feeder Not Stopped ............................................................................................................................. 194 P29.26 - Event Prepare Check Measurement ............................................................................................................... 194 P29.27 - DO Check Measurement Active...................................................................................................................... 194 P29.28 - Event Expect Acceptance ............................................................................................................................... 194 P29.29 - DO Expect Acceptance.................................................................................................................................... 195 P29.30 - Absolute Range ............................................................................................................................................... 195 P29.31 - Relative Range ................................................................................................................................................ 195 P29.32 - Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 196 P29.33 - Event Relative Tare Correction Error .............................................................................................................. 196 P29.34 - Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................ 197 P29.35 - Event Relative Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 197 P29.36 - Correction Evaluation ...................................................................................................................................... 197 P29.37 - Correction Speed ............................................................................................................................................. 197 P29.38 - AO Check Measurement Result ..................................................................................................................... 198 P29.39 - DO Check Gate .............................................................................................................................................. 198 P29.40 - Check Gate Feedback ..................................................................................................................................... 198 P29.41 - Check Gate Time ............................................................................................................................................. 199 P29.42 - Event Check Gate Error.................................................................................................................................. 199 P29.43 - Limit Max. Bin Error ......................................................................................................................................... 199 P29.44 - Event Bin Error ............................................................................................................................................... 200 P29.45 - DO Correction Error ........................................................................................................................................ 200 P30 - Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................ 200 P30.01 - Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................ 200 P30.02 - Moisture Select ................................................................................................................................................ 201 P30.03 - AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................... 201 P30.04 - Nominal Moisture ............................................................................................................................................. 201 P30.05 - Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 201 P30.06 - Moisture Range ............................................................................................................................................... 201 P30.07 - DO Moisture active ......................................................................................................................................... 202 P30.08 - Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 202 P30.09 - DO Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 202 P30.10 - Event Moisture MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 202 P30.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................. 202 P30.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 203 P30.13 - AO Flow Rate Range ...................................................................................................................................... 203 P30.14 - Pulse Counter corrected .................................................................................................................................. 203 P31 - Dead Time ............................................................................................................................................................ 203 P31.01 - Dead Time Active ............................................................................................................................................ 203 P31.02 - Dead Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 203 P31.03 - Setpoint Select................................................................................................................................................. 204 P31.04 - Setpoint Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 204 P31.05 - ON/OFF Select ................................................................................................................................................ 204 P31.06 - ON/OFF Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 204 P31.07 - Time Elements Preassign ................................................................................................................................ 204 P31.08 - Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................... 204 P31.09 - DO Dead Time Active ..................................................................................................................................... 205 P31.10 - DO Setpoint Active ......................................................................................................................................... 205 P31.11 - DO ON/OFF Active ......................................................................................................................................... 205 P32 - Linearization ......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Index P32.01 - Linearization ON .............................................................................................................................................. 205 P32.02 - Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................... 205 P32.03 - Linearization I1 ................................................................................................................................................ 206 P32.04 - Linearization S2 ............................................................................................................................................... 206 P32.05 - Linearization I2 ................................................................................................................................................ 206 P32.06 - Linearization S3 ............................................................................................................................................... 206 P32.07 - Linearization I3 ................................................................................................................................................ 206 P32.08 - Linearization S4 ............................................................................................................................................... 206 P32.09 - Linearization I4 ................................................................................................................................................ 206 P32.10 - Event Linearization Error ................................................................................................................................ 207 P33 - Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 207 P33.01 - AI Position Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................... 207 P33.02 - AI Offset.......................................................................................................................................................... 207 P33.03 - AI Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 207 P33.04 - AO Position Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 207 P33.05 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 207 P33.06 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 208 P33.07 - Event MIN Flow Gate ...................................................................................................................................... 208 P33.08 - Position MIN Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 208 P33.09 - Event MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 208 P33.10 - Position MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................. 208 P34 - 2-Sensor Slip ........................................................................................................................................................ 209 P34.01 - 2-Sensor Slip active ......................................................................................................................................... 209 P34.02 - Source Sensor 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 209 P34.03 - DI Sensor 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 209 P34.04 - Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ......................................................................................................................... 209 P34.05 - DI Sensor 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 209 P34.06 - Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ......................................................................................................................... 209 P34.07 - Slip Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 210 P34.08 - Event Slip 2..................................................................................................................................................... 210 P34.09 - DO Slip 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 210 P35 - Pressure Compensation ....................................................................................................................................... 210 P35.01 - Compensation Active ....................................................................................................................................... 210 P35.02 - Compensation Source ..................................................................................................................................... 211 P35.03 - Pressure Characteristic Value ......................................................................................................................... 211 P35.04 - Pressure Rated Cap. ....................................................................................................................................... 211 P35.05 - Filter Pressure Value DMS .............................................................................................................................. 211 P35.06 - Event DMS-Input ............................................................................................................................................ 211 P35.07 - Event DMS-Input > MAX................................................................................................................................. 212 P35.08 - Event DMS-Input < MIN .................................................................................................................................. 212 P35.09 - Zero ................................................................................................................................................................. 212 P35.10 - Norming ........................................................................................................................................................... 212 P35.11 - Pressure-MIN................................................................................................................................................... 213 P35.12 - Event Pressure-MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 213 P35.13 - DO Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 213 P35.14 - Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 213 P35.15 - Event Pressure-MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 213 P35.16 - DO Pressure-MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 214 P35.17 - DI Switch On Compensation ........................................................................................................................... 214 P35.18 - Compensation analog Input Offset .................................................................................................................. 214 P35.19 - Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................. 214 P36 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................................................................................. 214 P36.01 - FCB_AO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 214 P36.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 214 P36.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 215 P36.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 215 P36.05 - FCB_AO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 215 P36.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 215 P36.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 215 P36.08 - Reference FCB_AO 2 ...................................................................................................................................... 215 P36.09 - FCB_AO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 216 P36.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 216 P36.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................ 216 P36.12 - Reference FCB_AO 3 ...................................................................................................................................... 216 P36.13 - FCB_AO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 216 P36.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 216
Index P36.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................ 217 P36.16 - Reference FCB_AO 4 ...................................................................................................................................... 217 P36.17 - FCB_AO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 217 P36.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 217 P36.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................ 217 P36.20 - Reference FCB_AO 5 ...................................................................................................................................... 218 P36.21 - FCB Variant ..................................................................................................................................................... 218 P36.22 - Event FCB-Error ............................................................................................................................................. 218 P37 - FCB digital outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 218 P37.01 - FCB_DO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 218 P37.02 - FCB_DO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219 P37.03 - FCB_DO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219 P37.04 - FCB_DO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219 P37.05 - FCB_DO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219 P37.06 - FCB_DO 06 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219 P37.07 - FCB_DO 07 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219 P37.08 - FCB_DO 08 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219 P37.09 - FCB_DO 09 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220 P37.10 - FCB_DO 10 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220 P37.11 - FCB_DO 11 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220 P37.12 - FCB_DO 12 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220 P37.13 - FCB_DO 13 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220 P37.14 - FCB_DO 14 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220 P37.15 - FCB_DO 15 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220 P37.16 - FCB_DO 16 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221 P37.17 - FCB_DO 17 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221 P37.18 - FCB_DO 18 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221 P37.19 - FCB_DO 19 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221 P37.20 - FCB_DO 20 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221 P38 - Data Logging ........................................................................................................................................................ 221 P38.01 - Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................ 221 P38.02 - Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................... 221 P38.03 - Logger cycle time............................................................................................................................................. 222 P38.04 - Data Log Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 222 P38.05 - Data Log Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 222 P38.06 - Data Log Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 222 P38.07 - Data Log Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 222 P38.08 - Data Log Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 222 P38.09 - Data Log Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................. 222 P38.10 - Data Log Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................. 223 P38.11 - Data Log Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................. 223 P38.12 - Data Log Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................. 223 P38.13 - Data Log Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................... 223 P39 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................................................................................... 223 P39.01 - HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................... 223 P39.02 - HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................... 223 P39.03 - HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P39.04 - HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P39.05 - HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P39.06 - HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P39.07 - HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P39.08 - HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P39.09 - HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P39.10 - HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 224 P40 - Local Mode (Speed) ............................................................................................................................................. 225 P40.01 - Motor Select (Block 1) ..................................................................................................................................... 225 P40.02 - ON in Remote (Block 1) ................................................................................................................................... 225 P40.03 - Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................ 226 P40.04 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) .............................................................................................................. 226 P40.05 - JOG enable (Block 1) ...................................................................................................................................... 226 P40.06 - Release local Start (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 226 P40.07 - DI External Error 1 (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 227 P40.08 - DI External Error 2 (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 227 P40.09 - DI External Error 3 (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 227 P40.10 - DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 227 P40.11 - Motor Select (Block 2) ..................................................................................................................................... 227
Index P40.12 - ON in Remote (Block 2) ................................................................................................................................... 228 P40.13 - Controller Magnitude (Block 2) ........................................................................................................................ 228 P40.14 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 2) .............................................................................................................. 228 P40.15 - JOG enable (Block 2) ...................................................................................................................................... 228 P40.16 - Release local Start (Block 2) ........................................................................................................................... 228 P40.17 - DI External Error 1 (Block 2) ........................................................................................................................... 228 P40.18 - DI External Error 2 (Block 2) ........................................................................................................................... 229 P40.19 - DI External Error 3 (Block 2) ........................................................................................................................... 229 P40.20 - DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 2) ........................................................................................................................... 229 P40.21 - Motor Select (Block 3) ..................................................................................................................................... 229 P40.22 - ON in Remote (Block 3) ................................................................................................................................... 229 P40.23 - Controller Magnitude (Block 3) ........................................................................................................................ 230 P40.24 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 3) .............................................................................................................. 230 P40.25 - JOG enable (Block 3) ...................................................................................................................................... 230 P40.26 - Release local Start (Block 3) ........................................................................................................................... 230 P40.27 - DI External Error 1 (Block 3) ........................................................................................................................... 230 P40.28 - DI External Error 2 (Block 3) ........................................................................................................................... 230 P40.29 - DI External Error 3 (Block 3) ........................................................................................................................... 231 P40.30 - DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 3) ........................................................................................................................... 231 P40.31 - Motor Select (Block 4) ..................................................................................................................................... 231 P40.32 - ON in Remote (Block 4) ................................................................................................................................... 231 P40.33 - Controller Magnitude (Block 4) ........................................................................................................................ 231 P40.34 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 4) .............................................................................................................. 232 P40.35 - JOG enable (Block 4) ...................................................................................................................................... 232 P40.36 - Release local Start (Block 4) ........................................................................................................................... 232 P40.37 - DI External Error 1 (Block 4) ........................................................................................................................... 232 P40.38 - DI External Error 2 (Block 4) ........................................................................................................................... 232 P40.39 - DI External Error 3 (Block 4) ........................................................................................................................... 232 P40.40 - DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 4) ........................................................................................................................... 233 P40.41 - Motor Select (Block 5) ..................................................................................................................................... 233 P40.42 - ON in Remote (Block 5) ................................................................................................................................... 233 P40.43 - Controller Magnitude (Block 5) ........................................................................................................................ 233 P40.44 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 5) .............................................................................................................. 233 P40.45 - JOG enable (Block 5) ...................................................................................................................................... 234 P40.46 - Release local Start (Block 5) ........................................................................................................................... 234 P40.47 - DI External Error 1 (Block 5) ........................................................................................................................... 234 P40.48 - DI External Error 2 (Block 5) ........................................................................................................................... 234 P40.49 - DI External Error 3 (Block 5) ........................................................................................................................... 234 P40.50 - DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 5) ........................................................................................................................... 234 P41 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................................................................................ 235 P41.01 - Motor Select..................................................................................................................................................... 235 P41.02 - OPEN in Remote ............................................................................................................................................. 235 P41.03 - DI Limit Switch OPEN ..................................................................................................................................... 235 P41.04 - CLOSE in Remote ........................................................................................................................................... 235 P41.05 - DI Limit Switch CLOSE ................................................................................................................................... 236 P41.06 - Release local Start........................................................................................................................................... 236 P41.07 - DI External Error 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 236 P41.08 - DI External Error 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 236 P41.09 - DI External Error 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 236 Parameter ...................................................................................................................................................................... 153 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules......................................................................................................................... 93 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ........................................................................................................................... 96 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ......................................................................................................................... 101 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ........................................................................................................................... 103 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .................................................................................................................................. 106 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ............................................................................................................................. 109 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring........................................................................................................................ 114 Parameter Block 08 - Filters ........................................................................................................................................... 117 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ................................................................................................................................. 118 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ........................................................................................................................... 120 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ............................................................................................................................. 121 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 128 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 131 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 136 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ................................................................................................................................. 139 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval.................................................................................................................... 143
Index Parameter Block 17 - VAP ............................................................................................................................................. 144 Parameter Block 18 - Belt Monitoring ............................................................................................................................. 144 Parameter Block 19 - Communication EasyServe ......................................................................................................... 148 Parameter Block 20 - Communication Fieldbus ............................................................................................................. 148 Parameter Block 21 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................ 153 Parameter Block 22 - Ethernet ....................................................................................................................................... 157 Parameter Block 23 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 157 Parameter Block 24 - Interlocking .................................................................................................................................. 159 Parameter Block 25 - Belt Load Controller ..................................................................................................................... 162 Parameter Block 26 - Bin Weigher ................................................................................................................................. 170 Parameter Block 27 - Bin Level Controller ..................................................................................................................... 178 Parameter Block 28 - 2nd Weighbridge.......................................................................................................................... 182 Parameter Block 29 - Check System ............................................................................................................................. 187 Parameter Block 30 - Moisture ....................................................................................................................................... 200 Parameter Block 31 - Dead Time ................................................................................................................................... 203 Parameter Block 32 - Linearization ................................................................................................................................ 205 Parameter Block 33 - Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 207 Parameter Block 34 - 2-Sensor Slip ............................................................................................................................... 208 Parameter Block 35 - Pressure Compensation .............................................................................................................. 210 Parameter Block 36 - FCB analog outputs ..................................................................................................................... 214 Parameter Block 37 - FCB digital outputs ...................................................................................................................... 218 Parameter Block 38 - Data Logging ............................................................................................................................... 221 Parameter Block 39 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................ 223 Parameter Block 40 - Local Mode (Speed) .................................................................................................................... 225 Parameter Block 41 - Local Mode (Gate) ....................................................................................................................... 234 Parameter Details ............................................................................................................................................................ 93 Parameter List .................................................................................................................................................................. 69 Parameter Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 69 Parameters....................................................................................................................................................................... 65 Password ......................................................................................................................................................................... 99 P-Component KP ........................................................................................................................................... 122, 180, 185 Physics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 152 Platform Dis.Length ........................................................................................................................................................ 144 PLC Functionality (Optional) .......................................................................................................................................... 295 PLC Outputs................................................................................................................................................................... 157 Position at STOP.................................................................................................................................................... 125, 163 Position MAX Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................ 208 Position MIN Flow Gate.................................................................................................................................................. 208 Pre-cut-off Amount ......................................................................................................................................................... 142 Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................................. 153 Pressure Characteristic Value ........................................................................................................................................ 211 Pressure Compensation ................................................................................................................................................. 210 Pressure Rated Cap. ...................................................................................................................................................... 211 Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................................ 213 Pressure-MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 213 Protocol Type ................................................................................................................................................................. 149 Pulse Counter corrected................................................................................................................................................. 203 Pulse Length .................................................................................................................................................................. 164 Pulse Length Total ......................................................................................................................................................... 102 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ............................................................................................................... 293 Pulses per length ........................................................................................................................................................... 106 QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge .......................................................................................................................................... 170 QA Coeffizient Calculation ............................................................................................................................................. 169 QA Filter Coefficient ....................................................................................................................................................... 169 QA Setpoint Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 166 QA Setpoint Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 166 QA Setpoint Source ....................................................................................................................................................... 165 QA Upper Limit relative .................................................................................................................................................. 170 QA v-Adaption ................................................................................................................................................................ 170 QA-Qmin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 167 QA-Vmin......................................................................................................................................................................... 166 QA-Ymin......................................................................................................................................................................... 168 QA-Ypuls ........................................................................................................................................................................ 168 Range Correction ................................................................................................................................................... 120, 176 Range Correction (2nd Bridge) ...................................................................................................................................... 185 Range FCB_AO 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 215
Index Range FCB_AO 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 215 Range FCB_AO 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 216 Range FCB_AO 4 .......................................................................................................................................................... 217 Range FCB_AO 5 .......................................................................................................................................................... 217 Rate controller ................................................................................................................................................................ 121 Rated Data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 106 READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................................. 153 Reading and Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 35 Reference FCB_AO 1..................................................................................................................................................... 215 Reference FCB_AO 2..................................................................................................................................................... 215 Reference FCB_AO 3..................................................................................................................................................... 216 Reference FCB_AO 4..................................................................................................................................................... 217 Reference FCB_AO 5..................................................................................................................................................... 218 regulated .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Relative Range............................................................................................................................................................... 195 Relative Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................................. 28 Relative Setpoint Offset.................................................................................................................................................. 105 Relativer Setpoint Range ............................................................................................................................................... 105 Release Check System .................................................................................................................................................. 188 Release local Start ......................................................................................................................................................... 236 Release local Start (Block 1) .......................................................................................................................................... 226 Release local Start (Block 2) .......................................................................................................................................... 228 Release local Start (Block 3) .......................................................................................................................................... 230 Release local Start (Block 4) .......................................................................................................................................... 232 Release local Start (Block 5) .......................................................................................................................................... 234 Remote IP Address FB................................................................................................................................................... 153 Remote IP Address HMI 1................................................................................................................................................ 97 Remote IP Address HMI 2................................................................................................................................................ 98 Remote IP Address HMI 3................................................................................................................................................ 98 Reset Counter 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 100 Reset Counter 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 100 Reset to Factory Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 36 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter .................................................................................................................. 29 Resolution ...................................................................................................................................................................... 151 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .................................................. 27 S DO Close Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 165 S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 165 S I-Component .............................................................................................................................................................. 165 S P-Component............................................................................................................................................................. 164 S Threshold Response .................................................................................................................................................. 165 Safety notes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3 SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ....................................................................................................................................... 253 SC02 Event Stand-By .................................................................................................................................................. 253 SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run .................................................................................................................................... 254 SC04 Event Maint. Electric........................................................................................................................................... 254 SC05 Event External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 254 SC06 Event External Event 2 ....................................................................................................................................... 254 SC11 Event External Event 3 ....................................................................................................................................... 254 SC12 Event External Event 4 ....................................................................................................................................... 254 Scale calibration ............................................................................................................................................................... 55 Scale Name...................................................................................................................................................................... 97 Selecting the operating range .......................................................................................................................................... 25 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) .................................................................................................................. 39 Sensor Length ................................................................................................................................................................ 145 Sensor Offset ................................................................................................................................................................. 146 Sensor Width.................................................................................................................................................................. 146 Separated Units Control Type .......................................................................................................................................... 48 Sequence Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................... 253 Service Functions ............................................................................................................................................................. 35 Set Quantity or Rotations .............................................................................................................................................. 190 Set setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................................... 28 Set the Homepage (Config).............................................................................................................................................. 39 Set/Act Sources ............................................................................................................................................................. 127 Setpoint and switch-on sources ..................................................................................................................................... 257 Setpoint Bin Level .......................................................................................................................................................... 179 Setpoint Clock ON .......................................................................................................................................................... 204
Index Setpoint Filter ................................................................................................................................................................. 182 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord .................................................................................................................................................... 127 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ................................................................................................................................................... 127 Setpoint Offset ....................................................................................................................................................... 126, 128 Setpoint Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 126, 128 Setpoint Select ............................................................................................................................................................... 204 Setting belt run monitoring ............................................................................................................................................... 56 Setting Control ................................................................................................................................................................. 59 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ..................................................................................................................................... 38 Setting the Clock .............................................................................................................................................................. 36 Setting the Display ........................................................................................................................................................... 38 Signal Words ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Signal Words for Application Notes .................................................................................................................................... 5 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Simulation Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 36 Single Unit Control Type .................................................................................................................................................. 48 Slip Value ....................................................................................................................................................................... 147 Slip Value 2 .................................................................................................................................................................... 210 Some Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Source Emergency Setpoint........................................................................................................................................... 117 Source Load Cell ............................................................................................................................................................ 108 Source Load Cell 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 108 Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................ 105 Source Run Enable ........................................................................................................................................................ 104 Source Sensor 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 209 Special Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 30 Speed Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 107 Speed Offset .................................................................................................................................................................. 130 Speed Range ................................................................................................................................................................. 130 Stand-By Limit Value ...................................................................................................................................................... 115 Startup.............................................................................................................................................................................. 53 Start-Up Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 110 Storage Quantity ............................................................................................................................................................ 191 Store....................................................................................................................................................................... 126, 164 Switch Feeding On/Off ..................................................................................................................................................... 28 Switch Grav./Vol. command ........................................................................................................................................... 100 Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 100 Switch on.......................................................................................................................................................................... 17 Switching the Scales On/Off............................................................................................................................................. 28 SY01 Event Memory .................................................................................................................................................... 254 SY02 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 255 SY03 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ........................................................................................................... 255 SY04 Event Communication HMI 1 .............................................................................................................................. 255 SY05 Event Communication HMI 2 .............................................................................................................................. 255 SY06 Event Communication HMI 3 .............................................................................................................................. 255 SY07 Event Communication VHM serial ...................................................................................................................... 255 SY08 Event Cyclic Communication .............................................................................................................................. 256 SY10 Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................ 256 SY15 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ........................................................................................................... 256 SY16 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 256 Symbol for Running Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 26 System Message ............................................................................................................................................................ 254 Tab.01: Definition for formula symbols ............................................................................................................................... 8 Tab.02: Operating access ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Tab.03: Function calls on the scales controller homepage............................................................................................... 22 Tab.04: Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation ................................................................................ 26 Tab.05: Control keys ........................................................................................................................................................ 31 Tab.06: Keys in the lines configuration ............................................................................................................................ 32 Tab.07: Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5) ...................................................................................... 33 Tab.08: Bin weigher parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Tab.09: Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level ..................................................................................................... 35 Tab.10: Parameter sets: Usage and activation ................................................................................................................ 36 Tab.11: Keys for the calibration programs........................................................................................................................ 37 Tab.12: Keys in the VHM configuration dialog ................................................................................................................. 38 Tab.13: Fields for setting the address .............................................................................................................................. 38 Tab.14: Parameters for the display .................................................................................................................................. 38
Index Tab.15: Keys in the list of scales ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Tab.16: Setting startup routine ......................................................................................................................................... 39 Tab.17: Alternatives ......................................................................................................................................................... 40 Tab.18: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 42 Tab.19: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 43 Tab.20: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 44 Tab.21: Handling the results of control ............................................................................................................................. 44 Tab.22: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 45 Tab.23: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 46 Tab.24: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 46 Tab.25: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 47 Tab.26: Basic parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 54 Tab.27: Activating belt run monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 58 Tab.28: The control procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 59 Tab.29: Suggested measures .......................................................................................................................................... 63 Tab.30: Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus................................................................................................. 65 Tab.31: Abbreviations frequently used in parameters ...................................................................................................... 66 Tab.32: Step-by-step specification of signal links............................................................................................................. 67 Tab.33: Signal sources and their descriptions.................................................................................................................. 67 Tab.34: Meaning of the columns ...................................................................................................................................... 67 Tab.35: The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal .......................................................... 68 Tab.36: Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel....................................................... 68 Tab.37: Event classes ...................................................................................................................................................... 68 Tab.38: Event groups ..................................................................................................................................................... 237 Tab.39: States and points in time in the flow chart ......................................................................................................... 258 Tab.40: Relevant parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 259 Tab.41: Controller Modes ............................................................................................................................................... 263 Tab.42: Special operating modes................................................................................................................................... 264 Tab.43: Controller parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 264 Tab.44: Special cases of controller parameter setting ................................................................................................... 264 Tab.45: The effect of selected parameters of the universal controller ............................................................................ 266 Tab.46: Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder................................................................... 268 Tab.47: Continuous signals ............................................................................................................................................ 274 Tab.48: Legend .............................................................................................................................................................. 287 Tab.49: Long counting pulse .......................................................................................................................................... 293 Tab.50: Counting pulse weight ....................................................................................................................................... 293 Tab.51: Blocks available for processing binary signals .................................................................................................. 298 Tare (2nd Bridge) ........................................................................................................................................................... 185 Tare (Bin) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 177 Tare Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 121 Tare the beltweigher ........................................................................................................................................................ 42 Taring the bin weigher ...................................................................................................................................................... 45 Terminology ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................................................. 54 The beltweigher with feed control ..................................................................................................................................... 12 The logic for position-controlled feed gates .................................................................................................................... 275 The Setting Regulation ..................................................................................................................................................... 55 The web server in the scales controller (VCU) ................................................................................................................. 21 Threshold Deviation ....................................................................................................................................................... 123 Time Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................... 123 Time Elements Preassign .............................................................................................................................................. 204 Timeout Host .................................................................................................................................................................. 149 Totalizer Increment ........................................................................................................................................................ 103 Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................ 31 Type of Check System ................................................................................................................................................... 187 Types of control measurement ......................................................................................................................................... 48 Units ................................................................................................................................................................................. 97 unregulated ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Upper Limit ..................................................................................................................................................... 125, 163, 181 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ........................................................................... 294 VAP ................................................................................................................................................................................ 144 VAP Active ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144 VCU2 Analog Channel A10 ............................................................................................................................................. 94 VCU2 Analog Channel A11 ............................................................................................................................................. 94 VCU20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 94 VCU20100-Unit 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 95
Index VCU3 Analog Channel A10 ............................................................................................................................................. 95 VCU3 Analog Channel A11 ............................................................................................................................................. 95 VHM operating panel ....................................................................................................................................................... 23 VHM RS485 Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 95 VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 96 VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 96 Volum on LC failure ........................................................................................................................................................ 114 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation ...................................................... 30 Volumetric Clearance ..................................................................................................................................................... 126 Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 10, 126 Volumetric Start-Up ........................................................................................................................................................ 125 Volumetric Synchronous Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 10 WE01 Event Power Failure .......................................................................................................................................... 244 WE02 Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ......................................................................................................................... 244 WE03 Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 ......................................................................................................................... 244 WE04 Event NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 ......................................................................................................................... 244 WE05 Event NAMUR Error VCU2-DI7 ......................................................................................................................... 244 WE06 Event NAMUR Error VCU3-DI6 ......................................................................................................................... 245 WE07 Event NAMUR Error VCU3-DI7 ......................................................................................................................... 245 WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset............................................................................................................................... 245 WE13 Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ........................................................................................................................ 245 WE14 Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ........................................................................................................................ 245 Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity........................................................................................................................ 10 Weighing Platforms ........................................................................................................................................................ 289 What is the DISOCONT Tersus? ....................................................................................................................................... 7 WM01 Event Limit Switch............................................................................................................................................. 250 WM02 Event Slip .......................................................................................................................................................... 250 WM03 Event Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................ 250 WM04 Event Belt Drift .................................................................................................................................................. 251 WM05 Event Slip 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 251 WM06 Event Chain Motion Monitor.............................................................................................................................. 251 Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................. 150 Yz Dead Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 169 Zero ................................................................................................................................................................................ 212 Zero Drop-Out Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 109 Zero Drop-Out Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 110 Zeroing Limit .................................................................................................................................................................. 112
